all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | labels |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
TempConfidential LARA-R2 SysIntegrManual (UBX-16010573) rev1 | Users Manual | 3.43 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.13 MiB | February 14 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.30 MiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.45 MiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
TempConfidential LARA-R202 Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 149.37 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 247.60 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
TempConfidential LARA-R202 External Photos | External Photos | 200.64 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
LARA-R202 label exhibit R1 | ID Label/Location Info | 296.48 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 76.67 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Autho Letter from test lab | Cover Letter(s) | 443.78 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 64.75 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | June 09 2021 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
MPE Report | RF Exposure Info | 378.50 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Op Desc Ant | Operational Description | 3.09 MiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 56.60 KiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report | Test Report | 1.32 MiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 1.16 MiB | June 09 2021 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Agent Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 163.97 KiB | February 14 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 152.86 KiB | February 14 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Confidential Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 106.65 KiB | February 14 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description | Operational Description | February 14 2020 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
SAR Report | RF Exposure Info | 5.17 MiB | February 14 2020 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
FCC Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 398.50 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
FCC modular approval AT | Cover Letter(s) | 362.98 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
TCB Request for Confidentiality LARA-R2 | Cover Letter(s) | 849.59 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 | TempConfidential LARA-R2 SysIntegrManual (UBX-16010573) rev1 | Users Manual | 3.43 MiB |
LARA-R2 series Size-optimized LTE Cat 1 modules in single and multi-mode configurations System Integration Manual Abstract This document describes the features and the system integration of LARA-R2 series multi-mode cellular modules. These modules are a complete, cost efficient and performance optimized LTE Cat 1 / 3G / 2G multi-mode solution covering up to 4 LTE bands, up to 2 UMTS/HSPA bands and up to 2 GSM/EGPRS bands in the very small and compact LARA form factor. www.u-blox.com UBX-16010573 - R10 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Document Information Title Subtitle LARA-R2 series Size-optimized LTE Cat 1 modules in single and multi-mode configurations Document type System Integration Manual Document number UBX-16010573 Revision, date R10 Disclosure restriction Product Status Corresponding content status 27-Oct-2017 Functional Sample Draft For functional testing. Revised and supplementary data will be published later. In Development /
Prototype Objective Specification Target values. Revised and supplementary data will be published later. Engineering Sample Advance Information Data based on early testing. Revised and supplementary data will be published later. Initial Production Early Prod. Information Data from product verification. Revised and supplementary data may be published later. Mass Production /
End of Life Production Information Final product specification. This document applies to the following products:
Name Type number Modem version Application version PCN reference Product status LARA-R202 LARA-R203 LARA-R204 LARA-R211 LARA-R220 LARA-R280 LARA-R202-02B-00 LARA-R203-02B-00 LARA-R204-02B-00 LARA-R211-02B-00 LARA-R220-62B-00 LARA-R280-02B-00 30.42 30.39 31.34 30.31 30.43 30.43 A01.00 A01.00 A01.00 A01.00 A01.00 A01.00 UBX-17057959 Initial Production UBX-17048311 Initial Production UBX-17012269 Initial Production UBX-17012270 Initial Production UBX-17056886 Engineering Samples UBX-17056887 Engineering Samples u-blox reserves all rights to this document and the information contained herein. Products, names, logos and designs described herein may in whole or in part be subject to intellectual property rights. Reproduction, use, modification or disclosure to third parties of this document or any part thereof without the express permission of u-blox is strictly prohibited. The information contained herein is provided as is and u-blox assumes no liability for the use of the information. No warranty, either express or implied, is given, including but not limited, with respect to the accuracy, correctness, reliability and fitness for a particular purpose of the information. This document may be revised by u-blox at any time. For most recent documents, please visit www.u-blox.com. Copyright 2017, u-blox AG u-blox is a registered trademark of u-blox Holding AG in the EU and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other registered trademarks or trademarks mentioned in this document are property of their respective owners. UBX-16010573 - R10 Page 2 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Preface u-blox Technical Documentation As part of our commitment to customer support, u-blox maintains an extensive volume of technical documentation for our products. In addition to our product-specific technical data sheets, the following manuals are available to assist u-blox customers in product design and development. AT Commands Manual: This document provides the description of the AT commands supported by the u-blox cellular modules. System Integration Manual: This document provides the description of u-blox cellular modules system from the hardware and the software point of view, it provides hardware design guidelines for the optimal integration of the cellular modules in the application device and it provides information on how to set up production and final product tests on application devices integrating the cellular modules. Application Notes: These documents provide guidelines and information on specific hardware and/or software topics on u-blox cellular modules. See Related documents for a list of application notes related to your cellular module. How to use this Manual The LARA-R2 series System Integration Manual provides the necessary information to successfully design in and configure these u-blox cellular modules. This manual has a modular structure. It is not necessary to read it from the beginning to the end. The following symbols are used to highlight important information within the manual:
An index finger points out key information pertaining to module integration and performance. A warning symbol indicates actions that could negatively impact or damage the module. Questions If you have any questions about u-blox cellular Integration:
Read this manual carefully. Contact our information service on the homepage http://www.u-blox.com Technical Support Worldwide Web Our website (http://www.u-blox.com) is a rich pool of information. Product information and technical documents can be accessed 24h a day. By E-mail If you have technical problems or cannot find the required information in the provided documents, contact the closest Technical Support office. To ensure that we process your request as soon as possible, use our service pool email addresses rather than personal staff email addresses. Contact details are at the end of the document. Helpful Information when Contacting Technical Support When contacting Technical Support, have the following information ready:
Module type (e.g. LARA-R204) and firmware version Module configuration Clear description of your question or the problem A short description of the application Your complete contact details UBX-16010573 - R10 Preface Page 3 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Contents Preface ................................................................................................................................ 3 Contents .............................................................................................................................. 4 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.7.1 1.7.2 1 System description ....................................................................................................... 7 1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 7 Architecture ........................................................................................................................................ 10 1.2 1.3 Pin-out ............................................................................................................................................... 11 1.4 Operating modes ................................................................................................................................ 16 Supply interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 18 1.5 1.5.1 Module supply input (VCC) ......................................................................................................... 18 RTC supply input/output (V_BCKP) .............................................................................................. 26 1.5.2 1.5.3 Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) ........................................................................... 27 System function interfaces .................................................................................................................. 28 1.6.1 Module power-on ....................................................................................................................... 28 1.6.2 Module power-off ....................................................................................................................... 30 1.6.3 Module reset ............................................................................................................................... 33 1.6.4 Module / host configuration selection ......................................................................................... 33 Antenna interface ............................................................................................................................... 34 Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) .......................................................................................... 34 Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) ...................................................................................... 36 SIM interface ...................................................................................................................................... 36 SIM card interface ....................................................................................................................... 36 SIM card detection interface (SIM_DET) ....................................................................................... 36 Data communication interfaces .......................................................................................................... 37 UART interface ............................................................................................................................ 37 USB interface............................................................................................................................... 48 HSIC interface ............................................................................................................................. 51 DDC (I2C) interface ...................................................................................................................... 52 SDIO interface ............................................................................................................................. 53 Audio interface ............................................................................................................................... 54 1.10.1 Digital audio interface ................................................................................................................. 54 Clock output ................................................................................................................................... 55 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............................................................................................. 55 Reserved pins (RSVD) ...................................................................................................................... 55 System features............................................................................................................................... 56 1.14.1 Network indication ...................................................................................................................... 56 1.14.2 Antenna detection ...................................................................................................................... 56 1.14.3 Jamming detection ...................................................................................................................... 56 1.14.4 Dual stack IPv4/IPv6 ..................................................................................................................... 57 1.14.5 TCP/IP and UDP/IP ....................................................................................................................... 57 1.14.6 FTP .............................................................................................................................................. 57 1.14.7 HTTP ........................................................................................................................................... 57 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.10 1.9 UBX-16010573 - R10 Contents Page 4 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14.8 SSL/TLS ........................................................................................................................................ 58 1.14.9 Bearer Independent Protocol ....................................................................................................... 59 1.14.10 AssistNow clients and GNSS integration ................................................................................... 59 Hybrid positioning and CellLocate .......................................................................................... 60 1.14.11 1.14.12 Wi-Fi integration ...................................................................................................................... 62 1.14.13 Firmware upgrade Over AT (FOAT) .......................................................................................... 62 Firmware update Over The Air (FOTA) ...................................................................................... 63 1.14.14 Smart temperature management ............................................................................................. 63 1.14.15 1.14.16 Power Saving ........................................................................................................................... 65 2.4 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.4.1 2.4.2 2 Design-in ..................................................................................................................... 66 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 66 Supply interfaces ................................................................................................................................ 67 2.2 2.2.1 Module supply (VCC) .................................................................................................................. 67 RTC supply (V_BCKP) ................................................................................................................... 81 2.2.2 2.2.3 Interface supply (V_INT) ............................................................................................................... 83 System functions interfaces ................................................................................................................ 84 2.3.1 Module power-on (PWR_ON) ...................................................................................................... 84 2.3.2 Module reset (RESET_N) .............................................................................................................. 85 2.3.3 Module / host configuration selection ......................................................................................... 86 Antenna interface ............................................................................................................................... 87 Antenna RF interface (ANT1 / ANT2) ........................................................................................... 87 Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) ...................................................................................... 94 SIM interface ...................................................................................................................................... 96 Data communication interfaces ........................................................................................................ 102 UART interface .......................................................................................................................... 102 USB interface............................................................................................................................. 107 HSIC interface ........................................................................................................................... 109 DDC (I2C) interface .................................................................................................................... 111 SDIO interface ........................................................................................................................... 115 Audio interface ................................................................................................................................. 116 Digital audio interface ............................................................................................................... 116 2.8 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............................................................................................... 120 2.9 Reserved pins (RSVD) ........................................................................................................................ 121 Module placement ........................................................................................................................ 121 2.10 Module footprint and paste mask ................................................................................................. 122 2.11 2.12 Thermal guidelines ........................................................................................................................ 123 ESD guidelines .............................................................................................................................. 124 2.13 2.13.1 ESD immunity test overview ...................................................................................................... 124 2.13.2 ESD immunity test of u-blox LARA-R2 series reference designs .................................................. 124 2.13.3 ESD application circuits .............................................................................................................. 125 Schematic for LARA-R2 series module integration ......................................................................... 127 Design-in checklist ........................................................................................................................ 128 2.15.1 Schematic checklist ................................................................................................................... 128 Layout checklist ......................................................................................................................... 129 2.15.2 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.14 2.15 2.7.1 2.7 UBX-16010573 - R10 Contents Page 5 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.15.3 Antenna checklist ...................................................................................................................... 129 3.1 3.2 3.3 3 Handling and soldering ........................................................................................... 130 Packaging, shipping, storage and moisture preconditioning ............................................................. 130 Handling ........................................................................................................................................... 130 Soldering .......................................................................................................................................... 131 Soldering paste.......................................................................................................................... 131 3.3.1 Reflow soldering ....................................................................................................................... 131 3.3.2 Optical inspection ...................................................................................................................... 132 3.3.3 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................... 132 3.3.4 3.3.5 Repeated reflow soldering ......................................................................................................... 133 3.3.6 Wave soldering.......................................................................................................................... 133 Hand soldering .......................................................................................................................... 133 3.3.7 3.3.8 Rework ...................................................................................................................................... 133 3.3.9 Conformal coating .................................................................................................................... 133 3.3.10 Casting ...................................................................................................................................... 133 3.3.11 Grounding metal covers ............................................................................................................ 133 3.3.12 Use of ultrasonic processes ........................................................................................................ 133 4.1 4.2 4 Approvals .................................................................................................................. 134 Product certification approval overview ............................................................................................. 134 US Federal Communications Commission notice ............................................................................... 135 Safety warnings review the structure ......................................................................................... 135 4.2.1 Declaration of conformity .......................................................................................................... 135 4.2.2 4.2.3 Modifications ............................................................................................................................ 136 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada notice ....................................................... 137 4.3.1 Declaration of Conformity ......................................................................................................... 137 4.3.2 Modifications ............................................................................................................................ 138 European Conformance CE mark ...................................................................................................... 140 4.3 4.4 5.1 5.2 5 Product testing ......................................................................................................... 141 u-blox in-series production test ......................................................................................................... 141 Test parameters for OEM manufacturer ............................................................................................ 142 Go/No go tests for integrated devices .................................................................................... 142 Functional tests providing RF operation ..................................................................................... 142 5.2.1 5.2.2 Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 144 A Migration between SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 ........................................................... 144 A.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 144 Pin-out comparison between SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 ....................................................................... 148 A.2 A.3 Schematic for SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 integration ............................................................................. 150 B Glossary .................................................................................................................... 151 Related documents......................................................................................................... 153 Revision history .............................................................................................................. 154 Contact ............................................................................................................................ 155 UBX-16010573 - R10 Contents Page 6 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1 System description 1.1 Overview The LARA-R2 series comprises LTE Cat 1 / 3G / 2G multi-mode modules supporting up to four LTE bands, up to two 3G UMTS/HSPA bands and up to two 2G GSM/(E)GPRS bands for voice and/or data transmission in the very small LARA LGA form-factor (26.0 x 24.0 mm, 100-pin), easy to integrate in compact designs:
LARA-R202 is designed mainly for operation in America (on AT&T LTE and 3G network) LARA-R203 is designed mainly for operation in America (on AT&T LTE network) LARA-R204 is designed primarily for operation in North America (on Verizon network) LARA-R211 is designed primarily for operation in Europe, Asia and other countries LARA-R220 is designed mainly for operation in Japan (on NTT DoCoMo LTE network) LARA-R280 is designed mainly for operation in Asia, Oceania and other countries, on LTE and 3G networks LARA-R2 series modules are form-factor compatible with u-blox SARA, LISA and TOBY cellular module families:
this facilitates easy migration from u-blox GSM/GPRS, CDMA, UMTS/HSPA, and LTE high data rate modules, maximizes the investments of customers, simplifies logistics, and enables very short time-to-market. The modules are ideal for applications that are transitioning to LTE from 2G and 3G, due to the long term availability and scalability of LTE networks. With a range of interface options and an integrated IP stack, the modules are designed to support a wide range of data-centric applications. The unique combination of performance and flexibility make these modules ideally suited for medium speed M2M applications, such as smart energy gateways, remote access video cameras, digital signage, telehealth and telematics. LARA-R2 series modules provide Voice over LTE (VoLTE) 1 as well as Circuit-Switched-Fall-Back (CSFB) 2 voice service over 3G / 2G (CSFB) for applications that require voice, such as security and surveillance systems. 1 Not supported by LARA-R204 and LARA-R280 modules 02 product version, LARA-R220 modules 62 product version. 2 Not supported by LARA-R203, LARA-R204 and LARA-R220 modules. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 7 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Table 1 summarizes the main features and interfaces of LARA-R2 series modules. Model Region Radio Access Technology Positioning Interfaces Audio Features Grade 3 s d n a B E T L s d n a B S T M U LARA-R202 North America 2,4 5,12 850 1900 LARA-R203 LARA-R204 LARA-R211 North America North America Europe, APAC 2,4,12 4,13 3,7,20 LARA-R220 Japan 1,19 LARA-R280 APAC 3,8,28 2100 s d n a B M S G 900 1800 e r a w t f o S w o N t s i s s A e t a c o L l l e C T R A U 0
. 2 B S U m e d o m a v S S N G i
*
C S H I
) C 2 I
(
C D D s O P G I
*
O D S I i o d u a g o a n A l n o i t a c d n i i k r o w t e N E T L o V r o s i v r e p u s a n n e t n A y t i s r e v D x R i i o d u a l a t i g D i n o i t c e t e d g n m m a J i k c a t s P D U
/
P C T d e d d e b m E L S S
, P T F
, P T T H d e d d e b m E S S A N O L G A R E
/
l l a C e A T O F 6 v P I
/
4 v P I k c a t s l a u D 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 1 1 1 1 9 l a n o i s s e f o r P e v i t o m o t u A d r a d n a t S
= Available in any firmware
= CSFB only
= Available in future firmware
* = HW ready Table 1: LARA-R2 series main features summary 3 LTE band 12 is a superset that includes band 17: the LTE band 12 is supported along with Multi-Frequency Band Indicator (MFBI) feature UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 8 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Table 2 reports a summary of cellular radio access technologies characteristics of LARA-R2 series modules. 4G LTE 3G UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA 2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE 3GPP Release 9 Long Term Evolution (LTE) Evolved Univ.Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) DL Rx diversity 3GPP Release 9 High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) DL Rx Diversity 3GPP Release 9 Enhanced Data rate GSM Evolution (EDGE) GSM EGPRS Radio Access (GERA) Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) DL Advanced Rx Performance Phase 1 Band support4:
LARA-R202:
Band 12 (700 MHz)5 Band 5 (850 MHz) Band 4 (1700 MHz) Band 2 (1900 MHz) LARA-R203:
Band 12 (700 MHz)5 Band 4 (1700 MHz) Band 2 (1900 MHz) LARA-R204:
Band 13 (700 MHz) Band 4 (1700 MHz) LARA-R211:
Band 20 (800 MHz) Band 3 (1800 MHz) Band 7 (2600 MHz) LARA-R220:
Band 19 (850 MHz) Band 1 (2100 MHz) LARA-R280:
Band 28 (700 MHz) Band 8 (900 MHz) Band 3 (1800 MHz) Band support:
LARA-R202:
Band 5 (850 MHz) Band 2 (1900 MHz) LARA-R280:
Band 1 (2100 MHz) Band support:
LARA-R211:
E-GSM 900 MHz DCS 1800 MHz LTE Power Class Power Class 3 (23 dBm) UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA Power Class Class 3 (24 dBm) Power Class 4 (33 dBm) for E-GSM band Power Class 1 (30 dBm) for DCS band GSM/GPRS (GMSK) Power Class EDGE (8-PSK) Power Class Power Class E2 (27 dBm) for E-GSM band Power Class E2 (26 dBm) for DCS band Data rate LTE category 1:
up to 10.3 Mb/s DL, 5.2 Mb/s UL Data rate HSDPA category 8:
up to 7.2 Mb/s DL HSUPA category 6:
up to 5.76 Mb/s UL Data Rate6 GPRS multi-slot class 337, CS1-CS4, up to 107 kb/s DL, up to 85.6 kb/s UL EDGE multi-slot class 337, MCS1-MCS9, up to 296 kb/s DL, up to 236.8 kb/s UL Table 2: LARA-R2 series LTE, 3G and 2G characteristics 4 LARA-R2 series modules support all the E-UTRA channel bandwidths for each operating band according to 3GPP TS 36.521-1 [13]. 5 LTE band 12 is a superset that includes band 17: the LTE band 12 is supported along with Multi-Frequency Band Indicator (MFBI) feature 6 GPRS/EDGE multi-slot class determines the number of timeslots available for upload and download and thus the speed at which data can be transmitted and received, with higher classes typically allowing faster data transfer rates. 7 GPRS/EDGE multi-slot class 33 implies a maximum of 5 slots in DL (reception) and 4 slots in UL (transmission) with 6 slots in total. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 9 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.2 Architecture Figure 1 summarizes the internal architecture of LARA-R2 series modules. Figure 1: LARA-R2 series modules simplified block diagram LARA-R2 series modules internally consists of the RF, Baseband and Power Management sections here described with more details than the simplified block diagrams of Figure 1. RF section The RF section is composed of RF transceiver, PAs, LNAs, crystal oscillator, filters, duplexers and RF switches. Tx signal is pre-amplified by RF transceiver, then output to the primary antenna input/output port (ANT1) of the module via power amplifier (PA), SAW band pass filters band, specific duplexer and antenna switch. Dual receiving paths are implemented according to LTE Receiver Diversity radio technology supported by the modules as LTE category 1 User Equipments: incoming signal is received through the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna input ports which are connected to the RF transceiver via specific antenna switch, diplexer, duplexer, LNA, SAW band pass filters. RF transceiver performs modulation, up-conversion of the baseband I/Q signals for Tx, down-conversion and demodulation of the dual RF signals for Rx. The RF transceiver contains:
Single chain high linearity receivers with integrated LNAs for multi band multi mode operation, Highly linear RF demodulator / modulator capable GMSK, 8-PSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, RF synthesizer, VCO. Power Amplifiers (PA) amplify the Tx signal modulated by the RF transceiver RF switches connect primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antenna ports to the suitable Tx / Rx path SAW duplexers and band pass filters separate the Tx and Rx signal paths and provide RF filtering 26 MHz voltage-controlled temperature-controlled crystal oscillator generates the clock reference in active-mode or connected-mode. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 10 of 155 CellularBase-bandprocessorMemoryPower Management Unit26 MHz32.768 kHzANT1RF transceiverANT2V_INT (I/O)V_BCKP (RTC)VCC (Supply)SIMUSBHSICPower OnExternal ResetPAsLNAsFiltersFiltersDuplexerFiltersPAsLNAsFiltersFiltersDuplexerFiltersLNAsFiltersFiltersLNAsFiltersFiltersSwitchSwitchDDC(I2C)SDIOUARTANT_DETHost SelectGPIODigital audio (I2S) LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Baseband and power management section The Baseband and Power Management section is composed of the following main elements:
A mixed signal ASIC, which integrates Microprocessor for control functions DSP core for cellular Layer 1 and digital processing of Rx and Tx signal paths Memory interface controller Dedicated peripheral blocks for control of the USB, SIM and generic digital interfaces Interfaces to RF transceiver ASIC Memory system, which includes NAND flash and LPDDR2 RAM Voltage regulators to derive all the subsystem supply voltages from the module supply input VCC Voltage sources for external use: V_BCKP and V_INT Hardware power on Hardware reset Low power idle-mode support 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator to provide the clock reference in the low power idle-mode, which can be set by enable power saving configuration using the AT+UPSV command. 1.3 Pin-out Table 3 lists the pin-out of the LARA-R2 series modules, with pins grouped by function. Function Pin Name Pin No I/O Description Remarks Power VCC 51, 52, 53 I Module supply input GND N/A Ground 1, 3, 5, 14, 20, 22, 30, 32, 43, 50, 54, 55, 57, 58, 60, 61, 63, 64, 65-96 V_BCKP 2 I/O RTC supply input/output V_INT 4 O Generic Digital Interfaces supply output VCC supply circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes. See section 1.5.1 for description and requirements. See section 2.2.1 for external circuit design-in. GND pins are internally connected each other. External ground connection affects the RF and thermal performance of the device. See section 1.5.1 for functional description. See section 2.2.1 for external circuit design-in. V_BCKP = 1.8 V (typical) generated by internal regulator when valid VCC supply is present. See section 1.5.2 for functional description. See section 2.2.2 for external circuit design-in. V_INT = 1.8 V (typical), generated by internal DC/DC regulator when the module is switched on. Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended. See section 1.5.3 for functional description. See section 2.2.3 for external circuit design-in. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 11 of 155 Function Pin Name Pin No I/O Description Remarks LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual System PWR_ON 15 RESET_N 18 I I Power-on input Internal 10 k pull-up resistor to V_BCKP. See section 1.6.1 for functional description. See section 2.3.1 for external circuit design-in. External reset input Internal 10 k pull-up resistor to V_BCKP. Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended. See section 1.6.3 for functional description. See section 2.3.2 for external circuit design-in. HOST_SELECT 21 I/O Selection of module / host configuration Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. Pin available to select, enable, connect, disconnect and subsequently re-connect the HSIC interface. Test-Point for diagnostic access is recommended. See section 1.6.4 for functional description. See section 2.3.3 for external circuit design-in. Antenna ANT1 56 I/O Primary antenna Main Tx / Rx antenna interface. 50 nominal characteristic impedance. Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes. See section 1.7 for description and requirements. See section 2.4 for external circuit design-in. ANT2 62 I Secondary antenna Rx only for Rx diversity. 50 nominal characteristic impedance. Antenna circuit affects the RF performance and compliance of the device integrating the module with applicable required certification schemes. See section 1.7 for description and requirements. See section 2.4 for external circuit design-in. ANT_DET 59 I Input for antenna detection ADC for antenna presence detection function. See section 1.7.2 for functional description. See section 2.4.2 for external circuit design-in. SIM VSIM 41 O SIM supply output VSIM = 1.8 V / 3 V output as per the connected SIM type. See section 1.8 for functional description. See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in. SIM_IO 39 I/O SIM data Data input/output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM SIM_CLK 38 O SIM clock SIM_RST 40 O SIM reset Internal 4.7 k pull-up to VSIM. See section 1.8 for functional description. See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in. 3.25 MHz clock output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM See section 1.8 for functional description. See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in. Reset output for 1.8 V / 3 V SIM See section 1.8 for functional description. See section 2.5 for external circuit design-in. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 12 of 155 Function Pin Name Pin No I/O Description Remarks LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual UART RXD 13 O UART data output 1.8 V output, Circuit 104 (RXD) in ITU-T V.24, for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. Test-Point and series 0 for diagnostic access recommended. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V input, Circuit 103 (TXD) in ITU-T V.24, for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. Internal active pull-up to V_INT. Test-Point and series 0 for diagnostic access recommended. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. TXD 12 I UART data input CTS 11 RTS 10 DSR RI DTR 6 7 9 O I O O I UART clear to send output 1.8 V output, Circuit 106 (CTS) in ITU-T V.24. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. UART ready to send input UART data set ready output 1.8 V input, Circuit 105 (RTS) in ITU-T V.24. Internal active pull-up to V_INT. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V output, Circuit 107 (DSR) in ITU-T V.24. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. UART ring indicator output 1.8 V output, Circuit 125 (RI) in ITU-T V.24. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. UART data terminal ready input DCD 8 O UART data carrier detect output USB VUSB_DET 17 I USB detect input USB_D-
28 I/O USB Data Line D-
See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V input, Circuit 108/2 (DTR) in ITU-T V.24. Internal active pull-up to V_INT. Test-Point and series 0 for diagnostic access recommended. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V input, Circuit 109 (DCD) in ITU-T V.24. Test-Point and series 0 for diagnostic access recommended. See section 1.9.1 for functional description. See section 2.6.1 for external circuit design-in. VBUS (5 V typical) USB supply generated by the host must be connected to this input pin to enable the USB interface. If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor, Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access recommended. See section 1.9.2 for functional description. See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in. USB interface for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. 90 nominal differential impedance (Z0) 30 nominal common mode impedance (ZCM) Pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2.0 specifications [9] are part of the USB pin driver and need not be provided externally. If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor, Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended. See section 1.9.2 for functional description. See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 13 of 155 Function Pin Name Pin No I/O Description Remarks LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual USB_D+
29 I/O USB Data Line D+
USB interface for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. 90 nominal differential impedance (Z0) 30 nominal common mode impedance (ZCM) Pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors as required by the USB 2.0 specifications [9] are part of the USB pin driver and need not be provided externally. If the USB interface is not used by the Application Processor, Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended See section 1.9.2 for functional description. See section 2.6.2 for external circuit design-in. HSIC HSIC_DATA 99 I/O HSIC USB data line Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. HSIC_STRB 100 I/O HSIC USB strobe line DDC SCL 27 O I2C bus clock line SDA 26 I/O I2C bus data line USB High-Speed Inter-Chip compliant interface for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. 50 nominal characteristic impedance. Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended. See section 1.9.3 for functional description. See section 2.6.3 for external circuit design-in. Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. HSIC interface for AT commands, data communication, FOAT, FW update by u-blox EasyFlash tool and diagnostic. 50 nominal characteristic impedance. Test-Point for diagnostic / FW update access is recommended. See section 1.9.3 for functional description. See section 2.6.3 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V open drain, for communication with I2C-slave devices. See section 1.9.4 for functional description. See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V open drain, for communication with I2C-slave devices. See section 1.9.4 for functional description. See section 2.6.4 for external circuit design-in. SDIO SDIO_D0 47 I/O SDIO serial data [0] Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. SDIO_D1 49 I/O SDIO serial data [1] Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. SDIO_D2 44 I/O SDIO serial data [2] Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. SDIO_D3 48 I/O SDIO serial data [3] Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO_CLK 45 O SDIO serial clock SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 14 of 155 Function Pin Name Pin No I/O Description Remarks LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual SDIO_CMD 46 I/O SDIO command Audio I2S_TXD 35 O /
I/O I2S transmit data /
GPIO I2S_RXD 37 I /
I/O I2S receive data /
GPIO I2S_CLK 36 I/O /
I/O I2S clock /
GPIO I2S_WA 34 I/O /
I/O I2S word alignment /
GPIO Clock output GPIO6 19 O Clock output GPIO GPIO1 16 I/O GPIO GPIO2 23 I/O GPIO GPIO3 24 I/O GPIO GPIO5 42 I/O GPIO Reserved RSVD 33 N/A RESERVED pin RSVD 31, 97, 98 N/A RESERVED pin Table 3: LARA-R2 series modules pin definition, grouped by function Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. SDIO interface for communication with u-blox Wi-Fi module See section 1.9.5 for functional description. See section 2.6.5 for external circuit design-in. I2S transmit data output, alternatively configurable as GPIO. I2S not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B. See sections 1.10 and 1.12 for functional description. See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in. I2S receive data input, alternatively configurable as GPIO. I2S not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B. See sections 1.10 and 1.12 for functional description. See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in. I2S serial clock, alternatively configurable as GPIO. I2S not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B. See sections 1.10 and 1.12 for functional description. See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in. I2S word alignment, alternatively configurable as GPIO. I2S not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B. See sections 1.10 and 1.12 for functional description. See sections 2.7 and 2.8 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V configurable clock output. See section 1.11 for functional description. See section 2.7 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions. See section 1.12 for functional description. See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions. See section 1.12 for functional description. See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions. See section 1.12 for functional description. See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in. See section 1.12 for functional description. See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in. 1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions. See section 1.12 for functional description. See section 2.8 for external circuit design-in. This pin must be connected to ground. See sections 1.13 and 2.9 Internally not connected. Leave unconnected. See sections 1.13 and 2.9 GPIO4 25 I/O GPIO 1.8 V GPIO with alternatively configurable functions. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 15 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.4 Operating modes LARA-R2 series modules have several operating modes. The operating modes defined in Table 4 and described in detail in Table 5 provide general guidelines for operation. General Status Operating Mode Definition Power-down Not-Powered Mode VCC supply not present or below operating range: module is switched off. Power-Off Mode VCC supply within operating range and module is switched off. Normal operation Idle-Mode Module processor core runs with 32 kHz reference generated by the internal oscillator. Active-Mode Module processor core runs with 26 MHz reference generated by the internal oscillator. Connected-Mode RF Tx/Rx data connection enabled and processor core runs with 26 MHz reference. Table 4: Module operating modes definition Mode Description Transition between operating modes Not-Powered Module is switched off. Application interfaces are not accessible. When VCC supply is removed, the module enters not-powered mode. When in not-powered mode, the modules cannot be switched on by PWR_ON, RESET_N or RTC alarm. When in not-powered mode, the modules can be switched on applying VCC supply (see 1.6.1) so that the module switches from not-powered to active-mode. Power-Off Module is switched off: normal shutdown by an appropriate power-off event (see 1.6.2). When the module is switched off by an appropriate switch-off event
(see 1.6.2), the module enters power-off mode from active-mode. Idle Application interfaces are not accessible. Module is switched on with application interfaces temporarily disabled or suspended:
the module is temporarily not ready to communicate with an external device by means of the application interfaces as configured to reduce the current consumption. The module enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible if power saving is enabled by AT+UPSV (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) reducing power consumption (see 1.5.1.5). The CTS output line indicates when the UART interface is disabled/enabled due to the module idle/active-mode according to power saving and HW flow control settings (see 1.9.1.3, 1.9.1.4). Power saving configuration is not enabled by default: it can be enabled by AT+UPSV (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). UBX-16010573 - R10 When in power-off mode, the modules can be switched on by PWR_ON, RESET_N or RTC alarm (see 1.6.1): the module switches from power-off to active-mode. When in power-off mode, the modules enter not-powered mode by removing VCC supply. The module automatically switches from active-mode to idle-mode whenever possible if power saving is enabled (see sections 1.5.1.5, 1.9.1.4, 1.9.2.4 and to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV command). The module wakes up from idle to active mode in the following events:
Automatic periodic monitoring of the paging channel for the paging block reception according to network conditions (see 1.5.1.4, 1.9.1.4) Automatic periodic enable of the UART interface to receive and send data, if AT+UPSV=1 power saving is set (see 1.9.1.4) Data received on UART interface, according to HW flow control
(AT&K) and power saving (AT+UPSV) settings (see 1.9.1.4) RTS input set ON by the host DTE, with HW flow control disabled and AT+UPSV=2 (see 1.9.1.4) DTR input set ON by the host DTE, with AT+UPSV=3 (see 1.9.1.4) USB detection, applying 5 V (typ.) to VUSB_DET input (see 1.9.2) The connected USB host forces a remote wakeup of the module as USB device (see 1.9.2.4) The connected u-blox GNSS receiver forces a wakeup of the cellular module using the GNSS Tx data ready function over the GPIO3 pin (see 1.9.4) The connected SDIO device forces a wakeup of the module as SDIO host (see 1.9.5) RTC alarm occurs (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +CALA) System description Page 16 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Description Transition between operating modes Mode Active The module is ready to communicate with an external device by means of the application interfaces unless power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command (see sections 1.5.1.4, 1.9.1.4 and to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). Connected A voice call or a data call is in progress. The module is ready to communicate with an external device by means of the application interfaces unless power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command (see sections 1.5.1.4, 1.9.1.4 and the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). When the module is switched on by an appropriate power-on event
(see 2.3.1), the module enters active-mode from not-powered or power-off mode. If power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command, the module automatically switches from active to idle-mode whenever possible and the module wakes up from idle to active-mode in the events listed above (see idle to active transition description). When a voice call or a data call is initiated, the module switches from active-mode to connected-mode. When a data or voice connection is initiated, the module enters connected-mode from active-mode. Connected-mode is suspended if Tx/Rx data is not in progress, due to connected discontinuous reception and fast dormancy capabilities of the module and according to network environment settings and scenario. In such case, the module automatically switches from connected to active mode and then, if power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command, the module automatically switches to idle-mode whenever possible. Vice-versa, the module wakes up from idle to active mode and then connected mode if RF Tx/Rx is necessary. When a data connection is terminated, the module returns to the active-mode. Table 5: Module operating modes description Figure 2 describes the transition between the different operating modes. Figure 2: Operating modes transition UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 17 of 155 Switch ON:Apply VCCIf power saving is enabled and there is no activity for a defined time intervalAny wake up event described in the module operating modes summary table aboveIncoming/outgoing call or other dedicated device network communicationNo RF Tx/Rx in progress, Call terminated, Communication droppedRemove VCCSwitch ON:PWR_ONRTC alarmRESET_N Not poweredPower offActiveConnectedIdleSwitch OFF:AT+CPWROFFPWR_ON LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5 Supply interfaces 1.5.1 Module supply input (VCC) The modules must be supplied via the three VCC pins that represent the module power supply input. The VCC pins are internally connected to the RF power amplifier and to the integrated Power Management Unit:
all supply voltages needed by the module are generated from the VCC supply by integrated voltage regulators, including V_BCKP Real Time Clock supply, V_INT digital interfaces supply and VSIM SIM card supply. During operation, the current drawn by the LARA-R2 series modules through the VCC pins can vary by several orders of magnitude. This ranges from the pulse of current consumption during GSM transmitting bursts at maximum power level in connected-mode (as described in section 1.5.1.2) to the low current consumption during low power idle-mode with power saving enabled (as described in section 1.5.1.5). LARA-R211 modules provide separate supply inputs over the three VCC pins:
VCC pins #52 and #53 represent the supply input for the internal RF power amplifier, demanding most of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call VCC pin #51 represents the supply input for the internal baseband Power Management Unit and the internal transceiver, demanding minor part of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call Figure 3 provides a simplified block diagram of LARA-R2 series modules internal VCC supply routing. Figure 3: LARA-R2 series modules internal VCC supply routing simplified block diagram UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 18 of 155 53VCC52VCC51VCCLARA-R2 series(except LARA-R211)Power ManagementUnitMemoryBaseband ProcessorTransceiverRF PMULTE PA53VCC52VCC51VCCLARA-R211Power ManagementUnitMemoryBaseband ProcessorTransceiverRF PMULTE / 2G PAs LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.1 VCC supply requirements Table 6 summarizes the requirements for the VCC module supply. See section 2.2.1 for all the suggestions to properly design a VCC supply circuit compliant to the requirements listed in Table 6. VCC supply circuit affects the RF compliance of the device integrating LARA-R2 series modules with applicable required certification schemes as well as antenna circuit design. Compliance is guaranteed if the VCC requirements summarized in the Table 6 are fulfilled. Item Requirement Remark VCC nominal voltage Within VCC normal operating range:
3.30 V min. / 4.40 V max VCC voltage during normal operation Within VCC extended operating range:
3.00 V min. / 4.50 V max VCC average current Support with adequate margin the highest averaged VCC current consumption value in connected-mode conditions specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
VCC peak current Support with margin the highest peak VCC current consumption value in connected-mode conditions specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
VCC voltage drop during 2G Tx slots Lower than 400 mV VCC voltage ripple during 2G/3G/LTE Tx Noise in the supply has to be minimized VCC under/over-shoot at start/end of Tx slots Absent or at least minimized Table 6: Summary of VCC supply requirements RF performance is guaranteed when VCC PA voltage is inside the normal operating range limits. RF performance may be affected when VCC PA voltage is outside the normal operating range limits, though the module is still fully functional until the VCC voltage is inside the extended operating range limits. VCC voltage must be above the extended operating range minimum limit to switch-on the module. The module may switch-off when the VCC voltage drops below the extended operating range minimum limit. Operation above VCC extended operating range is not recommended and may affect device reliability. The highest averaged VCC current consumption can be greater than the specified value according to the actual antenna mismatching, temperature and VCC voltage. See 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.4 for connected-mode current profiles. The specified highest peak of VCC current consumption occurs during GSM single transmit slot in 850/900 MHz connected-mode, in case of mismatched antenna. See 1.5.1.2 for 2G connected-mode current profiles. VCC voltage drop directly affects the RF compliance with applicable certification schemes. Figure 5 describes VCC voltage drop during Tx slots. VCC voltage ripple directly affects the RF compliance with applicable certification schemes. Figure 5 describes VCC voltage ripple during Tx slots. VCC under/over-shoot directly affects the RF compliance with applicable certification schemes. Figure 5 describes VCC voltage under/over-shoot. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 19 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.2 VCC current consumption in 2G connected-mode When a GSM call is established, the VCC consumption is determined by the current consumption profile typical of the GSM transmitting and receiving bursts. The current consumption peak during a transmission slot is strictly dependent on the transmitted power, which is regulated by the network. The transmitted power in the transmit slot is also the more relevant factor for determining the average current consumption. If the module is transmitting in 2G single-slot mode (as in GSM talk mode) in the 850 or 900 MHz bands, at the maximum RF power control level (approximately 2 W or 33 dBm in the Tx slot/burst), the current consumption can reach an high peak / pulse (see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) for 576.9 s (width of the transmit slot/burst) with a periodicity of 4.615 ms (width of 1 frame = 8 slots/burst), so with a 1/8 duty cycle according to GSM TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access). If the module is transmitting in 2G single-slot mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands, the current consumption figures are quite less high than the one in the low bands, due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications. During a GSM call, current consumption is not so significantly high in receiving or in monitor bursts and it is low in the bursts unused to transmit / receive. Figure 4 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in GSM talk mode. Figure 4: VCC current consumption profile versus time during a GSM call (1 TX slot, 1 RX slot) Figure 5 illustrates VCC voltage profile versus time during a GSM call, according to the related VCC current consumption profile described in Figure 4. Figure 5: Description of the VCC voltage profile versus time during a GSM call (1 TX slot, 1 RX slot) UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 20 of 155 Time [ms]RX slotunused slotunused slotTX slotunused slotunused slotMON slotunused slotRX slotunused slotunused slotTX slotunused slotunused slotMON slotunused slotGSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots)Current [A]200 mA60-120 mA1900 mAPeak current depends on TX power and actual antenna loadGSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots)60-120 mA10-40 mA0.01.51.00.52.0TimeundershootovershootrippledropVoltage3.8 V (typ)RX slotunused slotunused slotTX slotunused slotunused slotMON slotunused slotRX slotunused slotunused slotTX slotunused slotunused slotMON slotunused slotGSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots)GSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots) LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual When a GPRS connection is established, more than one slot can be used to transmit and/or more than one slot can be used to receive. The transmitted power depends on network conditions, which set the peak current consumption, but following the 3GPP specifications the maximum Tx RF power is reduced if more than one slot is used to transmit, so the maximum peak of current is not as high as can be in case of a 2G single-slot call. The multi-slot transmission power can be further reduced by configuring the actual Multi-Slot Power Reduction profile with the dedicated AT command, AT+UDCONF=40 (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). If the module transmits in GPRS class 12 in the 850 or 900 MHz bands, at the maximum RF power control level, the current consumption can reach a quite high peak but lower than the one achievable in 2G single-slot mode. This happens for 2.307 ms (width of the 4 transmit slots/bursts) with a periodicity of 4.615 ms (width of 1 frame
= 8 slots/bursts), so with a 1/2 duty cycle, according to 2G TDMA. If the module is in GPRS connected mode in the 1800 or 1900 MHz bands, the current consumption figures are quite less high than the one in the low bands, due to 3GPP transmitter output power specifications. Figure 6 reports the current consumption profiles in GPRS class 12 connected mode, in the 850 or 900 MHz bands, with 4 slots used to transmit and 1 slot used to receive. Figure 6: VCC current consumption profile versus time during a 2G GPRS/EDGE multi-slot connection (4 TX slots, 1 RX slot) In case of EDGE connections the VCC current consumption profile is very similar to the GPRS current profile, so the image shown in Figure 6, representing the current consumption profile in GPRS class 12 connected mode, is valid for the EDGE class 12 connected mode as well. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 21 of 155 Time [ms]RX slotunused slotTX slotTX slotTX slotTX slotMON slotunused slotRX slotunused slotTX slotTX slotTX slotTX slotMON slotunused slotGSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots)Current [A]200mA60-130mAPeak current depends on TX power and actual antenna loadGSM frame 4.615 ms (1 frame = 8 slots)1600 mA0.01.51.00.52.0 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.3 VCC current consumption in 3G connected mode During a 3G connection, the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division Duplex
(FDD) mode of operation with the Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA). The current consumption depends on output RF power, which is always regulated by the network (the current base station) sending power control commands to the module. These power control commands are logically divided into a slot of 666 s, thus the rate of power change can reach a maximum rate of 1.5 kHz. There are no high current peaks as in the 2G connection, since transmission and reception are continuously enabled due to FDD WCDMA implemented in the 3G that differs from the TDMA implemented in the 2G case. In the worst scenario, corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power
(approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm), the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable
(see the Current consumption section in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). At the lowest output RF power
(approximately 0.01 W or 50 dBm), the current drawn by the internal power amplifier is strongly reduced. The total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity. Figure 7 shows an example of current consumption profile of the module in 3G WCDMA/HSPA continuous transmission mode. Figure 7: VCC current consumption profile versus time during a 3G connection (TX and RX continuously enabled) UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 22 of 155 Time [ms]3G frame 10 ms (1 frame = 15 slots)Current [mA]Current consumption value depends on TX power and actual antenna load170 mA1 slot 666 s850 mA0300200100500400600700 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.4 VCC current consumption in LTE connected-mode During an LTE connection, the module can transmit and receive continuously due to the Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode of operation used in LTE radio access technology. The current consumption depends on output RF power, which is always regulated by the network (the current base station) sending power control commands to the module. These power control commands are logically divided into a slot of 0.5 ms (time length of one Resource Block), thus the rate of power change can reach a maximum rate of 2 kHz. The current consumption profile is similar to that in 3G radio access technology. Unlike the 2G connection mode, which uses the TDMA mode of operation, there are no high current peaks since transmission and reception are continuously enabled in FDD. In the worst scenario, corresponding to a continuous transmission and reception at maximum output power
(approximately 250 mW or 24 dBm), the average current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is considerable
(see the Current consumption section in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). At the lowest output RF power
(approximately 0.1 W or 40 dBm), the current drawn by the internal power amplifier is strongly reduced and the total current drawn by the module at the VCC pins is due to baseband processing and transceiver activity. Figure 8 shows an example of the module current consumption profile versus time in LTE connected-mode. Detailed current consumption values can be found in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. Figure 8: VCC current consumption profile versus time during LTE connection (TX and RX continuously enabled) UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 23 of 155 Time [ms]Current [mA]Current consumption value depends on TX power and actual antenna load1 Slot1 Resource Block (0.5 ms)1 LTE Radio Frame (10 ms)0300200100500400600700 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.5 VCC current consumption in cyclic idle/active-mode (power saving enabled) The power saving configuration is by default disabled, but it can be enabled using the appropriate AT command
(see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV command). When power saving is enabled, the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible, reducing current consumption. When the power saving configuration is enabled and the module is registered or attached to a network, the module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible, but it must periodically monitor the paging channel of the current base station (paging block reception), in accordance to the 2G / 3G / LTE system requirements, even if connected-mode is not enabled by the application. When the module monitors the paging channel, it wakes up to the active-mode, to enable the reception of paging block. In between, the module switches to low power idle-mode. This is known as discontinuous reception (DRX). The module processor core is activated during the paging block reception, and automatically switches its reference clock frequency from 32 kHz to the 26 MHz used in active-mode. The time period between two paging block receptions is defined by the network. This is the paging period parameter, fixed by the base station through broadcast channel sent to all users on the same serving cell:
In case of 2G radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 470.8 ms (DRX = 2, length of 2 x 51 2G frames = 2 x 51 x 4.615 ms) up to 2118.4 ms (DRX = 9, length of 9 x 51 2G frames = 9 x 51 x 4.615 ms) In case of 3G radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 640 ms (DRX = 6, i.e. length of 2 6 3G frames = 64 x 10 ms) up to 5120 ms (DRX = 9, length of 29 3G frames = 512 x 10 ms). In case of LTE radio access technology, the paging period can vary from 320 ms (DRX = 5, i.e. length of 25 LTE frames = 32 x 10 ms) up to 2560 ms (DRX = 8, length of 28 LTE frames = 256 x 10 ms). Figure 9 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is enabled. The module is registered with network, automatically enters the low power idle-mode and periodically wakes up to active-mode to monitor the paging channel for the paging block reception. Detailed current consumption values can be found in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). Figure 9: VCC current consumption profile with power saving enabled and module registered with the network: the module is in low-power idle-mode and periodically wakes up to active-mode to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 24 of 155
~50 msIDLE MODEACTIVE MODEIDLE MODEActive Mode EnabledIdle Mode Enabled2G case: 0.44-2.09 s 3G case: 0.61-5.09 s LTE case: 0.27-2.51 sIDLE MODE~50 msACTIVE MODETime [s]Current [mA]Time [ms]Current [mA]RX Enabled01000100 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.1.6 VCC current consumption in fixed active-mode (power saving disabled) Power saving configuration is by default disabled, or it can be disabled using the appropriate AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV command). When power saving is disabled, the module does not automatically enter idle-mode whenever possible: the module remains in active-mode. The module processor core is activated during active-mode, and the 26 MHz reference clock frequency is used. Figure 10 illustrates a typical example of the module current consumption profile when power saving is disabled. In such case, the module is registered with the network and while active-mode is maintained, the receiver is periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception. Detailed current consumption values can be found in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. Figure 10: VCC current consumption profile with power saving disabled and module registered with the network: active-mode is always held and the receiver is periodically activated to monitor the paging channel for paging block reception UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 25 of 155 ACTIVE MODE2G case: 0.44-2.09 s 3G case: 0.61-5.09 sLTE case: 0.32-2.56 sPaging periodTime [s]Current [mA]Time [ms]Current [mA]RX Enabled01000100 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.2 RTC supply input/output (V_BCKP) The V_BCKP pin of LARA-R2 series modules connects the supply for the Real Time Clock (RTC) and Power-On internal logic. This supply domain is internally generated by a linear LDO regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit, as described in Figure 11. The output of this linear regulator is always enabled when the main voltage supply provided to the module through the VCC pins is within the valid operating range, with the module switched off or switched on. Figure 11: RTC supply input/output (V_BCKP) and 32 kHz RTC timing reference clock simplified block diagram The RTC provides the module time reference (date and time) that is used to set the wake-up interval during the low power idle-mode periods, and is able to make available the programmable alarm functions. The RTC functions are available also in power-down mode when the V_BCKP voltage is within its valid range
(specified in the Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins table in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). The RTC can be supplied from an external back-up battery through the V_BCKP, when the main module voltage supply is not applied to the VCC pins. This lets the time reference (date and time) run until the V_BCKP voltage is within its valid range, even when the main supply is not provided to the module. Consider that the module cannot switch on if a valid voltage is not present on VCC even when the RTC is supplied through V_BCKP (meaning that VCC is mandatory to switch on the module). The RTC has very low current consumption, but is highly temperature dependent. For example, V_BCKP current consumption at the maximum operating temperature can be higher than the typical value at 25 C specified in the Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins table in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. If V_BCKP is left unconnected and the module main voltage supply is removed from VCC, the RTC is supplied from the bypass capacitor mounted inside the module. However, this capacitor is not able to provide a long buffering time: within few milliseconds the voltage on V_BCKP will go below the valid range. This has no impact on cellular connectivity, as all the module functionalities do not rely on date and time setting. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 26 of 155 Baseband Processor51VCC52VCC53VCC2V_BCKPLinear LDORTCPower ManagementLARA-R2 series32 kHz LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.5.3 Generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) The V_INT output pin of the LARA-R2 series modules is connected to an internal 1.8 V supply with current capability specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. This supply is internally generated by a switching step-
down regulator integrated in the Power Management Unit and it is internally used to source the generic digital I/O interfaces of the cellular module, as described in Figure 12. The output of this regulator is enabled when the module is switched on and it is disabled when the module is switched off. Figure 12: LARA-R2 series interfaces supply output (V_INT) simplified block diagram The switching regulator operates in Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode for greater efficiency at high output loads and it automatically switches to Pulse Frequency Modulation (PFM) power save mode for greater efficiency at low output loads. The V_INT output voltage ripple is specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 27 of 155 Baseband Processor51VCC52VCC53VCC4V_INTSwitchingStep-DownDigital I/O InterfacesPower ManagementLARA-R2 series LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.6 System function interfaces 1.6.1 Module power-on When the LARA-R2 series modules are in the not-powered mode (switched off, i.e. the VCC module supply is not applied), they can be switched on as following:
Rising edge on the VCC input to a valid voltage for module supply, i.e. applying module supply: the modules switch on if the VCC supply is applied, starting from a voltage value of less than 2.1 V, with a rise time from 2.3 V to 2.8 V of less than 4 ms, reaching a proper nominal voltage value within VCC operating range. Alternately, in case for example the fast rise time on VCC rising edge cannot be guaranteed by the application, LARA-R2 series modules can be switched on from not-powered mode as following:
RESET_N input pin is held low by the external application during the VCC rising edge, so that the modules will switch on when the external application releases the RESET_N input pin from the low logic level after that the VCC supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal value within the operating range PWR_ON input pin is held low by the external application during the VCC rising edge, so that the modules will switch on when the external application releases the PWR_ON input pin from the low logic level after that the VCC supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal value within the operating range When the LARA-R2 series modules are in the power-off mode (i.e. properly switched off as described in section 1.6.2, with valid VCC module supply applied), they can be switched on as following:
Low pulse on the PWR_ON pin, which is normally set high by an internal pull-up, for a valid time period: the modules start the internal switch-on sequence when the external application releases the PWR_ON pin from the low logic level after that it has been set low for an appropriate time period Rising edge on the RESET_N pin, i.e. releasing the pin from the low level, as that the pin is normally set high by an internal pull-up: the modules start the internal switch-on sequence when the external application releases the RESET_N pin from the low logic level RTC alarm, i.e. pre-programmed alarm by AT+CALA command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). As described in Figure 13, the LARA-R2 series PWR_ON input is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor to the V_BCKP supply: the PWR_ON input voltage thresholds are different from the other generic digital interfaces. Detailed electrical characteristics are described in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. Figure 13: LARA-R2 series PWR_ON input description UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 28 of 155 Baseband Processor15PWR_ONLARA-R2 series2V_BCKPPower-onPower ManagementPower-on10k LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 14 shows the module switch-on sequence from the not-powered mode, describing the following phases:
The external supply is applied to the VCC module supply inputs, representing the start-up event. The V_BCKP RTC supply output is suddenly enabled by the module as VCC reaches a valid voltage value. The PWR_ON and the RESET_N pins suddenly rise to high logic level due to internal pull-ups. All the generic digital pins of the module are tri-stated until the switch-on of their supply source (V_INT). The internal reset signal is held low: the baseband core and all the digital pins are held in the reset state. The reset state of all the digital pins is reported in the pin description table of LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. When the internal reset signal is released, any digital pin is set in a proper sequence from the reset state to the default operational configured state. The duration of this pins configuration phase differs within generic digital interfaces and the USB interface due to host / device enumeration timings (see section 1.9.2). The module is fully ready to operate after all interfaces are configured. Figure 14: LARA-R2 series switch-on sequence description The greeting text can be activated by means of +CSGT AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) to notify the external application that the module is ready to operate (i.e. ready to reply to AT commands) and the first AT command can be sent to the module, given that autobauding has to be disabled on the UART to let the module sending the greeting text: the UART has to be configured at fixed baud rate (the baud rate of the application processor) instead of the default autobauding, otherwise the module does not know the baud rate to be used for sending the greeting text (or any other URC) at the end of the internal boot sequence. The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin, but the host application can monitor the V_INT pin to sense the start of the LARA-R2 series module switch-on sequence. Before the switch-on of the generic digital interface supply source (V_INT) of the module, no voltage driven by an external application should be applied to any generic digital interface of the module. Before the LARA-R2 series module is fully ready to operate, the host application processor should not send any AT command over the AT communication interfaces (USB, UART) of the module. The duration of the LARA-R2 series modules switch-on routine can vary depending on the application /
network settings and the concurrent module activities. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 29 of 155 VCC V_BCKPPWR_ONRESET_NV_INTInternal ResetSystem StateBB Pads StateInternal Reset OperationalOperationalTristate / Floating Internal ResetOFFONStart of interface configurationModule interfaces are configuredStart-up event LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.6.2 Module power-off LARA-R2 series can be properly switched off by:
AT+CPWROFF command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). The current parameter settings are saved in the modules non-volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed. Low pulse on the PWR_ON pin, which is normally set high by an internal pull-up, for a valid time period (see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]): the modules start the internal switch-off sequence when the external application releases the PWR_ON line from the low logic level, after that it has been set low for a proper time period. An abrupt under-voltage shutdown occurs on LARA-R2 series modules when the VCC module supply is removed. If this occurs, it is not possible to perform the storing of the current parameter settings in the modules non-volatile memory or to perform the proper network detach. It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the VCC supply during LARA-R2 series modules normal operations: the switch off procedure must be started by the AT+CPWROFF command, waiting the command response for a proper time period (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and then a proper VCC supply has to be held at least until the end of the modules internal switch off sequence, which occurs when the generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) is switched off by the module. An abrupt hardware shutdown occurs on LARA-R2 series modules when a low level is applied on RESET_N pin. In this case, the current parameter settings are not saved in the modules non-volatile memory and a proper network detach is not performed. It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware shutdown of the module by forcing a low level on the RESET_N input pin during module normal operation: the RESET_N line should be set low only if reset or shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not reply to a specific AT command after a time period longer than the one defined in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. An over-temperature or an under-temperature shutdown occurs on LARA-R2 series modules when the temperature measured within the cellular module reaches the dangerous area, if the optional Smart Temperature Supervisor feature is enabled and configured by the dedicated AT command. For more details see section 1.14.15 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +USTS AT command. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 30 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 15 describes the LARA-R2 series modules switch-off sequence started by means of the AT+CPWROFF command, allowing storage of current parameter settings in the modules non-volatile memory and a proper network detach, with the following phases:
When the +CPWROFF AT command is sent, the module starts the switch-off routine. The module replies OK on the AT interface: the switch-off routine is in progress. At the end of the switch-off routine, all the digital pins are tri-stated and all the internal voltage regulators are turned off, including the generic digital interfaces supply (V_INT), except the RTC supply (V_BCKP). Then, the module remains in power-off mode as long as a switch on event does not occur (e.g. applying a proper low level to the PWR_ON input, or applying a proper low level to the RESET_N input), and enters not-powered mode if the supply is removed from the VCC pins. Figure 15: LARA-R2 series switch-off sequence by means of AT+CPWROFF command The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin, but the application can monitor the V_INT pin to sense the end of the LARA-R2 series switch-off sequence. The VCC supply can be removed only after the end of the module internal switch-off routine, i.e. only after that the V_INT voltage level has gone low. The duration of each phase in the LARA-R2 series modules switch-off routines can largely vary depending on the application / network settings and the concurrent module activities. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 31 of 155 VCC V_BCKPPWR_ONRESET_N V_INTInternal ResetSystem StateBB Pads StateOperationalOFFTristate / FloatingONOperational TristateAT+CPWROFFsent to the module0 s~2.5 s~5 sOKreplied by the moduleVCC can be removed LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 16 describes the LARA-R2 series modules switch-off sequence started by means of the PWR_ON input pin, allowing storage of current parameter settings in the modules non-volatile memory and a proper network detach, with the following phases:
A low pulse with appropriate time duration (see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) is applied at the PWR_ON input pin, which is normally set high by an internal pull-up: the module starts the switch-off routine when the PWR_ON signal is released from the low logical level. At the end of the switch-off routine, all the digital pins are tri-stated and all the internal voltage regulators are turned off, including the generic digital interfaces supply (V_INT), except the RTC supply (V_BCKP). Then, the module remains in power-off mode as long as a switch on event does not occur (e.g. applying a proper low level to the PWR_ON input, or applying a proper low level to the RESET_N input), and enters not-powered mode if the supply is removed from the VCC pins. Figure 16: LARA-R2 series switch-off sequence by means of PWR_ON pin The Internal Reset signal is not available on a module pin, but the application can monitor the V_INT pin to sense the end of the switch-off sequence. The VCC supply can be removed only after the end of the module internal switch-off routine, i.e. only after that the V_INT voltage level has gone low. The duration of each phase in the LARA-R2 series modules switch-off routines can largely vary depending on the application / network settings and the concurrent module activities. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 32 of 155 VCC V_BCKPPWR_ONRESET_N V_INTInternal ResetSystem StateBB Pads StateOFFTristate / FloatingONOperational -> TristateOperational0 s~2.5 s~5 sThe module starts the switch-off routineVCC can be removed LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.6.3 Module reset LARA-R2 series modules can be properly reset (rebooted) by:
AT+CFUN command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details). This command causes an internal or software reset of the module, which is an asynchronous reset of the module baseband processor. The current parameter settings are saved in the modules non-volatile memory and a proper network detach is performed: this is the proper way to reset the modules. An abrupt hardware reset occurs on LARA-R2 series modules when a low level is applied on the RESET_N input pin for a specific time period. In this case, the current parameter settings are not saved in the modules non-
volatile memory and a proper network detach is not performed. It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt hardware reset of the module by forcing a low level on the RESET_N input during modules normal operation: the RESET_N line should be set low only if reset or shutdown via AT commands fails or if the module does not provide a reply to a specific AT command after a time period longer than the one defined in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. As described in Figure 17, the RESET_N input pins are equipped with an internal pull-up to the V_BCKP supply. Figure 17: LARA-R2 series RESET_N input equivalent circuit description For more electrical characteristics details see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. 1.6.4 Module / host configuration selection The functionality of the HOST_SELECT pin is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. The modules include one pin (HOST_SELECT) to select the module / host application processor configuration:
the pin is available to select, enable, connect, disconnect and subsequently re-connect the HSIC interface. LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] describes the detailed electrical characteristics of the HOST_SELECT pin. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 33 of 155 Baseband Processor18RESET_NLARA-R2 series2V_BCKPResetPower ManagementReset10k LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.7 Antenna interface 1.7.1 Antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) LARA-R2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external antennas:
The ANT1 represents the primary RF input/output for transmission and reception of LTE/3G/2G RF signals. The ANT1 pin has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 and must be connected to the primary Tx / Rx antenna through a 50 transmission line to allow proper RF transmission and reception. The ANT2 represents the secondary RF input for the reception of the LTE / 3G RF signals for the Down-Link Rx diversity radio technology supported by LARA-R2 modules as required feature for LTE category 1 UEs. The ANT2 pin has a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 and must be connected to the secondary Rx antenna through a 50 transmission line to allow proper RF reception. 1.7.1.1 Antenna RF interface requirements Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9 summarize the requirements for the antennas RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2). See section 2.4.1 for suggestions to properly design antennas circuits compliant with these requirements. The antenna circuits affect the RF compliance of the device integrating LARA-R2 series modules with applicable required certification schemes (for more details see section 4). Compliance is guaranteed if the antenna RF interfaces (ANT1 / ANT2) requirements summarized in Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9 are fulfilled. Item Requirements Remarks Impedance 50 nominal characteristic impedance Frequency Range See the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
Return Loss S11 < -10 dB (VSWR < 2:1) recommended S11 < -6 dB (VSWR < 3:1) acceptable Efficiency
> -1.5 dB ( > 70% ) recommended
> -3.0 dB ( > 50% ) acceptable Maximum Gain According to radiation exposure limits The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 impedance of the ANT1 port. The required frequency range of the antenna connected to ANT1 port depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and the used mobile network. The Return loss or the S11, as the VSWR, refers to the amount of reflected power, measuring how well the antenna RF connection matches the 50 characteristic impedance of the ANT1 port. The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as possible the 50 nominal impedance of the ANT1 port over the operating frequency range, reducing as much as possible the amount of reflected power. The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power to the power delivered to antenna input: the efficiency is a measure of how well an antenna receives or transmits. The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT1 port needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to comply with the Over-The-Air (OTA) radiated performance requirements, as Total Radiated Power (TRP) and the Total Isotropic Sensitivity (TIS), specified by applicable related certification schemes. The power gain of an antenna is the radiation efficiency multiplied by the directivity: the gain describes how much power is transmitted in the direction of peak radiation to that of an isotropic source. The maximum gain of the antenna connected to ANT1 port must not exceed the herein stated value to comply with regulatory agencies radiation exposure limits. For additional info see sections 4.2.2, 4.3.1 and/or 4.4 Input Power
> 33 dBm ( > 2 W ) for LARA-R211
> 24 dBm ( > 250 mW ) for other LARA-R2 The antenna connected to the ANT1 port must support with adequate margin the maximum power transmitted by the modules Table 7: Summary of primary Tx/Rx antenna RF interface (ANT1) requirements UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 34 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Item Requirements Remarks Impedance 50 nominal characteristic impedance Frequency Range See the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
Return Loss S11 < -10 dB (VSWR < 2:1) recommended S11 < -6 dB (VSWR < 3:1) acceptable Efficiency
> -1.5 dB ( > 70% ) recommended
> -3.0 dB ( > 50% ) acceptable The impedance of the antenna RF connection must match the 50 impedance of the ANT2 port. The required frequency range of the antennas connected to ANT2 port depends on the operating bands of the used cellular module and the used Mobile Network. The Return loss or the S11, as the VSWR, refers to the amount of reflected power, measuring how well the antenna RF connection matches the 50 characteristic impedance of the ANT2 port. The impedance of the antenna termination must match as much as possible the 50 nominal impedance of the ANT2 port over the operating frequency range, reducing as much as possible the amount of reflected power. The radiation efficiency is the ratio of the radiated power to the power delivered to antenna input: the efficiency is a measure of how well an antenna receives or transmits. The radiation efficiency of the antenna connected to the ANT2 port needs to be enough high over the operating frequency range to comply with the Over-The-Air (OTA) radiated performance requirements, as the TIS, specified by applicable related certification schemes. Table 8: Summary of secondary Rx antenna RF interface (ANT2) requirements Item Requirements Remarks Efficiency imbalance
< 0.5 dB recommended
< 1.0 dB acceptable Envelope Correlation Coefficient
< 0.4 recommended
< 0.5 acceptable Isolation
> 15 dB recommended
> 10 dB acceptable The radiation efficiency imbalance is the ratio of the primary (ANT1) antenna efficiency to the secondary (ANT2) antenna efficiency: the efficiency imbalance is a measure of how much better an antenna receives or transmits compared to the other antenna. The radiation efficiency of the secondary antenna needs to be roughly the same of the radiation efficiency of the primary antenna for good RF performance. The Envelope Correlation Coefficient (ECC) between the primary
(ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna is an indicator of 3D radiation pattern similarity between the two antennas: low ECC results from antenna patterns with radiation lobes in different directions. The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough low to comply with radiated performance requirements specified by related certification schemes. The antenna to antenna isolation is the loss between the primary
(ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna: high isolation results from low coupled antennas. The isolation between primary and secondary antenna needs to be high for good RF performance. Table 9: Summary of primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antennas relationship requirements UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 35 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.7.2 Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) The antenna detection is based on ADC measurement. The ANT_DET pin is an Analog to Digital Converter
(ADC) provided to sense the antenna presence. The antenna detection function provided by ANT_DET pin is an optional feature that can be implemented if the application requires it. The antenna detection is forced by the +UANTR AT command. See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details on this feature. The ANT_DET pin generates a DC current (for detailed characteristics see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) and measures the resulting DC voltage, thus determining the resistance from the antenna connector provided on the application board to GND. So, the requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following:
an RF antenna assembly with a built-in resistor (diagnostic circuit) must be used an antenna detection circuit must be implemented on the application board See section 2.4.2 for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly design-in guidelines. 1.8 SIM interface 1.8.1 SIM card interface LARA-R2 series modules provide a high-speed SIM/ME interface, including automatic detection and configuration of the voltage required by the connected SIM card or chip. Both 1.8 V and 3 V SIM types are supported: activation and deactivation with automatic voltage switch from 1.8 V to 3 V is implemented, according to ISO-IEC 7816-3 specifications. The VSIM supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the device in short circuit situations. The SIM driver supports the PPS (Protocol and Parameter Selection) procedure for baud-rate selection, according to the values determined by the SIM Card. 1.8.2 SIM card detection interface (SIM_DET) The GPIO5 pin is by default configured to detect the external SIM card mechanical / physical presence. The pin is configured as input, and it can sense SIM card presence as intended to be properly connected to the mechanical switch of a SIM card holder as described in section 2.5:
Low logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card not present High logic level at GPIO5 input pin is recognized as SIM card present The SIM card detection function provided by GPIO5 pin is an optional feature that can be implemented / used or not according to the application requirements: an Unsolicited Result Code (URC) is generated each time that there is a change of status (for more details see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +CIND, +CMER). The optional function SIM card hot insertion/removal can be additionally configured on the GPIO5 pin by specific AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UDCONF=50), in order to enable / disable the SIM interface upon detection of external SIM card physical insertion / removal. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 36 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9 Data communication interfaces LARA-R2 series modules provide the following serial communication interfaces:
UART interface: Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter serial interface available for the communication with a host application processor (AT commands, data communication, FW update by means of FOAT), for FW update by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic. (see section 1.9.1) USB interface: Universal Serial Bus 2.0 compliant interface available for the communication with a host application processor (AT commands, data communication, FW update by means of the FOAT feature), for FW update by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic. (see section 1.9.2) HSIC interface: High-Speed Inter-Chip USB compliant interface available for the communication with a host application processor (AT commands, data communication, FW update by means of the FOAT feature), for FW update by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool and for diagnostic. (see section 1.9.3) DDC interface: I2C bus compatible interface available for the communication with u-blox GNSS positioning chips or modules and with external I2C devices as an audio codec. (see section 1.9.4) SDIO interface: Secure Digital Input Output interface available for the communication with compatible u-blox short range radio communication Wi-Fi modules. (see section 1.9.5) 1.9.1 UART interface 1.9.1.1 UART features The UART interface is a 9-wire 1.8 V unbalanced asynchronous serial interface available on all the LARA-R2 series modules, supporting:
AT command mode8 Data mode and Online command mode8 Multiplexer protocol functionality (see 1.9.1.5) FW upgrades by means of the FOAT feature (see 1.14.13 and Firmware update application note [23]) FW upgrades by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool (see the Firmware update application note [23]) Trace log capture (diagnostic purpose) UART interface provides RS-232 functionality conforming to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [5], with CMOS compatible signal levels: 0 V for low data bit or ON state, and 1.8 V for high data bit or OFF state (for detailed electrical characteristics see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]), providing:
data lines (RXD as output, TXD as input), hardware flow control lines (CTS as output, RTS as input), modem status and control lines (DTR as input, DSR as output, DCD as output, RI as output). LARA-R2 series modules are designed to operate as cellular modems, i.e. as the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) according to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [5]. A host application processor connected to the module through the UART interface represents the data terminal equipment (DTE). UART signal names of the modules conform to the ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [5]: e.g. TXD line represents data transmitted by the DTE (host processor output) and received by the DCE (module input). LARA-R2 series modules UART interface is by default configured in AT command mode: the module waits for AT command instructions and interprets all the characters received as commands to execute. 8 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 37 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual All the functionalities supported by LARA-R2 series modules can be set and configured by AT commands:
AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27.007 [6], 3GPP TS 27.005 [7], 3GPP TS 27.010 [8]
u-blox AT commands (for the complete list and syntax see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) All flow control handshakes are supported by the UART interface and can be set by appropriate AT commands
(see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &K, +IFC, \Q AT commands): hardware, software, or none flow control. Hardware flow control is enabled by default. The one-shot autobauding is supported: the automatic baud rate detection is performed only once, at module start up. After the detection, the module works at the detected baud rate and the baud rate can only be changed by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +IPR command). One-shot automatic baud rate recognition (autobauding) is enabled by default. The following baud rates can be configured by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +IPR):
9600 b/s 19200 b/s 38400 b/s 57600 b/s 115200 b/s, default value when one-shot autobauding is disabled 230400 b/s 460800 b/s 921600 b/s 3000000 b/s 3250000 b/s 6000000 b/s 6500000 b/s Baud rates higher than 460800 b/s cannot be automatically detected by LARA-R2 series modules. The modules support the one-shot automatic frame recognition in conjunction with the one-shot autobauding. The following frame formats can be configured by AT command (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +ICF):
8N1 (8 data bits, No parity, 1 stop bit), default frame configuration with fixed baud rate, see Figure 18 8E1 (8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit) 8O1 (8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit) 8N2 (8 data bits, No parity, 2 stop bits) 7E1 (7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit) 7O1 (7 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit) Figure 18: Description of UART 8N1 frame format (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit) UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 38 of 155 D0D1D2D3D4D5D6D7Start of 1-BytetransferStart Bit(Always 0)Possible Start ofnext transferStop Bit(Always 1)tbit = 1/(Baudrate)Normal Transfer,8N1 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.1.2 UART AT interface configuration The UART interface of LARA-R2 series modules is available as AT command interface with the default configuration described in Table 10 (for more details and information about further settings, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). Interface AT Settings Comments UART interface AT interface: enabled AT command interface is enabled by default on the UART physical interface AT+IPR=0 AT+ICF=3,1 AT&K3 AT&S1 AT&D1 AT&C1 MUX protocol: disabled One-shot autobauding enabled by default on the modules 8N1 frame format enabled by default HW flow control enabled by default DSR line (Circuit 107 in ITU-T V.24) set ON in data mode9 and set OFF in command mode9 Upon an ON-to-OFF transition of DTR line (Circuit 108/2 in ITU-T V.24), the module (DCE) enters online command mode9 and issues an OK result code DCD line (Circuit 109 in ITU-T V.24) changes in accordance with the Carrier detect status;
ON if the Carrier is detected, OFF otherwise Multiplexing mode is disabled by default and it can be enabled by AT+CMUX command. For more details, see the Mux Implementation Application Note [21]. The following virtual channels are defined:
Channel 0: control channel Channel 1 5: AT commands / data connection Channel 6: GNSS tunneling10 Table 10: Default UART AT interface configuration 1.9.1.3 UART signal behavior At the module switch-on, before the UART interface initialization (as described in the power-on sequence reported in Figure 14), each pin is first tri-stated and then is set to its related internal reset state11. At the end of the boot sequence, the UART interface is initialized, the module is by default in active-mode, and the UART interface is enabled as AT commands interface. The configuration and the behavior of the UART signals after the boot sequence are described below. See section 1.4 for definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section. RXD signal behavior The module data output line (RXD) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The module holds RXD in the OFF state until the module does not transmit some data. TXD signal behavior The module data input line (TXD) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The TXD line is then held by the module in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is enabled inside the module on the TXD input. 9 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode 10 Not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. 11 Refer to the pin description table in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 39 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual CTS signal behavior The module hardware flow control output (CTS line) is set to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization. If the hardware flow control is enabled, as it is by default, the CTS line indicates when the UART interface is enabled (data can be sent and received). The module drives the CTS line to the ON state or to the OFF state when it is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART (see 1.9.1.4 for more details). If hardware flow control is enabled, then when the CTS line is OFF it does not necessarily mean that the module is in low power idle-mode, but only that the UART is not enabled, as the module could be forced to stay in active-mode for other activities, e.g. related to the network or related to other interfaces. When the multiplexer protocol is active, the CTS line state is mapped to FCon / FCoff MUX command for flow control issues outside the power saving configuration while the physical CTS line is still used as a power state indicator. For more details, see Mux Implementation Application Note [21]. The CTS hardware flow control setting can be changed by AT commands (for more details, see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT&K, AT\Q, AT+IFC, AT+UCTS AT command). When the power saving configuration is enabled by AT+UPSV command and the hardware flow-control is not implemented in the DTE/DCE connection, data sent by the DTE can be lost: the first character sent when the module is in low power idle-mode will not be a valid communication character (see section 1.9.1.4 and in particular the sub-section Wake up via data reception for further details). RTS signal behavior The hardware flow control input (RTS line) is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The module then holds the RTS line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is enabled inside the module on the RTS input. If the HW flow control is enabled, as it is by default, the module monitors the RTS line to detect permission from the DTE to send data to the DTE itself. If the RTS line is set to the OFF state, any on-going data transmission from the module is interrupted until the subsequent RTS line change to the ON state. The DTE must still be able to accept a certain number of characters after the RTS line is set to the OFF state: the module guarantees the transmission interruption within two characters from RTS state change. Module behavior according to RTS hardware flow control status can be configured by AT commands (for more details, see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT&K, AT\Q, AT+IFC command descriptions). If AT+UPSV=2 is set and HW flow control is disabled, the module monitors the RTS line to manage the power saving configuration (For more details, see section 1.9.1.4 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV):
When an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the RTS input, the UART is enabled and the module is forced to active-mode. After ~20 ms, the switch is completed and data can be received without loss. The module cannot enter low power idle-mode and the UART is enabled as long as the RTS is in the ON state If the RTS input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE, the UART is disabled (held in low power mode) and the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible DSR signal behavior If AT&S1 is set, as it is by default, the DSR module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The DSR line is then set to the OFF state when the module is in command mode 12 or in online command mode12 and is set to the ON state when the module is in data mode12. If AT&S0 is set, the DSR module output line is set by default to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization and is then always held in the ON state. 12 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 40 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual DTR signal behavior The DTR module input line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The module then holds the DTR line in the OFF state if the line is not activated by the DTE: an active pull-up is enabled inside the module on the DTR input. Module behavior according to DTR status can be changed by AT command (for more details, see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT&D command description). If AT+UPSV=3 is set, the DTR line is monitored by the module to manage the power saving configuration (for more details, see section 1.9.1.4 and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+UPSV command):
When an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the DTR input, the UART is enabled and the module is forced to active-mode. After ~20 ms, the switch is completed and data can be received without loss. The module cannot enter low power idle-mode and the UART is enabled as long as the DTR is in the ON state If the DTR input line is set to the OFF state by the DTE, the UART is disabled (held in low power mode) and the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible DCD signal behavior If AT&C1 is set, as it is by default, the DCD module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. The module then sets the DCD line according to the carrier detect status: ON if the carrier is detected, OFF otherwise. In case of voice calls, DCD is set to the ON state when the call is established. In case of data calls, there are the following scenarios regarding the DCD signal behavior:
Packet Switched Data call: Before activating the PPP protocol (data mode) a dial-up application must provide the ATD*99***<context_number># to the module: with this command the module switches from command mode to data mode and can accept PPP packets. The module sets the DCD line to the ON state, then answers with a CONNECT to confirm the ATD*99 command. The DCD ON is not related to the context activation but with the data mode Circuit Switched Data call: To establish a data call, the DTE can send the ATD<number> command to the module which sets an outgoing data call to a remote modem (or another data module). Data can be transparent (non reliable) or non transparent (with the reliable RLP protocol). When the remote DCE accepts the data call, the module DCD line is set to ON and the CONNECT <communication baudrate> string is returned by the module. At this stage the DTE can send characters through the serial line to the data module which sends them through the network to the remote DCE attached to a remote DTE The DCD is set to ON during the execution of the +CMGS, +CMGW, +USOWR, +USODL AT commands requiring input data from the DTE: the DCD line is set to the ON state as soon as the switch to binary/text input mode is completed and the prompt is issued; DCD line is set to OFF as soon as the input mode is interrupted or completed (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). The DCD line is kept in the ON state, even during the online command mode13, to indicate that the data call is still established even if suspended, while if the module enters command mode13, the DSR line is set to the OFF state. For more details see DSR signal behavior description. For scenarios when the DCD line setting is requested for different reasons (e.g. SMS texting during online command mode13), the DCD line changes to guarantee the correct behavior for all the scenarios. For example, in case of SMS texting in online command mode13, if the data call is released, DCD is kept ON till the SMS command execution is completed (even if the data call release would request DCD set OFF). If AT&C0 is set, the DCD module output line is set by default to the ON state (low level) at UART initialization and is then always held in the ON state. 13 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 41 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual RI signal behavior The RI module output line is set by default to the OFF state (high level) at UART initialization. Then, during an incoming call, the RI line is switched from the OFF state to the ON state with a 4:1 duty cycle and a 5 s period
(ON for 1 s, OFF for 4 s, see Figure 19), until the DTE attached to the module sends the ATA string and the module accepts the incoming data call. The RING string sent by the module (DCE) to the serial port at constant time intervals is not correlated with the switch of the RI line to the ON state. Figure 19: RI behavior during an incoming call The RI line can notify an SMS arrival. When the SMS arrives, the RI line switches from OFF to ON for 1 s (see Figure 20), if the feature is enabled by the AT+CNMI command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). RI OFF RI OFF RI ON RI ON 1s 1s 0 0 SMS arrives SMS Figure 20: RI behavior at SMS arrival time [s]
time [s]
This behavior allows the DTE to stay in power saving mode until the DCE related event requests service. For SMS arrival, if several events coincidently occur or in quick succession each event independently triggers the RI line, although the line will not be deactivated between each event. As a result, the RI line may stay to ON for more than 1 s. If an incoming call is answered within less than 1 s (with ATA or if auto-answering is set to ATS0=1) than the RI line is set to OFF earlier. As a result:
RI line monitoring cannot be used by the DTE to determine the number of received SMSes. For multiple events (incoming call plus SMS received), the RI line cannot be used to discriminate the two events, but the DTE must rely on the subsequent URCs and interrogate the DCE with proper commands. The RI line can additionally notify all the URCs and all the incoming data in PPP and Direct Link connections, if the feature is enabled by the AT+URING command (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]):
the RI line is asserted when one of the configured events occur and it remains asserted for 1 s unless another configured event will happen, with the same behavior described in Figure 20. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 42 of 155 1stime [s]151050RI ONRI OFFCall incomes1stime [s]151050RI ONRI OFFCall incomes LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.1.4 UART and power-saving The power saving configuration is controlled by the AT+UPSV command (for the complete description, see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). When power saving is enabled, the module automatically enters low power idle-mode whenever possible, and otherwise the active-mode is maintained by the module (see section 1.4 for definition and description of module operating modes referred to in this section). The AT+UPSV command configures both the module power saving and also the UART behavior in relation to the power saving. The conditions for the module entering low power idle-mode also depend on the UART power saving configuration, as the module does not enter the low power idle-mode according to any required activity related to the network (within or outside an active call) or any other required concurrent activity related to the functions and interfaces of the module, including the UART interface. Three different power saving configurations can be set by the AT+UPSV command:
AT+UPSV=0, power saving disabled (default configuration) AT+UPSV=1, power saving enabled cyclically AT+UPSV=2, power saving enabled and controlled by the UART RTS input line AT+UPSV=3, power saving enabled and controlled by the UART DTR input line The different power saving configurations that can be set by the +UPSV AT command are described in details in the following subsections. Table 11 summarizes the UART interface communication process in the different power saving configurations, in relation with HW flow control settings and RTS input line status. For more details on the +UPSV AT command description, refer to u-blox AT commands Manual [2]. AT+UPSV HW flow control RTS line DTR line Communication during idle-mode and wake up 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 Enabled (AT&K3) ON ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE are correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE. Enabled (AT&K3) OFF ON or OFF Disabled (AT&K0) ON or OFF ON or OFF Enabled (AT&K3) ON ON or OFF Enabled (AT&K3) OFF ON or OFF Disabled (AT&K0) ON or OFF ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE are correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON). Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise data is lost. Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by the module when it is ready to receive data (when UART is enabled). Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE. Data sent by the DTE is buffered by the DTE and will be correctly received by the module when it is ready to receive data (when UART is enabled). Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON). The first character sent by the DTE is lost by the module, but after ~20 ms the UART and the module are woken up: recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the UART / module complete wake-up (after ~20 ms). Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise the data is lost. Enabled (AT&K3) ON or OFF ON or OFF Not Applicable: HW flow control cannot be enabled with AT+UPSV=2. Disabled (AT&K0) ON ON or OFF Disabled (AT&K0) OFF ON or OFF Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise data is lost. Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise data is lost. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 43 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual AT+UPSV HW flow control RTS line DTR line Communication during idle-mode and wake up 3 3 3 3 3 3 Enabled (AT&K3) ON Enabled (AT&K3) ON Enabled (AT&K3) OFF ON OFF ON Enabled (AT&K3) OFF OFF Disabled (AT&K0) ON or OFF ON Disabled (AT&K0) ON or OFF OFF Table 11: UART and power-saving summary Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE. Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE. Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON). Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module. Data sent by the module is buffered by the module and will be correctly received by the DTE when it is ready to receive data (i.e. RTS line will be ON). Data sent by the DTE is correctly received by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise data are lost. Data sent by the DTE is lost by the module. Data sent by the module is correctly received by the DTE if it is ready to receive data, otherwise data are lost. AT+UPSV=0: power saving disabled, fixed active-mode The module does not enter low power idle-mode and the UART interface is enabled (data can be sent and received): the CTS line is always held in the ON state after UART initialization. This is the default configuration. AT+UPSV=1: power saving enabled, cyclic idle/active-mode When the AT+UPSV=1 command is issued by the DTE, the UART will be normally disabled, and then periodically or upon necessity enabled as following:
During the periodic UART wake up to receive or send data, also according to the module wake up for the paging reception (see section 1.5.1.5) or other activities If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data If the DTE send data with HW flow control disabled, the first character sent causes the UART and module wake-up after ~20 ms: recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up
(see the following subsection wake up via data reception) The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode according to the UART periodic wake up so that the module cyclically enters the low power idle-mode and the active-mode. Additionally, the module wakes up to active-mode according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF Tx / Rx) or any other required activity related to module functions / interfaces (including the UART itself). The time period of the UART enable/disable cycle is configured differently when the module is registered with a 2G network compared to when the module is registered with a 3G or LTE network:
2G: UART is enabled synchronously with some paging receptions: UART is enabled concurrently to a paging reception, and then, as data has not been received or sent, UART is disabled until the first paging reception that occurs after a timeout of 2.0 s, and therefore the interface is enabled again 3G or LTE: UART is asynchronously enabled to paging receptions, as UART is enabled for ~20 ms, and then, if data are not received or sent, UART is disabled for 2.5 s, and afterwards the interface is enabled again Not registered: when a module is not registered with a network, UART is enabled for ~20 ms, and then, if data has not been received or sent, UART is disabled for 2.5 s, and afterwards the interface is enabled again When the UART interface is enabled, data can be received. When a character is received, it forces the UART interface to stay enabled for a longer time and it forces the module to stay in the active-mode for a longer time, according to the timeout configured by the second parameter of the +UPSV AT command. The timeout can be UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 44 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual set from 40 2G-frames (i.e. 40 x 4.615 ms = 184 ms) up to 65000 2G-frames (i.e. 65000 x 4.615 ms = 300 s). Default value is 2000 2G-frames (i.e. 2000 x 4.615 ms = 9.2 s). Every subsequent character received during the active-mode, resets and restarts the timer; hence the active-mode duration can be extended indefinitely. The CTS output line is driven to the ON or OFF state when the module is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART: Figure 21 illustrates the CTS output line toggling due to paging reception and data received over the UART, with AT+UPSV=1 configuration. Figure 21: CTS output pin indicates when modules UART is enabled (CTS = ON = low level) or disabled (CTS = OFF = high level) AT+UPSV=2: power saving enabled and controlled by the RTS line This configuration can only be enabled with the module hardware flow control disabled (i.e. AT&K0 setting). The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the RTS line to OFF. Afterwards, the UART is enabled again, and the module does not enter low power idle-mode, as following:
If an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the RTS input, this causes the UART / module wake-up after ~20 ms:
recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up, and the UART is kept enabled as long as the RTS input line is set to ON. If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF transmission / reception) or any other required activity related to the module functions / interfaces (including the UART itself). AT+UPSV=3: power saving enabled and controlled by the DTR line The UART interface is disabled after the DTE sets the DTR line to OFF. Afterwards, the UART is enabled again, and the module does not enter low power idle-mode, as following:
If an OFF-to-ON transition occurs on the DTR input, this causes the UART / module wake-up after ~20 ms:
recognition of subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete wake-up, and the UART is kept enabled as long as the DTR input line is set to ON If the module needs to transmit some data (e.g. URC), the UART is temporarily enabled to send data The module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. for the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5, or for any other required RF signal transmission or reception) or any other required activity related to the functions / interfaces of the module. The AT+UPSV=3 configuration can be enabled regardless the flow control setting on UART. In particular, the HW flow control can be enabled (AT&K3) or disabled (AT&K0) on UART during this configuration. In both cases, with the AT+UPSV=3 configuration, the CTS line indicates when the module is either able or not able to accept data from the DTE over the UART. When the AT+UPSV=3 configuration is enabled, the DTR input line can still be used by the DTE to control the module behavior according to AT&D command configuration (see u-blox AT commands Manual [2]). UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 45 of 155 time [s]~9.2 s (default)Data inputCTS ONCTS OFF LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Wake up via data reception The UART wake up via data reception consists of a special configuration of the module TXD input line that causes the system wake-up when a low-to-high transition occurs on the TXD input line. In particular, the UART is enabled and the module switches from the low power idle-mode to active-mode within ~20 ms from the first character received: this is the system wake up time. As a consequence, the first character sent by the DTE when the UART is disabled (i.e. the wake up character) is not a valid communication character even if the wake up via data reception configuration is active, because it cannot be recognized, and the recognition of the subsequent characters is guaranteed only after the complete system wake-up (i.e. after ~20 ms). The UART wake up via data reception configuration is active in the following cases:
AT+UPSV=1 is set with HW flow control disabled Figure 22 and Figure 23 show examples of common scenarios and timing constraints:
AT+UPSV=1 power saving configuration is active and the timeout from last data received to idle-mode start is set to 2000 frames (AT+UPSV=1,2000) Hardware flow control is disabled Figure 22 shows the case where the module UART is disabled and only a wake-up is forced. In this scenario the only character sent by the DTE is the wake-up character; as a consequence, the DCE module UART is disabled when the timeout from last data received expires (2000 frames without data reception, as the default case). Figure 22: Wake-up via data reception without further communication Figure 23 shows the case where in addition to the wake-up character further (valid) characters are sent. The wake up character wakes-up the module UART. The other characters must be sent after the wake up time of
~20 ms. If this condition is satisfied, the module (DCE) recognizes characters. The module will disable the UART after 2000 GSM frames from the latest data reception. Figure 23: Wake-up via data reception with further communication UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 46 of 155 Wake up character Not recognized by DCEOFFONDCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames (~9.2 s)time Wake up time: ~20 mstime TXD inputUARTOFFONWake up character Not recognized by DCEValid characters Recognized by DCEDCE UART is enabled for 2000 GSM frames (~9.2s) after the last data receivedtime Wake up time: ~20 mstime OFFONTXD inputUARTOFFON LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual The wake-up via data reception feature cannot be disabled. In command mode 14, with wake-up via data reception enabled and autobauding enabled, the DTE should always send a dummy character to the module before the AT prefix set at the beginning of each command line: the first dummy character is ignored if the module is in active-mode, or it represents the wake-up character if the module is in low power idle-mode. In command mode14, with wake-up via data reception enabled and autobauding disabled, the DTE should always send a dummy AT to the module before each command line: the first dummy AT is not ignored if the module is in active-mode (i.e. the module replies OK), or it represents the wake up character if the module is in low power idle-mode (i.e. the module does not reply). Additional considerations If the USB is connected and not suspended, the module is kept ready to communicate over USB regardless the AT+UPSV settings, which have instead effect on the UART behavior, as they configure the UART power saving, so that UART is enabled / disabled according to the AT+UPSV settings. To set the AT+UPSV=1, AT+UPSV=2 or AT+UPSV=3 configuration over the USB interface, the autobauding must be previously disabled on the UART by the +IPR AT command over the used USB AT interface, and this +IPR AT command configuration must be saved in the module non-volatile memory (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). Then, after the subsequent module re-boot, AT+UPSV=1, AT+UPSV=2 or AT+UPSV=3 can be issued over the used AT interface (the USB): all the AT profiles are updated accordingly. 1.9.1.5 Multiplexer protocol (3GPP TS 27.010) LARA-R2 series modules include multiplexer functionality as per 3GPP TS 27.010 [8], on the UART physical link. This is a data link protocol which uses HDLC-like framing and operates between the module (DCE) and the application processor (DTE) and allows a number of simultaneous sessions over the used physical link (UART): the user can concurrently use AT interface on one MUX channel and data communication on another MUX channel. The following virtual channels are defined (for more details, see Mux implementation Application Note [21]):
Channel 0: Multiplexer control Channel 1 5: AT commands / data connection Channel 6: GNSS data tunneling GNSS data tunneling channel is not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. 14 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 47 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.2 USB interface 1.9.2.1 USB features LARA-R2 series modules include a High-Speed USB 2.0 compliant interface with 480 Mb/s maximum data rate, representing the main interface for transferring high speed data with a host application processor, supporting:
AT command mode15 Data mode and Online command mode15 FW upgrades by means of the FOAT feature (see 1.14.13 and Firmware update application note [23]) FW upgrades by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool (see the Firmware update application note [23]) Trace log capture (diagnostic purpose) The module itself acts as a USB device and can be connected to a USB host such as a Personal Computer or an embedded application microprocessor equipped with compatible drivers. The USB_D+/USB_D- lines carry USB serial bus data and signaling according to the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 specification [9], while the VUSB_DET input pin senses the VBUS USB supply presence (nominally 5 V at the source) to detect the host connection and enable the interface. The USB interface of the module is enabled only if a valid voltage is detected by the VUSB_DET input (see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). Neither the USB interface, nor the whole module is supplied by the VUSB_DET input: the VUSB_DET senses the USB supply voltage and absorbs few microamperes. The USB interface is controlled and operated with:
AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27.007 [6], 3GPP TS 27.005 [7]
u-blox AT commands (for the complete list and syntax see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) The USB interface of LARA-R2 series modules, according to the configured USB profile, can provide different USB functions with various capabilities and purposes, such as:
CDC-ACM for AT commands and data communication CDC-ACM for GNSS tunneling CDC-ACM for SAP (SIM Access Profile) CDC-ACM for Diagnostic log CDC-NCM for Ethernet-over-USB CDC-ACM for GNSS tunneling is not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions CDC-ACM for SAP and CDC-NCM for Ethernet-over-USB are not supported by 02 and 62 versions The RI virtual signal is not supported over USB CDC-ACM by 02 and 62 product versions The USB profile of LARA-R2 series modules identifies itself by its VID (Vendor ID) and PID (Product ID) combination, included in the USB device descriptor according to the USB 2.0 specification [9]. If the USB is connected to the host before the module is switched on, or if the module is reset (rebooted) with the USB connected to the host, the VID and PID are automatically updated during the boot of the module. First, VID and PID are the following:
VID = 0x8087 PID = 0x0716 This VID and PID combination identifies a USB profile where no USB function described above is available: AT commands must not be sent to the module over the USB profile identified by this VID and PID combination. 15 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 48 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Then, after a time period (which depends on the host / device enumeration timings), the VID and PID are updated to the ones related to the default USB profile providing the following set of USB functions:
6 CDC-ACM modem COM ports enumerated as follows:
o USB1: AT and data o USB2: AT and data o USB3: AT and data o USB4: GNSS tunneling o USB5: SAP (SIM Access Profile) o USB6: Primary Log (diagnostic purpose) VID and PID of this USB profile with the set of functions described above (6 CDC-ACM) are the following:
VID = 0x1546 PID = 0x110A Figure 24 summarizes the USB end-points available with the default USB profile. Figure 24: LARA-R2 series USB End-Points summary for the default USB profile configuration UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 49 of 155 Default profile configurationInterface 0Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 1DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction AT and DataInterface 2Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 3DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction AT and DataInterface 4Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 5DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction AT and DataInterface 6Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 7DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction GNSS tunnelingInterface 8Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 9DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction SAPInterface 10Abstract Control ModelEndPointTransfer: InterruptInterface 11DataEndPointTransfer: BulkEndPointTransfer: BulkFunction Primary Log LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.2.2 USB in Windows USB drivers are provided for Windows operating system platforms and should be properly installed / enabled by following the step-by-step instructions available in the EVK-R2xx User Guide [3] or in the Windows Embedded OS USB Driver Installation Application Note [4]. USB drivers are available for the following operating system platforms:
Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8.1 Windows 10 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 Windows Embedded Compact 7 Windows Embedded Compact 2013 Windows 10 IoT The module firmware can be upgraded over the USB interface by means of the FOAT feature, or using the u-blox EasyFlash tool (for more details see Firmware Update Application Note [23]. 1.9.2.3 USB in Linux/Android It is not required to install a specific driver for each Linux-based or Android-based operating system (OS) to use the module USB interface, which is compatible with standard Linux/Android USB kernel drivers. The full capability and configuration of the module USB interface can be reported by running lsusb v or an equivalent command available in the host operating system when the module is connected. 1.9.2.4 USB and power saving The modules automatically enter the USB suspended state when the device has observed no bus traffic for a specific time period according to the USB 2.0 specifications [9]. In suspended state, the module maintains any USB internal status as device. In addition, the module enters the suspended state when the hub port it is attached to is disabled. This is referred to as USB selective suspend. If the USB is suspended and a power saving configuration is enabled by the AT+UPSV command, the module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible but it wakes up to active-mode according to any required activity related to the network (e.g. the periodic paging reception described in section 1.5.1.5) or any other required activity related to the functions / interfaces of the module. The USB exits suspend mode when there is bus activity. If the USB is connected and not suspended, the module is kept ready to communicate over USB regardless the AT+UPSV settings, therefore the AT+UPSV settings are overruled but they have effect on the power saving configuration of the other interfaces (see 1.9.1.4). The modules are capable of USB remote wake-up signaling: i.e. it may request the host to exit suspend mode or selective suspend by using electrical signaling to indicate remote wake-up, for example due to incoming call, URCs, data reception on a socket. The remote wake-up signaling notifies the host that it should resume from its suspended mode, if necessary, and service the external event. Remote wake-up is accomplished using electrical signaling described in the USB 2.0 specifications [9]. For the module current consumption description with power saving enabled and USB suspended, or with power saving disabled and USB not suspended, see sections 1.5.1.5, 1.5.1.6 and LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The additional VUSB_DET input pin available on LARA-R2 series modules provides the complete bus detach functionality: the modules disable the USB interface when a low logic level is sensed after a high-to-low logic level transition on the VUSB_DET input pin. This allows a further reduction of the module current consumption, in particular as compared to the USB suspended status during low-power idle mode with power saving enabled. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 50 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.3 HSIC interface The HSIC interface is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions except for diagnostic purposes. 1.9.3.1 HSIC features LARA-R2 series modules include a USB High-Speed Inter-Chip compliant interface with maximum 480 Mb/s data rate according to the High-Speed Inter-Chip USB Electrical Specification Version 1.0 [10] and USB Specification Revision 2.0 [9]. The module itself acts as a device and can be connected to any compatible host. The HSIC interface provides:
AT command mode16 Data mode and Online command mode16 FW upgrades by means of the FOAT feature (see 1.14.13 and Firmware update application note [23]) FW upgrades by means of the u-blox EasyFlash tool (see the Firmware update application note [23]) Trace log capture (diagnostic purpose) The HSIC interface consists of a bi-directional DDR data line (HSIC_DATA) for transmitting and receiving data synchronously with the bi-directional strobe line (HSIC_STRB). The modules include also the HOST_SELECT pin to select the module / host application processor configuration:
the pin is available to select, enable, connect, disconnect and subsequently re-connect the HSIC interface. The USB interface is controlled and operated with:
AT commands according to 3GPP TS 27.007 [6], 3GPP TS 27.005 [7]
u-blox AT commands (for the complete list and syntax see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) 16 See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for the definition of the command mode, data mode, and online command mode. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 51 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.9.4 DDC (I2C) interface Communication with u-blox GNSS receivers over I2C bus compatible Display Data Channel interface, AssistNow embedded GNSS positioning aiding, CellLocate positioning through cellular info, and custom functions over GPIOs for the integration with u-blox positioning chips / modules are not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. The SDA and SCL pins represent an I2C bus compatible Display Data Channel (DDC) interface available for communication with u-blox GNSS chips / modules, communication with other external I2C devices as audio codecs. The AT commands interface is not available on the DDC (I2C) interface. DDC (I2C) slave-mode operation is not supported: the LARA-R2 series module can act as I2C master that can communicate with more I2C slaves in accordance to the I2C bus specifications [11]. The DDC (I2C) interface pins of the module, serial data (SDA) and serial clock (SCL), are open drain outputs conforming to the I2C bus specifications [11]. u-blox has implemented special features to ease the design effort required for the integration of a u-blox cellular module with a u blox GNSS receiver. Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox GNSS receiver allows designers to have full access to the positioning receiver directly via the cellular module: it relays control messages to the GNSS receiver via a dedicated DDC (I2C) interface. A 2nd interface connected to the positioning receiver is not necessary: AT commands via the UART or USB serial interface of the cellular module allows a fully control of the GNSS receiver from any host processor. The modules feature embedded GNSS aiding that is a set of specific features developed by u-blox to enhance GNSS performance, decreasing the Time To First Fix (TTFF), thus allowing to calculate the position in a shorter time with higher accuracy. These GNSS aiding types are available:
Local aiding AssistNow Online AssistNow Offline AssistNow Autonomous The embedded GNSS aiding features can be used only if the DDC (I2C) interface of the cellular module is connected to the u-blox GNSS receivers. The cellular modules provide additional custom functions over GPIO pins to improve the integration with u-blox positioning chips and modules. GPIO pins can handle:
GNSS receiver power-on/off: GNSS supply enable function provided by GPIO2 improves the positioning receiver power consumption. When the GNSS functionality is not required, the positioning receiver can be completely switched off by the cellular module that is controlled by AT commands The wake up from idle-mode when the GNSS receiver is ready to send data: GNSS Tx data ready function provided by GPIO3 improves the cellular module power consumption. When power saving is enabled in the cellular module by the AT+UPSV command and the GNSS receiver does not send data by the DDC (I2C) interface, the module automatically enters idle-mode whenever possible. With the GNSS Tx data ready function the GNSS receiver can indicate to the cellular module that it is ready to send data by the DDC (I2C) interface: the positioning receiver can wake up the cellular module if it is in idle-mode, so the cellular module does not lose the data sent by the GNSS receiver even if power saving is enabled UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 52 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual The RTC synchronization signal to the GNSS receiver: GNSS RTC sharing function provided by GPIO4 improves GNSS receiver performance, decreasing the Time To First Fix (TTFF), and thus allowing to calculate the position in a shorter time with higher accuracy. When GPS local aiding is enabled, the cellular module automatically uploads data such as position, time, ephemeris, almanac, health and ionospheric parameter from the positioning receiver into its local memory, and restores this to the GNSS receiver at the next power up of the positioning receiver The GNSS RTC sharing function is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. For more details regarding the handling of the DDC (I2C) interface, the GNSS aiding features and the GNSS related functions over GPIOs, see section 1.12, to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] (AT+UGPS, AT+UGPRF, AT+UGPIOC AT commands) and the GNSS Implementation Application Note [22]. GNSS Tx data ready and GNSS RTC sharing functions are not supported by all u-blox GNSS receivers HW or ROM/FW versions. See the GNSS Implementation Application Note [22] or to the Hardware Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers for the supported features. As additional improvement for the GNSS receiver performance, the V_BCKP supply output of the cellular modules can be connected to the V_BCKP supply input pin of u-blox positioning chips and modules to provide the supply for the GNSS real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled. This enables the u-blox positioning receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start (depending on the duration of the GNSS receiver VCC outage) and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM. 1.9.5 SDIO interface Secure Digital Input Output interface is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. LARA-R2 series modules include a 4-bit Secure Digital Input Output interface (SDIO_D0, SDIO_D1, SDIO_D2, SDIO_D3, SDIO_CLK, SDIO_CMD) designed to communicate with an external u-blox short range Wi-Fi module:
the cellular module acts as an SDIO host controller which can communicate over the SDIO bus with a compatible u-blox short range radio communication Wi-Fi module acting as SDIO device. The SDIO interface is the only one interface of LARA-R2 series modules dedicated for communication between the u-blox cellular module and the u-blox short range Wi-Fi module. The AT commands interface is not available on the SDIO interface of LARA-R2 series modules. Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is not necessary. AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module allows a full control of the Wi-Fi module from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface. u-blox has implemented special features in the cellular modules to ease the design effort for the integration of a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range Wi-Fi module to provide Router functionality. Additional custom function over GPIO pins is designed to improve the integration with u-blox Wi-Fi modules:
Wi-Fi enable Switch-on / switch-off the Wi-Fi Wi-Fi enable function over GPIO is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 53 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.10 Audio interface Audio is not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B product versions. 1.10.1 Digital audio interface LARA-R2 series modules include a 4-wire I2S digital audio interface (I2S_TXD data output, I2S_RXD data input, I2S_CLK clock input/output, I2S_WA world alignment / synchronization signal input/output), which can be configured by AT command for digital audio communication with external digital audio devices as an audio codec (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UI2S AT command). The I2S interface can be alternatively set in different modes, by <I2S_mode> parameter of AT+UI2S command:
PCM mode (short synchronization signal): I2S word alignment signal is set high for 1 or 2 clock cycles for the synchronization, and then is set low for 16 clock cycles according to the 17 or 18 clock cycles frame length. Normal I2S mode (long synchronization signal): I2S word alignment is set high / low with a 50% duty cycle
(high for 16 clock cycles / low for 16 clock cycles, according to the 32 clock cycles frame length). The I2S interface can be alternatively set in different roles, by <I2S_Master_Slave> parameter of AT+UI2S:
Master mode Slave mode The sample rate of transmitted/received words, which corresponds to the I2S word alignment / synchronization signal frequency, can be alternatively set by the <I2S_sample_rate> parameter of AT+UI2S to:
8 kHz 11.025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22.05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44.1 kHz 48 kHz The modules support I2S transmit and I2S receive data 16-bit words long, linear, mono (or also dual mono in Normal I2S mode). Data is transmitted and read in 2s complement notation. MSB is transmitted and read first. I2S clock signal frequency depends on the frame length, the sample rate and the selected mode of operation:
17 x <I2S_sample_rate> or 18 x <I2S_sample_rate> in PCM mode (short synchronization signal) 16 x 2 x <I2S_sample_rate> in Normal I2S mode (long synchronization signal) For the complete description of the possible configurations and settings of the I2S digital audio interface for PCM and Normal I2S modes refer to the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UI2S AT command. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 54 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.11 Clock output LARA-R2 series modules provide master digital clock output function on GPIO6 pin, which can be configured to provide a 13 MHz or 26 MHz square wave. This is mainly designed to feed the master clock input of an external audio codec, as the clock output can be configured in Audio dependent mode (generating the square wave only when the audio path is active), or in Continuous mode. For more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UMCLK AT command. 1.12 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) LARA-R2 series modules include 9 pins (GPIO1-GPIO5, I2S_TXD, I2S_RXD, I2S_CLK, I2S_WA) which can be configured as General Purpose Input/Output or to provide custom functions via u-blox AT commands (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +UGPIOR, +UGPIOW AT commands), as summarized in Table 12. Function Description Default GPIO Configurable GPIOs Network status indication Network status: registered home network, registered roaming, data transmission, no service GNSS supply enable17 Enable/disable the supply of u-blox GNSS receiver connected to the cellular module GNSS data ready17 GNSS RTC sharing18 Sense when u-blox GNSS receiver connected to the module is ready for sending data by the DDC (I2C) RTC synchronization signal to the u-blox GNSS receiver connected to the cellular module
--
SIM card detection External SIM card physical presence detection SIM card hot insertion/removal Enable / disable SIM interface upon detection of external SIM card physical insertion / removal GPIO5
--
--
GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO1-GPIO4 GPIO1-GPIO4 GPIO3 GPIO4 GPIO5 GPIO5 I2S digital audio interface Wi-Fi control18 I2S digital audio interface Control of an external Wi-Fi chip or module General purpose input Input to sense high or low digital level General purpose output Output to set the high or the low digital level Pin disabled Tri-state with an internal active pull-down enabled Table 12: LARA-R2 series GPIO custom functions configuration I2S_RXD, I2S_TXD, I2S_CLK, I2S_WA I2S_RXD, I2S_TXD, I2S_CLK, I2S_WA
--
--
GPIO4 GPIO1
--
All All All 1.13 Reserved pins (RSVD) LARA-R2 series modules have pins reserved for future use, named RSVD: they can all be left unconnected on the application board, except the RSVD pin number 33 that must be externally connected to ground 17 Not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. For these products GPIO2 and GPIO3 pins are by default disabled 18 Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 55 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14 System features 1.14.1 Network indication GPIOs can be configured by the AT command to indicate network status (for further details see section 1.12 and to u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], GPIO commands):
No service (no network coverage or not registered) Registered 2G / 3G / LTE home network Registered 2G / 3G / LTE visitor network (roaming) Call enabled (RF data transmission / reception) 1.14.2 Antenna detection The antenna detection function provided by the ANT_DET pin is based on an ADC measurement as optional feature that can be implemented if the application requires it. The antenna supervisor is forced by the +UANTR AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details). The requirements to achieve antenna detection functionality are the following:
an RF antenna assembly with a built-in resistor (diagnostic circuit) must be used an antenna detection circuit must be implemented on the application board See section 1.7.2 for detailed antenna detection interface functional description and see section 2.4.2 for detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antenna assembly design-in guidelines. 1.14.3 Jamming detection Congestion detection (i.e. jamming detection) is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. In real network situations modules can experience various kind of out-of-coverage conditions: limited service conditions when roaming to networks not supporting the specific SIM, limited service in cells which are not suitable or barred due to operators choices, no cell condition when moving to poorly served or highly interfered areas. In the latter case, interference can be artificially injected in the environment by a noise generator covering a given spectrum, thus obscuring the operators carriers entitled to give access to the LTE/3G/2G service. The congestion (i.e. jamming) detection feature can be enabled and configured by the +UCD AT command: the feature consists of detecting an anomalous source of interference and signaling the start and stop of such conditions to the host application processor with an unsolicited indication, which can react appropriately by e.g. switching off the radio transceiver of the module (i.e. configuring the module in airplane mode by means of the +CFUN AT command) in order to reduce power consumption and monitoring the environment at constant periods (for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UCD AT command). UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 56 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14.4 Dual stack IPv4/IPv6 LARA-R2 series support both Internet Protocol version 4 and Internet Protocol version 6 in parallel. For more details about dual stack IPv4/IPv6 see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. 1.14.5 TCP/IP and UDP/IP LARA-R2 series modules provide embedded TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocol stack: a PDP context can be configured, established and handled via the data connection management packet switched data commands. LARA-R2 series modules provide Direct Link mode to establish a transparent end-to-end communication with an already connected TCP or UDP socket via serial interfaces. In Direct Link mode, data sent to the serial interface from an external application processor is forwarded to the network and vice-versa. For more details about embedded TCP/IP and UDP/IP functionalities see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]
1.14.6 FTP LARA-R2 series provide embedded File Transfer Protocol (FTP) services. Files are read and stored in the local file system of the module. FTP files can also be transferred using FTP Direct Link:
FTP download: data coming from the FTP server is forwarded to the host processor via serial interfaces (for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is always stored in the modules Flash File System) FTP upload: data coming from the host processor via serial interfaces is forwarded to the FTP server (for FTP without Direct Link mode the data is read from the modules Flash File System) When Direct Link is used for a FTP file transfer, only the file content pass through USB / UART serial interface, whereas all the FTP commands handling is managed internally by the FTP application. For more details about embedded FTP functionalities see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. 1.14.7 HTTP LARA-R2 series modules provide the embedded Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) services via AT commands for sending requests to a remote HTTP server, receiving the server response and transparently storing it in the modules Flash File System (FFS). For more details about embedded HTTP functionalities see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 57 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14.8 SSL/TLS LARA-R2 series modules support the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) / Transport Layer Security (TLS) with certificate key sizes up to 4096 bits to provide security over the FTP and HTTP protocols. The SSL/TLS support provides different connection security aspects:
Server authentication: use of the server certificate verification against a specific trusted certificate or a trusted certificates list Client authentication: use of the client certificate and the corresponding private key Data security and integrity: data encryption and Hash Message Authentication Code (HMAC) generation The security aspects used during a connection depend on the SSL/TLS configuration and features supported. Table 13 contains the settings of the default SSL/TLS profile and Table 14 to Table 18 report the main SSL/TLS supported capabilities of the products. For a complete list of supported configurations and settings see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. Settings Certificates validation level Minimum SSL/TLS version Value Level 0 Any Meaning The server certificate will not be checked or verified The server can use any of the TLS1.0/TLS1.1/TLS1.2 versions for the connection Cipher suite Automatic The cipher suite will be negotiated in the handshake process Trusted root certificate internal name None No certificate will be used for the server authentication Expected server host-name Client certificate internal name Client private key internal name Client private key password Pre-shared key None None None None None Table 13: Default SSL/TLS profile SSL/TLS Version SSL 2.0 SSL 3.0 TLS 1.0 TLS 1.1 TLS 1.2 Table 14: SSL/TLS version support Algorithm RSA PSK Table 15: Authentication Algorithm RC4 DES 3DES AES128 AES256 Table 16: Encryption UBX-16010573 - R10 No server host-name is expected No client certificate will be used No client private key will be used No client private key password will be used No pre-shared key password will be used NO YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES System description Page 58 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Algorithm MD5 SHA/SHA1 SHA256 SHA384 Table 17: Message digest Description TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_PSK_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_PSK_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 Table 18: TLS cipher suite registry Registry value 0x00,0x2F 0x00,0x3C 0x00,0x35 0x00,0x3D 0x00,0x0A 0x00,0x04 0x00,0x05 0x00,0x8C 0x00,0x8D 0x00,0x8B 0x00,0x94 0x00,0x95 0x00,0x93 0x00,0xAE 0x00,0xAF 0x00,0xB6 0x00,0xB7 NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES 1.14.9 Bearer Independent Protocol The Bearer Independent Protocol (BIP) is a mechanism by which a cellular module provides a SIM with access to the data bearers supported by the network. With the BIP for Over-the-Air SIM provisioning, the data transfer from and to the SIM uses either an already active PDP context or a new PDP context established with the APN provided by the SIM card. For more details, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. 1.14.10 AssistNow clients and GNSS integration AssistNow clients and u-blox GNSS receiver integration are not supported by the LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. For customers using u-blox GNSS receivers, the LARA-R2 series cellular modules feature embedded AssistNow clients. AssistNow A-GPS provides better GNSS performance and faster Time-To-First-Fix. The clients can be enabled and disabled with an AT command (see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). LARA-R2 series cellular modules act as a stand-alone AssistNow client, making AssistNow available with no additional requirements for resources or software integration on an external host micro controller. Full access to u-blox positioning receivers is available via the cellular modules, through a dedicated DDC (I2C) interface, while the available GPIOs can handle the positioning chipset / module power-on/off. This means that the cellular module and the GNSS receiver can be controlled through a single serial port from any host processor. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 59 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14.11 Hybrid positioning and CellLocate Hybrid positioning and CellLocate are not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. Although GNSS is a widespread technology, its reliance on the visibility of extremely weak GNSS satellite signals means that positioning is not always possible. Especially difficult environments for GNSS are indoors, in enclosed or underground parking garages, as well as in urban canyons where GNSS signals are blocked or jammed by multipath interference. The situation can be improved by augmenting GNSS receiver data with cellular network information to provide positioning information even when GNSS reception is degraded or absent. This additional information can benefit numerous applications. Positioning through cellular information: CellLocate u-blox CellLocate enables the device position estimation based on the parameters of the mobile network cells visible to the specific device. To estimate its position the u-blox cellular module sends the CellLocate server the parameters of network cells visible to it using a UDP connection. In return the server provides the estimated position based on the CellLocate database. The module can either send the parameters of the visible home network cells only (normal scan) or the parameters of all surrounding cells of all mobile operators (deep scan). The deep scan is not supported by 02 product versions. The CellLocate database is compiled from the position of devices which observed, in the past, a specific cell or set of cells (historical observations) as follows:
1. Several devices reported their position to the CellLocate server when observing a specific cell (the As in the picture represent the position of the devices which observed the same cell A) UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 60 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2. CellLocate server defines the area of Cell A visibility If a new device reports the observation of Cell A CellLocate is able to provide the estimated position from the area of visibility 3. 4. The visibility of multiple cells provides increased accuracy based on the intersection of areas of visibility. CellLocate is implemented using a set of two AT commands that allow configuration of the CellLocate service
(AT+ULOCCELL) and requesting position according to the user configuration (AT+ULOC). The answer is provided in the form of an unsolicited AT command including latitude, longitude and estimated accuracy. The accuracy of the position estimated by CellLocate depends on the availability of historical observations in the specific area. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 61 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Hybrid positioning With u-blox hybrid positioning technology, u-blox cellular modules can be triggered to provide their current position using either a u-blox GNSS receiver or the position estimated from CellLocate. The choice depends on which positioning method provides the best and fastest solution according to the user configuration, exploiting the benefit of having multiple and complementary positioning methods. Hybrid positioning is implemented through a set of three AT commands that allow GNSS receiver configuration
(AT+ULOCGNSS), CellLocate service configuration (AT+ULOCCELL), and requesting the position according to the user configuration (AT+ULOC). The answer is provided in the form of an unsolicited AT command including latitude, longitude and estimated accuracy (if the position has been estimated by CellLocate), and additional parameters if the position has been computed by the GNSS receiver. The configuration of mobile network cells does not remain static (e.g. new cells are continuously added or existing cells are reconfigured by the network operators). For this reason, when a hybrid positioning method has been triggered and the GNSS receiver calculates the position, a database self-learning mechanism has been implemented so that these positions are sent to the server to update the database and maintain its accuracy. The use of hybrid positioning requires a connection via the DDC (I2C) bus between the cellular modules and the u-blox GNSS receiver (see section 2.6.4). See GNSS Implementation Application Note [22] for the complete description of the feature. u-blox is extremely mindful of user privacy. When a position is sent to the CellLocate server u-blox is unable to track the SIM used or the specific device. 1.14.12 Wi-Fi integration Integration of u-blox short range communication Wi-Fi modules is not supported by the 02 and 62 product versions. Full access to u-blox short range communication Wi-Fi modules is available through a dedicated SDIO interface
(see sections 1.9.5 and 2.6.5). This means that combining a LARA-R2 series cellular module with a u-blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is not necessary. AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module (UART, USB) allows a full control of the Wi-Fi module from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface. All the management software for Wi-Fi module operations runs inside the cellular module in addition to those required for cellular-only operation. 1.14.13 Firmware upgrade Over AT (FOAT) This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over USB / UART serial interfaces, using AT commands. The +UFWUPD AT command triggers a reboot followed by the upgrade procedure at specified a baud rate A special boot loader on the module performs firmware installation, security verifications and module reboot Firmware authenticity verification is performed via a security signature during the download. The firmware is then installed, overwriting the current version. In case of power loss during this phase, the boot loader detects a fault at the next wake-up, and restarts the firmware download. After completing the upgrade, the module is reset again and wakes-up in normal boot For more details about Firmware update Over AT procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note [23] and the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UFWUPD AT command. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 62 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 1.14.14 Firmware update Over The Air (FOTA) This feature allows upgrading the module firmware over the LTE/3G/2G air interface. In order to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted over the air, the implemented FOTA feature requires downloading only a delta file instead of the full firmware. The delta file contains only the differences between the two firmware versions (old and new), and is compressed. The firmware update procedure can be triggered using dedicated AT command with the delta file stored in the module file system via over the air FTP. For more details about Firmware update Over The Air procedure see the Firmware Update Application Note [23]
and the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UFWINSTALL AT command. 1.14.15 Smart temperature management Cellular modules independently from the specific model always have a well-defined operating temperature range. This range should be respected to guarantee full device functionality and long life span. Nevertheless there are environmental conditions that can affect operating temperature, e.g. if the device is located near a heating/cooling source, if there is/is not air circulating, etc. The module itself can also influence the environmental conditions; such as when it is transmitting at full power. In this case its temperature increases very quickly and can raise the temperature nearby. The best solution is always to properly design the system where the module is integrated. Nevertheless an extra check/security mechanism embedded into the module is a good solution to prevent operation of the device outside of the specified range. Smart Temperature Supervisor (STS) The Smart Temperature Supervisor is activated and configured by a dedicated AT+USTS command. See u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for more details. An URC indication is provided once the feature is enabled and at the module power on. The cellular module measures the internal temperature (Ti) and its value is compared with predefined thresholds to identify the actual working temperature range. Temperature measurement is done inside the module: the measured value could be different from the environmental temperature (Ta). Figure 25: Temperature range and limits The entire temperature range is divided into sub-regions by limits (see Figure 25) named t-2, t-1, t+1 and t+2. Within the first limit, (t-1 < Ti < t+1), the cellular module is in the normal working range, the Safe Area In the Warning Area, (t-2 < Ti < t.1) or (t+1 < Ti < t+2), the cellular module is still inside the valid temperature range, but the measured temperature is approaching the limit (upper or lower). The module sends a warning to the user (through the active AT communication interface), which can take, if possible, the necessary actions to return to a safer temperature range or simply ignore the indication. The module is still in a valid and good working condition UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 63 of 155 Warningareat-1t+1t+2t-2Valid temperature rangeSafeareaDangerousarea Dangerousarea Warningarea LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Outside the valid temperature range, (Ti < t-2) or (Ti > t+2), the device is working outside the specified range and represents a dangerous working condition. This condition is indicated and the device shuts down to avoid damage For security reasons the shutdown is suspended in case an emergency call is in progress. In this case the device switches off at call termination. The user can decide at anytime to enable/disable the Smart Temperature Supervisor feature. If the feature is disabled there is no embedded protection against disallowed temperature conditions. Figure 26 shows the flow diagram implemented for the Smart Temperature Supervisor. Figure 26: Smart Temperature Supervisor (STS) flow diagram UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 64 of 155 IF STS enabledRead temperatureIF(t-1<Ti<t+1)IF(t-2<Ti<t+2)Send notification (warning)Send notification(dangerous)WaitemergencycallterminationIFemerg. call in progressShut the device downYesNoYesYesNoNoNoYesSend shutdownnotificationFeature enabled (full logic or indication only)IF Full Logic EnabledFeature disabled: no actionTemperature is within normal operating rangeYesTempetature is within warning areaTempetature is outside valid temperature rangeNoFeature enabled in full logic modeFeature enabled in indication only mode:no further actionsSend notification (safe)Previously outside of Safe AreaTempetature is back to safe areaNoNo furtheractionsYes LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Threshold definitions When the application of cellular module operates at extreme temperatures with Smart Temperature Supervisor enabled, the user should note that outside the valid temperature range the device will automatically shut down as described above. The input for the algorithm is always the temperature measured within the cellular module (Ti, internal). This value can be higher than the working ambient temperature (Ta, ambient), since (for example) during transmission at maximum power a significant fraction of DC input power is dissipated as heat. This behavior is partially compensated by the definition of the upper shutdown threshold (t +2) that is slightly higher than the declared environmental temperature limit. The temperature thresholds are defined according the Table 19. Symbol Parameter t-2 t-1 t+1 t+2 Low temperature shutdown Low temperature warning High temperature warning High temperature shutdown Temperature 40 C 30 C
+77 C
+97 C Table 19: Thresholds definition for Smart Temperature Supervisor The sensor measures board temperature inside the shields, which can differ from ambient temperature. 1.14.16 Power Saving The power saving configuration is by default disabled, but it can be enabled using the AT+UPSV command (for the complete description of the AT+UPSV command, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). When power saving is enabled, the module automatically enters the low power idle-mode whenever possible, reducing current consumption (see section 1.5.1.5, LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). During the low power idle-mode, the module is temporarily not ready to communicate with an external device, as it is configured to reduce power consumption. The module wakes up from low power idle-mode to active-
mode in the following events:
Automatic periodic monitoring of the paging channel for the paging block reception according to network conditions (see 1.5.1.5, 1.9.1.4) Automatic periodic enable of the UART interface to receive / send data, with AT+UPSV=1 (see 1.9.1.4) RTS input set ON by the host DTE, with HW flow control disabled and AT+UPSV=2 (see 1.9.1.4) DTR input set ON by the host DTE, with AT+UPSV=3 (see 1.9.1.4) USB detection, applying 5 V (typ.) to VUSB_DET input (see 1.9.2) The connected USB host forces a remote wakeup of the module as USB device (see 1.9.2.4) The connected u-blox GNSS receiver forces a wakeup of the cellular module using the GNSS Tx data ready function over GPIO3 (see 1.9.4) The connected SDIO device forces a wakeup of the module as SDIO host (see 1.9.5) A preset RTC alarm occurs (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], AT+CALA) For the definition and the description of LARA-R2 series modules operating modes, including the events forcing transitions between the different operating modes, see the section 1.4. UBX-16010573 - R10 System description Page 65 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2 Design-in 2.1 Overview For an optimal integration of LARA-R2 series modules in the final application board follow the design guidelines stated in this section. Every application circuit must be properly designed to guarantee the correct functionality of the related interface, however a number of points require higher attention during the design of the application device. The following list provides a ranking of importance in the application design, starting from the highest relevance:
1. Module antenna connection: ANT1, ANT2 and ANT_DET pins. Antenna circuit directly affects the RF compliance of the device integrating a LARA-R2 series module with the applicable certification schemes. Very carefully follow the suggestions provided in section 2.4 for schematic and layout design. 2. Module supply: VCC and GND pins. The supply circuit affects the RF compliance of the device integrating a LARA-R2 series module with applicable certification schemes as well as antenna circuit design. Very carefully follow the suggestions provided in section 2.2.1 for schematic and layout design. 3. USB interface: USB_D+, USB_D- and VUSB_DET pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee USB 2.0 high-speed interface functionality. Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the related section 2.6.1 for schematic and layout design. 4. SIM interface: VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST, SIM_DET pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee SIM card functionality and compliance with applicable conformance standards, reducing also the risk of RF coupling. Carefully follow the suggestions provided in section 2.5 for schematic and layout design. 5. HSIC interface: HSIC_DATA, HSIC_STRB pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee HSIC interface functionality. Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2.6.3 for schematic and layout design. 6. SDIO interface: SDIO_D0, SDIO_D1, SDIO_D2, SDIO_D3, SDIO_CLK, SDIO_CMD pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee SDIO interface functionality. Carefully follow the suggestions provided in the relative section 2.6.5 for schematic and layout design. 7. System functions: RESET_N, PWR_ON pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee that the voltage level is well defined during operation. Carefully follow the suggestions provided in section 2.3 for schematic and layout design. 8. Other digital interfaces: UART, I2C, I2S, Host Select, GPIOs, and Reserved pins. Accurate design is required to guarantee proper functionality and reduce the risk of digital data frequency harmonics coupling. Follow the suggestions provided in sections 2.6.1, 2.6.4, 2.7.1, 2.3.3, 2.8 and 2.9 for schematic and layout design. 9. Other supplies: the V_BCKP RTC supply input/output and the V_INT digital interfaces supply output. Accurate design is required to guarantee proper functionality. Follow the suggestions provided in sections 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 for schematic and layout design. It is recommended to follow the specific design guidelines provided by each manufacturer of any external part selected for the application board integrating the u-blox cellular modules. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 66 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2 Supply interfaces 2.2.1 Module supply (VCC) 2.2.1.1 General guidelines for VCC supply circuit selection and design All the available VCC pins have to be connected to the external supply minimizing the power loss due to series resistance. GND pins are internally connected but connect all the available pins to solid ground on the application board, since a good (low impedance) connection to external ground can minimize power loss and improve RF and thermal performance. LARA-R2 series modules must be supplied through the VCC pins by a proper DC power supply that should comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6. The proper DC power supply can be selected according to the application requirements (see Figure 27) between the different possible supply sources types, which most common ones are the following:
Switching regulator Low Drop-Out (LDO) linear regulator Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-Ion) or Lithium-ion polymer (Li-Pol) battery Primary (disposable) battery Figure 27: VCC supply concept selection The DC/DC switching step-down regulator is the typical choice when the available primary supply source has a nominal voltage much higher (e.g. greater than 5 V) than the modules VCC operating supply voltage. The use of switching step-down provides the best power efficiency for the overall application and minimizes current drawn from the main supply source. See sections 2.2.1.2 and 2.2.1.6, 0, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in. The use of an LDO linear regulator becomes convenient for a primary supply with a relatively low voltage (e.g. less than 5 V). In this case the typical 90% efficiency of the switching regulator diminishes the benefit of voltage step-down and no true advantage is gained in input current savings. On the opposite side, linear regulators are not recommended for high voltage step-down as they dissipate a considerable amount of energy in thermal power. See sections 2.2.1.3 and 2.2.1.6, 0, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in. If LARA-R2 series modules are deployed in a mobile unit where no permanent primary supply source is available, then a battery will be required to provide VCC. A standard 3-cell Li-Ion or Li-Pol battery pack directly connected to VCC is the usual choice for battery-powered devices. During charging, batteries with Ni-MH chemistry typically reach a maximum voltage that is above the maximum rating for VCC, and should therefore be avoided. See sections 2.2.1.4, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.7, 0, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in. Keep in mind that the use of rechargeable batteries requires the implementation of a suitable charger circuit which is not included in the modules. The charger circuit has to be designed to prevent over-voltage on VCC pins, and it should be selected according to the application requirements: a DC/DC switching charger is the typical choice when the charging source has an high nominal voltage (e.g. ~12 V), whereas a linear charger is UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 67 of 155 Main Supply Available?BatteryLi-Ion 3.7 VLinear LDO RegulatorMain Supply Voltage > 5V?Switching Step-Down RegulatorNo, portable deviceNo, less than 5 VYes, greater than 5 VYes, always available LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual the typical choice when the charging source has a relatively low nominal voltage (~5 V). If both a permanent primary supply / charging source (e.g. ~12 V) and a rechargeable back-up battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) are available at the same time as possible supply source, then a proper charger / regulator with integrated power path management function can be selected to supply the module while simultaneously and independently charging the battery. See sections 2.2.1.8, 2.2.1.9, and 2.2.1.4, 2.2.1.6, 2.2.1.7, 0, 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in. An appropriate primary (not rechargeable) battery can be selected taking into account the maximum current specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] during connected-mode, considering that primary cells might have weak power capability. See sections 2.2.1.5, 2.2.1.6, 0, and 2.2.1.12 for specific design-in. The usage of more than one DC supply at the same time should be carefully evaluated: depending on the supply source characteristics, different DC supply systems can result as mutually exclusive. The usage of a regulator or a battery not able to support the highest peak of VCC current consumption specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] is generally not recommended. However, if the selected regulator or battery is not able to support the highest peak current of the module, it must be able to support with adequate margin at least the highest averaged current consumption value specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The additional energy required by the module during a 2G Tx slot can be provided by an appropriate bypass tank capacitor or super-capacitor with very large capacitance and very low ESR placed close to the module VCC pins. Depending on the actual capability of the selected regulator or battery, the required capacitance can be considerably larger than 1 mF and the required ESR can be in the range of few tens of m. Carefully evaluate the super-capacitor characteristics since aging and temperature may affect the actual characteristics. The following sections highlight some design aspects for each of the supplies listed above providing application circuit design-in compliant with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6. 2.2.1.2 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a switching regulator The use of a switching regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail to the VCC value is high: switching regulators provide good efficiency transforming a 12 V or greater voltage supply to the typical 3.8 V value of the VCC supply. The characteristics of the switching regulator connected to VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:
Power capability: the switching regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage value to the VCC pins within the specified operating range and must be capable of delivering to VCC pins the specified maximum peak / pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]
Low output ripple: the switching regulator together with its output circuit must be capable of providing a clean (low noise) VCC voltage profile. High switching frequency: for best performance and for smaller applications it is recommended to select a switching frequency 600 kHz (since L-C output filter is typically smaller for high switching frequency). The use of a switching regulator with a variable switching frequency or with a switching frequency lower than 600 kHz must be carefully evaluated since this can produce noise in the VCC voltage profile and therefore negatively impact modulation spectrum performance. PWM mode operation: it is preferable to select regulators with Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode. While in connected-mode, the Pulse Frequency Modulation (PFM) mode and PFM/PWM modes transitions must be avoided to reduce noise on VCC voltage profile. Switching regulators can be used that are able to switch between low ripple PWM mode and high ripple PFM mode, provided that the mode transition occurs when the module changes status from the idle/active-modes to connected-mode. It is permissible to use a regulator that switches from the PWM mode to the burst or PFM mode at an appropriate current threshold. Output voltage slope: the use of the soft start function provided by some voltage regulators should be carefully evaluated, as the VCC voltage must ramp from 2.3 V to 2.8 V in less than 4 ms to switch on the module by applying VCC supply. The module can be otherwise switched on by forcing a low level on the RESET_N pin during the VCC rising edge and then releasing the RESET_N pin when the VCC supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal value. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 68 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 28 and the components listed in Table 20 show an example of a high reliability power supply circuit, where the module VCC is supplied by a step-down switching regulator capable of delivering to VCC pins the specified maximum peak / pulse current, with low output ripple and with fixed switching frequency in PWM mode operation greater than 1 MHz. Figure 28: Example of high reliability VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D1 L1 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 U1 10 F Capacitor Ceramic X7R 5750 15% 50 V C5750X7R1H106MB - TDK 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 680 pF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71H681KA01 - Murata 22 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1H220JZ01 - Murata 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 470 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V GRM188R71E474KA12 - Murata 22 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET Schottky Diode 40 V 3 A MBRA340T3G - ON Semiconductor 10 H Inductor 744066100 30% 3.6 A 744066100 - Wurth Electronics 470 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 15 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 22 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 390 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W 100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 2322-705-87474-L - Yageo 2322-705-87153-L - Yageo 2322-705-87223-L - Yageo RC0402FR-07390KL - Yageo 2322-705-70104-L - Yageo Step-Down Regulator MSOP10 3.5 A 2.4 MHz LT3972IMSE#PBF - Linear Technology Table 20: Components for high reliability VCC supply application circuit circuit using a step-down regulator UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 69 of 155 LARA-R2 series12VC5R3C4R2C2C1R1VINRUNVCRTPGSYNCBDBOOSTSWFBGND671095C61238114C7C8D1R4R5L1C3U152VCC53VCC51VCCGND LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 29 and the components listed in Table 21 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit, where the VCC module supply is provided by a step-down switching regulator capable of delivering to VCC pins the specified maximum peak / pulse current, transforming a 12 V supply input. Figure 29: Example of low cost VCC supply application circuit using step-down regulator Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 D1 L1 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 U1 22 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 Murata 100 F Capacitor Tantalum B_SIZE 20% 6.3V 15m T520B107M006ATE015 Kemet 5.6 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V GRM155R71H562KA88 Murata 6.8 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V GRM155R71H682KA88 Murata 56 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H560JA01 Murata 220 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V GRM188R71E224KA88 Murata Schottky Diode 25V 2 A STPS2L25 STMicroelectronics 5.2 H Inductor 30% 5.28A 22 m 4.7 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W 910 Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W 82 Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W 8.2 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W 39 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W MSS1038-522NL Coilcraft RC0402FR-074K7L Yageo RC0402FR-07910RL Yageo RC0402JR-0782RL Yageo RC0402JR-078K2L Yageo RC0402JR-0739KL Yageo Step-Down Regulator 8-VFQFPN 3 A 1 MHz L5987TR ST Microelectronics Table 21: Components for low cost VCC supply application circuit using a step-down regulator UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 70 of 155 LARA-R2 series12VR5C6C1VCCINHFSWSYNCOUTGND263178C3C2D1R1R2L1U1GNDFBCOMP54R3C4R4C552VCC53VCC51VCC LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.3 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a Low Drop-Out (LDO) linear regulator The use of a linear regulator is suggested when the difference from the available supply rail and the VCC value is low: linear regulators provide high efficiency when transforming a 5 V supply to a voltage value within the module VCC normal operating range. The characteristics of the LDO linear regulator connected to the VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:
Power capabilities: the LDO linear regulator with its output circuit must be capable of providing a voltage value to the VCC pins within the specified operating range and must be capable of delivering to VCC pins the maximum peak / pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. Power dissipation: the power handling capability of the LDO linear regulator must be checked to limit its junction temperature to the maximum rated operating range (i.e. check the voltage drop from the max input voltage to the min output voltage to evaluate the power dissipation of the regulator). Output voltage slope: the use of the soft start function provided by some voltage regulators should be carefully evaluated, as the VCC voltage must ramp from 2.3 V to 2.8 V in less than 4 ms to switch on the module by applying VCC supply. The module can be otherwise switched on by forcing a low level on the RESET_N pin during the VCC rising edge and then releasing the RESET_N pin when the VCC supply voltage stabilizes at its proper nominal value. Figure 30 and the components listed in Table 22 show an example of a high reliability power supply circuit, where the VCC module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the specified highest peak / pulse current, with proper power handling capability. The regulator described in this example supports a wide input voltage range, and it includes internal circuitry for reverse battery protection, current limiting, thermal limiting and reverse current protection. It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value slightly below the maximum limit of the module VCC normal operating range (e.g. ~4.1 V as in the circuit described in Figure 30 and Table 22). This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the whole thermal design of the supply circuit. Figure 30: Example of high reliability VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2 10 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata R1 R2 U1 9.1 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 3.9 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3.0 A RC0402JR-079K1L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-073K9L - Yageo Phycomp LT1764AEQ#PBF - Linear Technology Table 22: Components for high reliability VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 71 of 155 5VC1INOUTADJGND12453C2R1R2U1SHDNLARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCCGND LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 31 and the components listed in Table 23 show an example of a low cost power supply circuit, where the VCC module supply is provided by an LDO linear regulator capable of delivering the specified highest peak /
pulse current, with proper power handling capability. The regulator described in this example supports a limited input voltage range and it includes internal circuitry for current and thermal protection. It is recommended to configure the LDO linear regulator to generate a voltage supply value slightly below the maximum limit of the module VCC normal operating range (e.g. ~4.1 V as in the circuit described in Figure 31 and Table 23). This reduces the power on the linear regulator and improves the whole thermal design of the supply circuit. Figure 31: Example of low cost VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2 10 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata R1 R2 U1 27 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W LDO Linear Regulator ADJ 3.0 A RC0402JR-0727KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp LP38501ATJ-ADJ/NOPB - Texas Instrument Table 23: Components for low cost VCC supply application circuit using an LDO linear regulator UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 72 of 155 5VC1INOUTADJGND12453C2R1R2U1ENLARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCCGND LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.4 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a rechargeable Li-Ion or Li-Pol battery Rechargeable Li-Ion or Li-Pol batteries connected to the VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:
Maximum pulse and DC discharge current: the rechargeable Li-Ion battery with its related output circuit connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak / pulse current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and must be capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The maximum discharge current is not always reported in the data sheets of batteries, but the maximum DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery capacity in Amp-hours divided by 1 hour. DC series resistance: the rechargeable Li-Ion battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 6 during transmit bursts. 2.2.1.5 Guidelines for VCC supply circuit design using a primary (disposable) battery The characteristics of a primary (non-rechargeable) battery connected to VCC pins should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:
Maximum pulse and DC discharge current: the non-rechargeable battery with its related output circuit connected to the VCC pins must be capable of delivering a pulse current as the maximum peak current consumption during Tx burst at maximum Tx power specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and must be capable of extensively delivering a DC current as the maximum average current consumption specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The maximum discharge current is not always reported in the data sheets of batteries, but the max DC discharge current is typically almost equal to the battery capacity in Amp-hours divided by 1 hour. DC series resistance: the non-rechargeable battery with its output circuit must be capable of avoiding a VCC voltage drop below the operating range summarized in Table 6 during transmit bursts. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 73 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.6 Additional guidelines for VCC supply circuit design To reduce voltage drops, use a low impedance power source. The series resistance of the power supply lines
(connected to the VCC and GND pins of the module) on the application board and battery pack should also be considered and minimized: cabling and routing must be as short as possible to minimize power losses. Three pins are allocated for VCC supply. Several pins are designated for GND connection. It is recommended to properly connect all of them to supply the module to minimize series resistance losses. In case of modules supporting 2G radio access technology, to avoid voltage drop undershoot and overshoot at the start and end of a transmit burst during a GSM call (when current consumption on the VCC supply can rise up as specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]), place a bypass capacitor with large capacitance (at least 100 F) and low ESR near the VCC pins, for example:
330 F capacitance, 45 m ESR (e.g. KEMET T520D337M006ATE045, Tantalum Capacitor) To reduce voltage ripple and noise, improving RF performance especially if the application device integrates an internal antenna, place the following bypass capacitors near the VCC pins:
68 pF capacitor with Self-Resonant Frequency in 800/900 MHz range (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1E560J) 15 pF capacitor with Self-Resonant Frequency in 1800/1900 MHz range (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1E150J) 8.2 pF capacitor with Self-Resonant Frequency in 2500/2600 MHz range (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H8R2D) 10 nF capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C103K) to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources 100 nF capacitor (e.g Murata GRM155R61C104K) to filter digital logic noise from clocks and data sources A suitable series ferrite bead can be properly placed on the VCC line for additional noise filtering if required by the specific application according to the whole application board design. Figure 32: Suggested schematic for the VCC bypass capacitors to reduce ripple / noise on supply voltage profile Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 8.2 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 - Murata 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H150JA01 - Murata 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET Table 24: Suggested components to reduce ripple / noise on VCC The necessity of each part depends on the specific design, but it is recommended to provide all the bypass capacitors described in Figure 32 / Table 24 if the application device integrates an internal antenna. ESD sensitivity rating of the VCC supply pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if accessible battery connector is directly connected to VCC pins. Higher protection level can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible point. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 74 of 155 C2GNDC3C4LARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCCC1C63V8+Recommended for cellular modules supporting 2GC5Recommended for cellular modules supporting LTE band-7 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.7 Additional guidelines for VCC supply circuit design of LARA-R211 modules LARA-R211 modules provide separate supply inputs over the VCC pins (see Figure 3):
VCC pins #52 and #53 represent the supply input for the internal RF power amplifier, demanding most of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call VCC pin #51 represents the supply input for the internal baseband Power Management Unit and the internal transceiver, demanding minor part of the total current drawn of the module when RF transmission is enabled during a voice/data call LARA-R211 modules support two different extended operating voltage ranges: one for the VCC pins #52 and
#53, and another one for the VCC pin #51 (see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). All the VCC pins are in general intended to be connected to the same external power supply circuit, but separate supply sources can be implemented for specific (e.g. battery-powered) applications considering that the voltage at the VCC pins #52 and #53 can drop to a value lower than the one at the VCC pin #51, keeping the module still switched-on and functional. Figure 33 describes a possible application circuit. Figure 33: VCC circuit example with separate supply for LARA-R211 modules Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 D1 L1 R1 R2 U1 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata 8.2 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 - Murata 10 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 - Murata 22 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata 10 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E100JA01 - Murata Schottky Diode 40 V 1 A 10 H Inductor 20% 1 A 276 m 1 M Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W 412 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.063 W SS14 - Vishay General Semiconductor SRN3015-100M - Bourns Inc. RC0402FR-071ML - Yageo Phycomp RC0402FR-07412KL - Yageo Phycomp Step-up Regulator 350 mA AP3015 - Diodes Incorporated Table 25: Example of components for VCC circuit with separate supply for LARA-R211 modules UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 75 of 155 C1C4GNDC3C2C6LARA-R21152VCC53VCC51VCC+Li-Ion/Li-Pol BatteryC7SWVINSHDNnGNDFBC8R1R2L1U1Step-up RegulatorD1C9C5 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.8 Guidelines for external battery charging circuit LARA-R2 series modules do not have an on-board charging circuit. Figure 34 provides an example of a battery charger design, suitable for applications that are battery powered with a Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) cell. In the application circuit, a rechargeable Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery cell, that features proper pulse and DC discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance, is directly connected to the VCC supply input of the module. Battery charging is completely managed by the STMicroelectronics L6924U Battery Charger IC that, from a USB power source (5.0 V typ.), charges as a linear charger the battery, in three phases:
Pre-charge constant current (active when the battery is deeply discharged): the battery is charged with a low current, set to 10% of the fast-charge current Fast-charge constant current: the battery is charged with the maximum current, configured by the value of an external resistor to a value suitable for USB power source (~500 mA) Constant voltage: when the battery voltage reaches the regulated output voltage (4.2 V), the L6924U starts to reduce the current until the charge termination is done. The charging process ends when the charging current reaches the value configured by an external resistor to ~15 mA or when the charging timer reaches the value configured by an external capacitor to ~9800 s Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor, the L6924U can monitor the battery temperature to protect the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions. The L6924U, as linear charger, is more suitable for applications where the charging source has a relatively low nominal voltage (~5 V), so that a switching charger is suggested for applications where the charging source has a relatively high nominal voltage (e.g. ~12 V, see the following section 2.2.1.9 for specific design-in). Figure 34: Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging application circuit Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer B1 C1, C4 C2, C6 C3 C5 C7 C8 C9 C10 D1, D2 R1, R2 R3 R4 U1 Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery pack with 470 NTC Various manufacturer 1 F Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 16 V GRM188R71C105KA12 - Murata 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 1 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 50 V GRM155R71H102KA01 - Murata 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata 8.2 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 - Murata Low Capacitance ESD Protection 24 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 3.3 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 1.0 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W Single Cell Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) Battery Charger IC for USB port and AC Adapter CG0402MLE-18G - Bourns RC0402JR-0724KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-073K3L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-071K0L - Yageo Phycomp L6924U - STMicroelectronics Table 26: Suggested components for Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging application circuit UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 76 of 155 C5C8GNDC7C6C9LARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCC+USB SupplyC3R4U1IUSBIACIENDTPRGSDVINVINSNSMODEISELC2C15VTHGNDVOUTVOSNSVREFR1R2R3Li-Ion/Li-Pol Battery PackD1B1C4Li-Ion/Li-Polymer Battery Charger ICD2C10 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.9 Guidelines for external battery charging and power path management circuit Application devices where both a permanent primary supply / charging source (e.g. ~12 V) and a rechargeable back-up battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) are available at the same time as possible supply source should implement a suitable charger / regulator with integrated power path management function to supply the module and the whole device while simultaneously and independently charging the battery. Figure 35 reports a simplified block diagram circuit showing the working principle of a charger / regulator with integrated power path management function. This component allows the system to be powered by a permanent primary supply source (e.g. ~12 V) using the integrated regulator which simultaneously and independently recharges the battery (e.g. 3.7 V Li-Pol) that represents the back-up supply source of the system: the power path management feature permits the battery to supplement the system current requirements when the primary supply source is not available or cannot deliver the peak system currents. A power management IC should meet the following prerequisites to comply with the module VCC requirements summarized in Table 6:
High efficiency internal step down converter, compliant with the performances specified in section 2.2.1.2 Low internal resistance in the active path Vout Vbat, typically lower than 50 m High efficiency switch mode charger with separate power path control Figure 35: Charger / regulator with integrated power path management circuit block diagram Figure 36 and the components listed in Table 27 provide an application circuit example where the MPS MP2617 switching charger / regulator with integrated power path management function provides the supply to the cellular module while concurrently and autonomously charging a suitable Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery with proper pulse and DC discharge current capabilities and proper DC series resistance according to the rechargeable battery recommendations described in section 2.2.1.4. The MP2617 IC constantly monitors the battery voltage and selects whether to use the external main primary supply / charging source or the battery as supply source for the module, and starts a charging phase accordingly. The MP2617 IC normally provides a supply voltage to the module regulated from the external main primary source allowing immediate system operation even under missing or deeply discharged battery: the integrated switching step-down regulator is capable to provide up to 3 A output current with low output ripple and fixed 1.6 MHz switching frequency in PWM mode operation. The module load is satisfied in priority, then the integrated switching charger will take the remaining current to charge the battery. Additionally, the power path control allows an internal connection from battery to the module with a low series internal ON resistance (40 m typical), in order to supplement additional power to the module when the current demand increases over the external main primary source or when this external source is removed. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 77 of 155 GNDPower path management ICVoutVinLi-Ion/Li-Pol Battery PackGNDSystem12 V Primary SourceCharge controllerDC/DC converter and battery FET control logicVbat LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Battery charging is managed in three phases:
Pre-charge constant current (active when the battery is deeply discharged): the battery is charged with a low current, set to 10% of the fast-charge current Fast-charge constant current: the battery is charged with the maximum current, configured by the value of an external resistor to a value suitable for the application Constant voltage: when the battery voltage reaches the regulated output voltage (4.2 V), the current is progressively reduced until the charge termination is done. The charging process ends when the charging current reaches the 10% of the fast-charge current or when the charging timer reaches the value configured by an external capacitor Using a battery pack with an internal NTC resistor, the MP2617 can monitor the battery temperature to protect the battery from operating under unsafe thermal conditions. Several parameters as the charging current, the charging timings, the input current limit, the input voltage limit, the system output voltage can be easily set according to the specific application requirements, as the actual electrical characteristics of the battery and the external supply / charging source: proper resistors or capacitors have to be accordingly connected to the related pins of the IC. Figure 36: Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging and power path management application circuit Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer B1 C1, C5, C6 C2, C4, C11 C3 C7, C13 C8, C14 C9, C15 C10 C12 D1, D2 R1, R3, R5 R2 R4 L1 U1 Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery pack with 10 k NTC Various manufacturer 22 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 1210 10% 25 V GRM32ER61E226KE15 - Murata 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata 1 F Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0603 10% 25 V GRM188R71E105KA12 - Murata 68 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H680JA01 - Murata 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata 8.2 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 - Murata 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata Low Capacitance ESD Protection 10 k Resistor 0402 5% 1/16 W 1.0 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 22 k Resistor 0402 5% 1/16 W 1.2 H Inductor 6 A 21 m 20%
CG0402MLE-18G - Bourns RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-071K0L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0722KL - Yageo Phycomp 7447745012 - Wurth Li-Ion/Li-Polymer Battery DC/DC Charger / Regulator with integrated Power Path Management function MP2617 - Monolithic Power Systems (MPS) Table 27: Suggested components for Li-Ion (or Li-Polymer) battery charging and power path management application circuit UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 78 of 155 C12GNDC11C10C13LARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCC+Primary SourceR3U1ENILIMISETTMRAGNDVINC2C112VNTCPGNDSWSYSBATC4R1R2D1Li-Ion/Li-Pol Battery PackB1C5Li-Ion/Li-Polymer Battery Charger / Regulator with Power Path ManagmentVCCC3C6L1BSTD2VLIMR4R5C7C8C9C14C15 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.10 Guidelines for removing VCC supply As described in section 1.6.2 and Figure 15, the VCC supply can be removed after the end of LARA-R2 series modules internal power-off sequence, which has to be properly started sending the AT+CPWROFF command
(see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]). Removing the VCC power can be useful in order to minimize the current consumption when the LARA-R2 series modules are switched off. Then, the modules can be switched on again by re-applying the VCC supply. If the VCC supply is generated by a switching or an LDO regulator, the application processor may control the input pin of the regulator which is provided to enable / disable the output of the regulator (as for example the RUN input pin for the regulator described in Figure 28, the INH input pin for the regulator described in Figure 29, the SHDNn input pin for the regulator described in Figure 30, the EN input pin for the regulator described in Figure 31), in order to apply / remove the VCC supply. If the regulator that generates the VCC supply does not provide an on / off pin, or for other applications such as the battery-powered ones, the VCC supply can be switched off using an appropriate external p-channel MOSFET controlled by the application processor by means of a proper inverting transistor as shown in Figure 37, given that the external p-channel MOSFET has provide:
Very low RDS(ON) (for example, less than 50 m), to minimize voltage drops Adequate maximum Drain current (see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] for module consumption figures) Low leakage current, to minimize the current consumption Figure 37: Example of application circuit for VCC supply removal Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer R1 R2 R3 T1 T2 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-07100KL - Yageo Phycomp P-Channel MOSFET Low On-Resistance AO3415 - Alpha & Omega Semiconductor Inc. NPN BJT Transistor BC847 - Infineon 330 F Capacitor Tantalum D_SIZE 6.3 V 45 m T520D337M006ATE045 - KEMET 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C103KA01 - Murata 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata 56 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E560JA01 - Murata 15 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1E150JA01 - Murata 8.2 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H8R2DZ01 - Murata Table 28: Components for VCC supply removal application circuit It is highly recommended to avoid an abrupt removal of the VCC supply during LARA-R2 series modules normal operations: the power off procedure must be started by the AT+CPWROFF command, waiting the command response for a proper time period (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and then a proper VCC supply has to be held at least until the end of the modules internal power off sequence, which occurs when the generic digital interfaces supply output (V_INT) is switched off by the module. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 79 of 155 C3GNDC2C1C4LARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCC+VCC Supply SourceGNDGPIOC5C6R1R3R2T2T1Application Processor LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.1.11 Guidelines for VCC supply layout design Good connection of the module VCC pins with DC supply source is required for correct RF performance. Guidelines are summarized in the following list:
All the available VCC pins must be connected to the DC source. VCC connection must be as wide as possible and as short as possible. Any series component with Equivalent Series Resistance (ESR) greater than few milliohms must be avoided. VCC connection must be routed through a PCB area separated from sensitive analog signals and sensitive functional units: it is good practice to interpose at least one layer of PCB ground between VCC track and other signal routing. Coupling between VCC and audio lines (especially microphone inputs) must be avoided, because the typical GSM burst has a periodic nature of approx. 217 Hz, which lies in the audible audio range. The tank bypass capacitor with low ESR for current spikes smoothing described in section 2.2.1.6 should be placed close to the VCC pins. If the main DC source is a switching DC-DC converter, place the large capacitor close to the DC-DC output and minimize the VCC track length. Otherwise consider using separate capacitors for DC-DC converter and cellular module tank capacitor. The bypass capacitors in the pF range described in section 2.2.1.6 should be placed as close as possible to the VCC pins. This is highly recommended if the application device integrates an internal antenna. Since VCC is directly connected to RF Power Amplifiers, voltage ripple at high frequency may result in unwanted spurious modulation of transmitter RF signal. This is more likely to happen with switching DC-DC converters, in which case it is better to select the highest operating frequency for the switcher and add a large L-C filter before connecting to the LARA-R2 series modules in the worst case. Shielding of switching DC-DC converter circuit, or at least the use of shielded inductors for the switching DC-DC converter, may be considered since all switching power supplies may potentially generate interfering signals as a result of high-frequency high-power switching. If VCC is protected by transient voltage suppressor to ensure that the voltage maximum ratings are not exceeded, place the protecting device along the path from the DC source toward the cellular module, preferably closer to the DC source (otherwise protection functionality may be compromised). 2.2.1.12 Guidelines for grounding layout design Good connection of the module GND pins with application board solid ground layer is required for correct RF performance. It significantly reduces EMC issues and provides a thermal heat sink for the module. Connect each GND pin with application board solid GND layer. It is strongly recommended that each GND pin surrounding VCC pins have one or more dedicated via down to the application board solid ground layer. The VCC supply current flows back to main DC source through GND as ground current: provide adequate return path with suitable uninterrupted ground plane to main DC source. It is recommended to implement one layer of the application board as ground plane as wide as possible. If the application board is a multilayer PCB, then all the board layers should be filled with GND plane as much as possible and each GND area should be connected together with complete via stack down to the main ground layer of the board. Use as many vias as possible to connect the ground planes Provide a dense line of vias at the edges of each ground area, in particular along RF and high speed lines If the whole application device is composed by more than one PCB, then it is required to provide a good and solid ground connection between the GND areas of all the different PCBs. Good grounding of GND pins also ensures thermal heat sink. This is critical during call connection, when the real network commands the module to transmit at maximum power: proper grounding helps prevent module overheating. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 80 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.2 RTC supply (V_BCKP) 2.2.2.1 Guidelines for V_BCKP circuit design LARA-R2 series modules provide the V_BCKP RTC supply input/output, which can be mainly used to:
Provide RTC back-up when VCC supply is removed If RTC timing is required to run for a time interval of T [s] when VCC supply is removed, place a capacitor with a nominal capacitance of C [F] at the V_BCKP pin. Choose the capacitor using the following formula:
C [F] = (Current_Consumption [A] x T [s]) / Voltage_Drop [V]
= 2.5 x T [s]
For example, a 100 F capacitor can be placed at V_BCKP to provide RTC backup holding the V_BCKP voltage within its valid range for around 40 s at 25 C, after the VCC supply is removed. If a longer buffering time is required, a 70 mF super-capacitor can be placed at V_BCKP, with a 4.7 k series resistor to hold the V_BCKP voltage within its valid range for approximately 8 hours at 25 C, after the VCC supply is removed. The purpose of the series resistor is to limit the capacitor charging current due to the large capacitor specifications, and also to let a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V_BCKP pin after VCC supply has been provided. These capacitors allow the time reference to run during battery disconnection. Figure 38: Real time clock supply (V_BCKP) application circuits: (a) using a 100 F capacitor to let the RTC run for ~1 minute after VCC removal; (b) using a 70 mF capacitor to let RTC run for ~10 hours after VCC removal; (c) using a non-rechargeable battery Reference Description C1 R2 C2 100 F Tantalum Capacitor 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 70 mF Capacitor Table 29: Example of components for V_BCKP buffering Part Number - Manufacturer GRM43SR60J107M - Murata RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp XH414H-IV01E - Seiko Instruments If longer buffering time is required to allow the RTC time reference to run during a disconnection of the VCC supply, then an external battery can be connected to V_BCKP pin. The battery should be able to provide a proper nominal voltage and must never exceed the maximum operating voltage for V_BCKP (specified in the Input characteristics of Supply/Power pins table in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). The connection of the battery to V_BCKP should be done with a suitable series resistor for a rechargeable battery, or with an appropriate series diode for a non-rechargeable battery. The purpose of the series resistor is to limit the battery charging current due to the battery specifications, and also to allow a fast rise time of the voltage value at the V_BCKP pin after the VCC supply has been provided. The purpose of the series diode is to avoid a current flow from the module V_BCKP pin to the non-rechargeable battery. If the RTC timing is not required when the VCC supply is removed, it is not needed to connect the V_BCKP pin to an external capacitor or battery. In this case the date and time are not updated when VCC is disconnected. If VCC is always supplied, then the internal regulator is supplied from the main supply and there is no need for an external component on V_BCKP. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 81 of 155 LARA-R2 seriesC1(a)2V_BCKPR2LARA-R2 seriesC2(superCap)(b)2V_BCKPD3LARA-R2 seriesB3(c)2V_BCKP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Combining a LARA-R2 series cellular module with a u-blox GNSS positioning receiver, the positioning receiver VCC supply is controlled by the cellular module by means of the GNSS supply enable function provided by the GPIO2 of the cellular module. In this case the V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be connected to the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the positioning real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled. This enables the u-blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start (depending on the duration of the positioning VCC outage) and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM. Refer to section 2.6.4 for more details regarding the application circuit with a u-blox GNSS receiver. The internal regulator for V_BCKP is optimized for low leakage current and very light loads. Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_BCKP supply, as this can cause malfunctions in the module. LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] describes the detailed electrical characteristics. V_BCKP supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the device in short circuit situations. No additional external short circuit protection is required. ESD sensitivity rating of the V_BCKP supply pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if an accessible back-up battery connector is directly connected to V_BCKP pin, and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to the accessible point. 2.2.2.2 Guidelines for V_BCKP layout design RTC supply (V_BCKP) requires careful layout: avoid injecting noise on this voltage domain as it may affect the stability of the 32 kHz oscillator. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 82 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.2.3 Interface supply (V_INT) 2.2.3.1 Guidelines for V_INT circuit design LARA-R2 series provide the V_INT generic digital interfaces 1.8 V supply output, which can be mainly used to:
Indicate when the module is switched on (see sections 1.6.1, 1.6.2 for more details) Pull-up SIM detection signal (see section 2.5 for more details) Supply voltage translators to connect digital interfaces of the module to a 3.0 V device (see section 2.6.1) Pull-up DDC (I2C) interface signals (see section 2.6.4 for more details) Supply a 1.8 V u-blox 6 or subsequent GNSS receiver (see section 2.6.4 for more details) Supply an external device, as an external 1.8 V audio codec (see section 2.7.1 for more details) V_INT supply output pin provides internal short circuit protection to limit start-up current and protect the device in short circuit situations. No additional external short circuit protection is required. Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_INT supply (see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]) as this can cause malfunctions in internal circuitry. Since the V_INT supply is generated by an internal switching step-down regulator, the V_INT voltage ripple can range as specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]: it is not recommended to supply sensitive analog circuitry without adequate filtering for digital noise. V_INT can only be used as an output: do not connect any external supply source on V_INT. ESD sensitivity rating of the V_INT supply pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the line is externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to the accessible point. It is recommended to provide direct access to the V_INT pin on the application board by means of an accessible test point directly connected to the V_INT pin. 2.2.3.2 Guidelines for V_INT layout design V_INT supply output is generated by an integrated switching step-down converter, used internally to supply the generic digital interfaces. Because of this, it can be a source of noise: avoid coupling with sensitive signals. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 83 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.3 System functions interfaces 2.3.1 Module power-on (PWR_ON) 2.3.1.1 Guidelines for PWR_ON circuit design LARA-R2 series modules PWR_ON input is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor to the VCC module supply as described in Figure 39: an external pull-up resistor is not required and should not be provided. If connecting the PWR_ON input to a push button, the pin will be externally accessible on the application device. According to EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection should be provided close to the accessible point, as described in Figure 39 and Table 30. ESD sensitivity rating of the PWR_ON pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if an accessible push button is directly connected to PWR_ON pin. Higher protection level can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible point. An open drain or open collector output is suitable to drive the PWR_ON input from an application processor, as the pin is equipped with an internal active pull-up resistor to the V_BCKP supply, as described in Figure 39. A compatible push-pull output of an application processor can also be used. In any case, take care to set the proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module switch-on. Figure 39: PWR_ON application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor Reference Description Remarks ESD CT0402S14AHSG - EPCOS Varistor array for ESD protection Table 30: Example of pull-up resistor and ESD protection for the PWR_ON application circuit It is recommended to provide direct access to the PWR_ON pin on the application board by means of accessible testpoint directly connected to the PWR_ON pin. 2.3.1.2 Guidelines for PWR_ON layout design The power-on circuit (PWR_ON) requires careful layout since it is the sensitive input available to switch on the LARA-R2 series modules. It is required to ensure that the voltage level is well defined during operation and no transient noise is coupled on this line, otherwise the module might detect a spurious power-on request. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 84 of 155 LARA-R2 series2V_BCKP15PWR_ONPower-on push buttonESDOpen Drain OutputApplication ProcessorLARA-R2 series2V_BCKP15PWR_ONTPTP10 k10 k LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.3.2 Module reset (RESET_N) 2.3.2.1 Guidelines for RESET_N circuit design LARA-R2 series RESET_N is equipped with an internal pull-up to the V_BCKP supply as described in Figure 40. An external pull-up resistor is not required. If connecting the RESET_N input to a push button, the pin will be externally accessible on the application device. According to EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection device (e.g. the EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor) should be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin, as described in Figure 40 and Table 31. ESD sensitivity rating of the RESET_N pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level can be required if the line is externally accessible on the application board, e.g. if an accessible push button is directly connected to RESET_N pin. Higher protection level can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible point. An open drain output is suitable to drive the RESET_N input from an application processor as it is equipped with an internal pull-up to V_BCKP supply, as described in Figure 40. A compatible push-pull output of an application processor can also be used. In any case, take care to set the proper level in all the possible scenarios to avoid an inappropriate module reset, switch-on or switch-off. Figure 40: RESET_N application circuits using a push button and an open drain output of an application processor Reference Description Remarks ESD Varistor for ESD protection CT0402S14AHSG - EPCOS Table 31: Example of ESD protection component for the RESET_N application circuit If the external reset function is not required by the customer application, the RESET_N input pin can be left unconnected to external components, but it is recommended providing direct access on the application board by means of accessible testpoint directly connected to the RESET_N pin. 2.3.2.2 Guidelines for RESET_N layout design The reset circuit (RESET_N) requires careful layout due to the pin function: ensure that the voltage level is well defined during operation and no transient noise is coupled on this line, otherwise the module might detect a spurious reset request. It is recommended to keep the connection line to RESET_N as short as possible. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 85 of 155 LARA-R2 series2V_BCKP18RESET_NPower-on push buttonESDOpen Drain OutputApplication ProcessorLARA-R2 series2V_BCKP18RESET_NTPTP10 k10 k LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.3.3 Module / host configuration selection 2.3.3.1 Guidelines for HOST_SELECT circuit design The functionality of the HOST_SELECT pin is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. LARA-R2 series modules include one pin (HOST_SELECT) to select the module / host application processor configuration: the pin is available to select, enable, connect, disconnect and subsequently re-connect the HSIC
(USB High-Speed Inter-Chip) interface. LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] describes the detailed electrical characteristics of the HOST_SELECT pin. Further guidelines for HOST_SELECT pin circuit design will be described in detail in a successive release of the System Integration Manual. Do not apply voltage to HOST_SELECT pin before the switch-on of its supply source (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signal connected to the cellular module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on. ESD sensitivity rating of the HOST_SELECT pin is 1 kV (HBM as per JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points If the HOST_SELECT pin is not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board. 2.3.3.2 Guidelines for HOST_SELECT layout design The pin for the selection of the module / host application processor configuration (HOST_SELECT) is generally not critical for layout. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 86 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.4 Antenna interface LARA-R2 series modules provide two RF interfaces for connecting the external antennas:
The ANT1 pin represents the primary RF input/output for LTE/3G/2G RF signals transmission and reception. The ANT2 pin represents the secondary RF input for LTE/3G Rx diversity RF signals reception. Both the ANT1 and the ANT2 pins have a nominal characteristic impedance of 50 and must be connected to the related antenna through a 50 transmission line to allow proper transmission / reception of RF signals. Two antennas (one connected to ANT1 pin and one connected to ANT2 pin) must be used to support the LTE/3G Rx diversity radio technology. This is a required feature for LTE category 1 User Equipments (up to 10.2 Mb/s Down-Link data rate) according to 3GPP specifications. 2.4.1 Antenna RF interface (ANT1 / ANT2) 2.4.1.1 General guidelines for antenna selection and design The antenna is the most critical component to be evaluated. Designers must take care of the antennas from all perspective at the very start of the design phase when the physical dimensions of the application board are under analysis/decision, since the RF compliance of the device integrating LARA-R2 series modules with all the applicable required certification schemes depends on antennas radiating performance. Cellular antennas are typically available in the types of linear monopole or PCB antennas such as patches or ceramic SMT elements. External antennas (e.g. linear monopole) o External antennas basically do not imply physical restriction to the design of the PCB where the LARA-R2 series module is mounted. o The radiation performance mainly depends on the antennas. It is required to select antennas with optimal radiating performance in the operating bands. o RF cables should be carefully selected to have minimum insertion losses. Additional insertion loss will be introduced by low quality or long cable. Large insertion loss reduces both transmit and receive radiation performance. o A high quality 50 RF connector provides proper PCB-to-RF-cable transition. It is recommended to strictly follow the layout and cable termination guidelines provided by the connector manufacturer. o If antenna detection functionality is required, select an antenna assembly provided with a proper built-in diagnostic circuit with a resistor connected to ground: see guidelines in section 2.4.2. Integrated antennas (e.g. patch-like antennas):
o Internal integrated antennas imply physical restriction to the design of the PCB:
Integrated antenna excites RF currents on its counterpoise, typically the PCB ground plane of the device that becomes part of the antenna: its dimension defines the minimum frequency that can be radiated. Therefore, the ground plane can be reduced down to a minimum size that should be similar to the quarter of the wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated, given that the orientation of the ground plane relative to the antenna element must be considered. The isolation between the primary and the secondary antennas has to be as high as possible and the correlation between the 3D radiation patterns of the two antennas has to be as low as possible. In general, a separation of at least a quarter wavelength between the two antennas is required to achieve a good isolation and low pattern correlation. As numerical example, the physical restriction to the PCB design can be considered as following:
Frequency = 750 MHz Wavelength = 40 cm Minimum GND plane size = 10 cm UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 87 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual o Radiation performance depends on the whole PCB and antenna system design, including product mechanical design and usage. Antennas should be selected with optimal radiating performance in the operating bands according to the mechanical specifications of the PCB and the whole product. o o o It is recommended to select a pair of custom antennas designed by an antennas manufacturer if the required ground plane dimensions are very small (e.g. less than 6.5 cm long and 4 cm wide). The antenna design process should begin at the start of the whole product design process It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system, including PCB layout and matching circuitry Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions, antennas may require tuning to obtain the required performance for compliance with all the applicable required certification schemes. It is recommended to consult the antenna manufacturer for the design-in guidelines for antenna matching relative to the custom application In both of cases, selecting external or internal antennas, these recommendations should be observed:
Select antennas providing optimal return loss (or V.S.W.R.) figure over all the operating frequencies. Select antennas providing optimal efficiency figure over all the operating frequencies. Select antennas providing similar efficiency for both the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna. Select antennas providing appropriate gain figure (i.e. combined antenna directivity and efficiency figure) so that the electromagnetic field radiation intensity do not exceed the regulatory limits specified in some countries (e.g. by FCC in the United States, as reported in the section 4.2.2). Select antennas capable to provide low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna: the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions. 2.4.1.2 Guidelines for antenna RF interface design Guidelines for ANT1 / ANT2 pins RF connection design Proper transition between ANT1 / ANT2 pads and the application board PCB must be provided, implementing the following design-in guidelines for the layout of the application PCB close to the ANT1 / ANT2 pads:
On a multilayer board, the whole layer stack below the RF connection should be free of digital lines Increase GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) around the ANT1 / ANT2 pads, on the top layer of the application PCB, to at least 250 m up to adjacent pads metal definition and up to 400 m on the area below the module, to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground, as described in the left picture in Figure 41 Add GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on the buried metal layer below the ANT1 / ANT2 pads if the top-layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 m, to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground, as described in the right picture in Figure 41 Figure 41: GND keep-out area on top layer around ANT1 / ANT2 pads and on very close buried layer below ANT1 / ANT2 pads UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 88 of 155 Min. 250 mMin. 400 mGNDANT1GND clearance on very close buried layerbelow ANT1 padGND clearance on top layer around ANT1 padMin. 250 mMin. 400 mGNDANT2GND clearance on very close buried layerbelow ANT2 padGND clearance on top layer around ANT2 pad LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for RF transmission line design Any RF transmission line, such as the ones from the ANT1 and ANT2 pads up to the related antenna connector or up to the related internal antenna pad, must be designed so that the characteristic impedance is as close as possible to 50 . RF transmission lines can be designed as a micro strip (consists of a conducting strip separated from a ground plane by a dielectric material) or a strip line (consists of a flat strip of metal which is sandwiched between two parallel ground planes within a dielectric material). The micro strip, implemented as a coplanar waveguide, is the most common configuration for printed circuit board. Figure 42 and Figure 43 provide two examples of proper 50 coplanar waveguide designs. The first example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 4-layer PCB stack-up herein described, and the second example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 2-layer PCB stack-up herein described. Figure 42: Example of 50 coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 4-layer board layup Figure 43: Example of 50 coplanar waveguide transmission line design for the described 2-layer board layup If the two examples do not match the application PCB layup, the 50 characteristic impedance calculation can be made using the HFSS commercial finite element method solver for electromagnetic structures from Ansys Corporation, or using freeware tools like AppCAD from Agilent (www.agilent.com) or TXLine from Applied Wave Research (www.mwoffice.com), taking care of the approximation formulas used by the tools for the impedance computation. To achieve a 50 characteristic impedance, the width of the transmission line must be chosen depending on:
the thickness of the transmission line itself (e.g. 35 m in the example of Figure 42 and Figure 43) the thickness of the dielectric material between the top layer (where the transmission line is routed) and the inner closer layer implementing the ground plane (e.g. 270 m in Figure 42, 1510 m in Figure 43) UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 89 of 155 35 m35 m35 m35 m270 m270 m760 mL1 CopperL3 CopperL2 CopperL4 CopperFR-4 dielectricFR-4 dielectricFR-4 dielectric380 m500 m500 m35 m35 m1510 mL2 CopperL1 CopperFR-4 dielectric1200 m400 m400 m LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual the dielectric constant of the dielectric material (e.g. dielectric constant of the FR-4 dielectric material in Figure 42 and Figure 43) the gap from the transmission line to the adjacent ground plane on the same layer of the transmission line
(e.g. 500 m in Figure 42, 400 m in Figure 43) If the distance between the transmission line and the adjacent GND area (on the same layer) does not exceed 5 times the track width of the micro strip, use the Coplanar Waveguide model for the 50 calculation. Additionally to the 50 impedance, the following guidelines are recommended for the transmission line design:
Minimize the transmission line length: the insertion loss should be minimized as much as possible, in the order of a few tenths of a dB. Add GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on buried metal layers below any pad of component present on the RF transmission line, if top-layer to buried layer dielectric thickness is below 200 m, to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground. The transmission line width and spacing to GND must be uniform and routed as smoothly as possible: avoid abrupt changes of width and spacing to GND. Add GND vias around transmission line, as described in Figure 44. Ensure solid metal connection of the adjacent metal layer on the PCB stack-up to main ground layer, providing enough on the adjacent metal layer, as described in Figure 44. Route RF transmission line far from any noise source (as switching supplies and digital lines) and from any sensitive circuit (as analog audio lines). Avoid stubs on the transmission line. Avoid signal routing in parallel to transmission line or crossing the transmission line on buried metal layer. Do not route microstrip line below discrete component or other mechanics placed on top layer. An example of proper RF circuit design is reported in Figure 44. In this case, the ANT1 and ANT2 pins are directly connected to SMA connectors by means of proper 50 transmission lines, designed with proper layout. Figure 44: Example of circuit and layout for antenna RF circuits on application board UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 90 of 155 LARASMASMA LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for RF termination design RF terminations must provide a characteristic impedance of 50 as well as the RF transmission lines up to the RF terminations themselves, to match the characteristic impedance of the ANT1 / ANT2 ports of the modules. However, real antennas do not have perfect 50 load on all the supported frequency bands. Therefore, to reduce as much as possible performance degradation due to antennas mismatch, RF terminations must provide optimal return loss (or V.S.W.R.) figure over all the operating frequencies, as summarized in Table 7 and Table 8. If external antennas are used, the antenna connectors represent the RF termination on the PCB:
Use suitable 50 connectors providing proper PCB-to-RF-cable transition. Strictly follow the connector manufacturers recommended layout, for example:
o SMA Pin-Through-Hole connectors require GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) on all the layers around the central pin up to annular pads of the four GND posts, as shown in Figure 44. o U.FL surface mounted connectors require no conductive traces (i.e. clearance, a void area) in the area below the connector between the GND land pads. Cut out the GND layer under RF connectors and close to buried vias, to remove stray capacitance and thus keep the RF line 50 , e.g. the active pad of UFL connectors needs to have a GND keep-out (i.e. clearance, a void area) at least on first inner layer to reduce parasitic capacitance to ground. If integrated antennas are used, the RF terminations are represented by the integrated antennas themselves. The following guidelines should be followed:
Use antennas designed by an antenna manufacturer, providing the best possible return loss (or V.S.W.R.). Provide a ground plane large enough according to the relative integrated antenna requirements. The ground plane of the application PCB can be reduced down to a minimum size that must be similar to one quarter of wavelength of the minimum frequency that has to be radiated. As numerical example, Frequency = 750 MHz Wavelength = 40 cm Minimum GND plane size = 10 cm It is highly recommended to strictly follow the detailed and specific guidelines provided by the antenna manufacturer regarding correct installation and deployment of the antenna system, including PCB layout and matching circuitry. Further to the custom PCB and product restrictions, antennas may require a tuning to comply with all the applicable required certification schemes. It is recommended to consult the antenna manufacturer for the design-in guidelines for the antenna matching relative to the custom application. Additionally, these recommendations regarding the antenna system placement must be followed:
Do not place antennas within closed metal case. Do not place the antennas in close vicinity to end user since the emitted radiation in human tissue is limited by regulatory requirements. Place the antennas far from sensitive analog systems or employ countermeasures to reduce EMC issues. Take care of interaction between co-located RF systems since the cellular transmitted power may interact or disturb the performance of companion systems. Place the two LTE antennas providing low Envelope Correlation Coefficient (ECC) between primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antenna: the antenna 3D radiation patterns should have lobes in different directions. The ECC between primary and secondary antenna needs to be enough low to comply with the radiated performance requirements specified by related certification schemes, as indicated in Table 9. Place the two LTE antennas providing enough high isolation (see Table 9) between primary (ANT1) and secondary (ANT2) antenna. The isolation depends on the distance between antennas (separation of at least a quarter wavelength required for good isolation), antenna type (using antennas with different polarization improves isolation), antenna 3D radiation patterns (uncorrelated patterns improve isolation). UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 91 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Examples of antennas Table 32 lists some examples of possible internal on-board surface-mount antennas. Manufacturer Part Number Product Name Description Taoglas PA.710.A Warrior Taoglas PA.711.A Warrior II Taoglas PCS.06.A Havok Antenova SR4L002 Lucida Ethertronics P822601 Prestta Ethertronics P822602 GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz 40.0 x 6.0 x 5.0 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna Pairs with the Taoglas PA.710.A Warrior for LTE MIMO applications 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz 40.0 x 6.0 x 5.0 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2500..2690 MHz 42.0 x 10.0 x 3.0 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2400 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz 35.0 x 8.5 x 3.2 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2490..2700 MHz 50.0 x 8.0 x 3.2 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE SMD Antenna 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2490..2700 MHz 50.0 x 8.0 x 3.2 mm Table 32: Examples of internal surface-mount antennas Table 33 lists some examples of possible internal off-board PCB-type antennas with cable and connector. Manufacturer Part Number Product Name Description Taoglas FXUB63.07.0150C Taoglas FXUB66.07.0150C Maximus Taoglas FXUB70.A.07.C.001 Ethertronics 1002289 EAD FSQS35241-UF-10 SQ7 GSM / WCDMA / LTE Antenna on flexible PCB with cable and U.FL 698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2690 MHz 96.0 x 21.0 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE Antenna on flexible PCB with cable and U.FL 698..960 MHz, 1390..1435 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2700 MHz, 3400..3600 MHz, 4800..6000 MHz 120.2 x 50.4 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE MIMO Antenna on flexible PCB with cable and U.FL 698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2690 MHz 182.2 x 21.2 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE Antenna on flexible PCB with cable and U.FL 698..960 MHz, 1710..2700 MHz 50.0 x 8.0 x 3.2 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE Antenna on PCB with cable and U.FL 690..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2500..2700 MHz 110.0 x 21.0 mm Table 33: Examples of internal antennas with cable and connector UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 92 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Table 34 lists some examples of possible external antennas. Manufacturer Part Number Product Name Description Taoglas GSA.8827.A.101111 Phoenix Taoglas TG.30.8112 Taoglas MA241.BI.001 Genesis Laird Tech. TRA6927M3PW-001 Laird Tech. CMS69273 Laird Tech. OC69271-FNM Laird Tech. CMD69273-30NM Pulse Electronics WA700/2700SMA Table 34: Examples of external antennas GSM / WCDMA / LTE adhesive-mount antenna with cable and SMA(M) 698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2490..2690 MHz 105 x 30 x 7.7 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE swivel dipole antenna with SMA(M) 698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2700 MHz 148.6 x 49 x 10 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE MIMO 2in1 adhesive-mount combination antenna waterproof IP67 rated with cable and SMA(M) 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2400..2700 MHz 205.8 x 58 x 12.4 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE screw-mount antenna with N-type(F) 698..960 MHz, 1710..2170 MHz, 2300..2700 MHz 83.8 x 36.5 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE ceiling-mount antenna with cable and N-type(F) 698..960 MHz, 1575.42 MHz, 1710..2700 MHz 86 x 199 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE pole-mount antenna with N-type(M) 698..960 MHz, 1710..2690 MHz 248 x 24.5 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE ceiling-mount MIMO antenna with cables & N-type(M) 698..960 MHz, 1710..2700 MHz 43.5 x 218.7 mm GSM / WCDMA / LTE clip-mount MIMO antenna with cables and SMA(M) 698..960 MHz,1710..2700 MHz 149 x 127 x 5.1 mm UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 93 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.4.2 Antenna detection interface (ANT_DET) 2.4.2.1 Guidelines for ANT_DET circuit design Figure 45 and Table 35 describe the recommended schematic / components for the antennas detection circuit that must be provided on the application board and for the diagnostic circuit that must be provided on the antennas assembly to achieve primary and secondary antenna detection functionality. Figure 45: Suggested schematic for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C2, C3 D1 D2 L1, L2 R1 J1, J2 C4, C5 L3, L4 R2, R3 27 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H270J - Murata 33 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H330J - Murata Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics Ultra Low Capacitance ESD Protection ESD0P2RF-02LRH - Infineon 68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 (SRF ~1 GHz) LQG15HS68NJ02 - Murata 10 k Resistor 0402 1% 0.063 W RK73H1ETTP1002F - KOA Speer SMA Connector 50 Through Hole Jack SMA6251A1-3GT50G-50 - Amphenol 22 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1H220J - Murata 68 nH Multilayer Inductor 0402 (SRF ~1 GHz) LQG15HS68NJ02 - Murata 15 k Resistor for Diagnostic Various Manufacturers Table 35: Suggested components for antenna detection circuit on application board and diagnostic circuit on antennas assembly The antenna detection circuit and diagnostic circuit suggested in Figure 45 and Table 35 are explained here:
When antenna detection is forced by AT+UANTR command, ANT_DET generates a DC current measuring the resistance (R2 // R3) from antenna connectors (J1, J2) provided on the application board to GND. DC blocking capacitors are needed at the ANT1 / ANT2 pins (C2, C3) and at the antenna radiating element
(C4, C5) to decouple the DC current generated by the ANT_DET pin. Choke inductors with a Self Resonance Frequency (SRF) in the range of 1 GHz are needed in series at the ANT_DET pin (L1, L2) and in series at the diagnostic resistor (L3, L4), to avoid a reduction of the RF performance of the system, improving the RF isolation of the load resistor. Additional components (R1, C1 and D1 in Figure 45) are needed at the ANT_DET pin as ESD protection The ANT1 / ANT2 pins must be connected to the antenna connector by means of a transmission line with nominal characteristics impedance as close as possible to 50 . UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 94 of 155 Application BoardAntenna CableLARA-R2 series56ANT159ANT_DETR1C1D1C2J1Z0= 50 ohmZ0= 50 ohmZ0= 50 ohmPrimary Antenna AssemblyR2C4L3Radiating ElementDiagnostic CircuitL2L1Antenna Cable62ANT2C3J2Z0= 50 ohmZ0= 50 ohmZ0= 50 ohmSecondary Antenna AssemblyR3C5L4Radiating ElementDiagnostic CircuitD2 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual The DC impedance at RF port for some antennas may be a DC open (e.g. linear monopole) or a DC short to reference GND (e.g. PIFA antenna). For those antennas, without the diagnostic circuit of Figure 45, the measured DC resistance is always at the limits of the measurement range (respectively open or short), and there is no means to distinguish between a defect on antenna path with similar characteristics (respectively: removal of linear antenna or RF cable shorted to GND for PIFA antenna). Furthermore, any other DC signal injected to the RF connection from ANT connector to radiating element will alter the measurement and produce invalid results for antenna detection. It is recommended to use an antenna with a built-in diagnostic resistor in the range from 5 k to 30 k to assure good antenna detection functionality and avoid a reduction of module RF performance. The choke inductor should exhibit a parallel Self Resonance Frequency (SRF) in the range of 1 GHz to improve the RF isolation of load resistor. For example:
Consider an antenna with built-in DC load resistor of 15 k. Using the +UANTR AT command, the module reports the resistance value evaluated from the antenna connector provided on the application board to GND:
Reported values close to the used diagnostic resistor nominal value (i.e. values from 13 k to 17 k if a 15 k diagnostic resistor is used) indicate that the antenna is properly connected. Values close to the measurement range maximum limit (approximately 50 k) or an open-circuit over range report (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]) means that that the antenna is not connected or the RF cable is broken. Reported values below the measurement range minimum limit (1 k) highlights a short to GND at antenna or along the RF cable. Measurement inside the valid measurement range and outside the expected range may indicate an improper connection, damaged antenna or wrong value of antenna load resistor for diagnostic. Reported value could differ from the real resistance value of the diagnostic resistor mounted inside the antenna assembly due to antenna cable length, antenna cable capacity and the used measurement method. If the primary / secondary antenna detection function is not required by the customer application, the ANT_DET pin can be left not connected and the ANT1 / ANT2 pins can be directly connected to the related antenna connector by means of a 50 transmission line as described in Figure 44. 2.4.2.2 Guidelines for ANT_DET layout design The recommended layout for the primary antenna detection circuit to be provided on the application board to achieve the primary antenna detection functionality, implementing the recommended schematic described in Figure 45 and Table 35, is explained here:
The ANT1 / ANT2 pins have to be connected to the antenna connector by means of a 50 transmission line, implementing the design guidelines described in section 2.4.1 and the recommendations of the SMA connector manufacturer. DC blocking capacitor at ANT1 / ANT2 pins (C2, C3) has to be placed in series to the 50 RF line. The ANT_DET pin has to be connected to the 50 transmission line by means of a sense line. Choke inductors in series at the ANT_DET pin (L1, L2) have to be placed so that one pad is on the 50 transmission line and the other pad represents the start of the sense line to the ANT_DET pin. The additional components (R1, C1 and D1) on the ANT_DET line have to be placed as ESD protection. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 95 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.5 SIM interface 2.5.1.1 Guidelines for SIM circuit design Guidelines for SIM cards, SIM connectors and SIM chips selection The ISO/IEC 7816, the ETSI TS 102 221 and the ETSI TS 102 671 specifications define the physical, electrical and functional characteristics of Universal Integrated Circuit Cards (UICC) which contains the Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) integrated circuit that securely stores all the information needed to identify and authenticate subscribers over the cellular network. Removable UICC / SIM card contacts mapping is defined by ISO/IEC 7816 and ETSI TS 102 221 as follows:
Contact C1 = VCC (Supply) Contact C2 = RST (Reset) Contact C3 = CLK (Clock) Contact C4 = AUX1 (Auxiliary contact) Contact C5 = GND (Ground) Contact C6 = VPP (Programming supply) Contact C7 = I/O (Data input/output) Contact C8 = AUX2 (Auxiliary contact) It must be connected to VSIM It must be connected to SIM_RST It must be connected to SIM_CLK It must be left not connected It must be connected to GND It can be left not connected It must be connected to SIM_IO It must be left not connected A removable SIM card can have 6 contacts (C1, C2, C3, C5, C6, C7) or 8 contacts, also including the auxiliary contacts C4 and C8. Only 6 contacts are required and must be connected to the module SIM interface. Removable SIM cards are suitable for applications requiring a change of SIM card during the product lifetime. A SIM card holder can have 6 or 8 positions if a mechanical card presence detector is not provided, or it can have 6+2 or 8+2 positions if two additional pins relative to the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector for the mechanical card presence detection are provided. Select a SIM connector providing 6+2 or 8+2 positions if the optional SIM detection feature is required by the custom application, otherwise a connector without integrated mechanical presence switch can be selected. Solderable UICC / SIM chip contact mapping (M2M UICC Form Factor) is defined by ETSI TS 102 671 as:
Case Pin 8 = UICC Contact C1 = VCC (Supply) It must be connected to VSIM Case Pin 7 = UICC Contact C2 = RST (Reset) It must be connected to SIM_RST Case Pin 6 = UICC Contact C3 = CLK (Clock) It must be connected to SIM_CLK Case Pin 5 = UICC Contact C4 = AUX1 (Aux.contact) It must be left not connected Case Pin 1 = UICC Contact C5 = GND (Ground) It must be connected to GND Case Pin 2 = UICC Contact C6 = VPP (Progr. supply) It can be left not connected Case Pin 3 = UICC Contact C7 = I/O (Data I/O) It must be connected to SIM_IO Case Pin 4 = UICC Contact C8 = AUX2 (Aux. contact) It must be left not connected A solderable SIM chip has 8 contacts and can also include the auxiliary contacts C4 and C8 for other uses, but only 6 contacts are required and must be connected to the module SIM card interface as described above. Solderable SIM chips are suitable for M2M applications where it is not required to change the SIM once installed. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 96 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM card connection without detection A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder has to be connected to the SIM card interface of LARA-R2 series modules as described in Figure 46, where the optional SIM detection feature is not implemented. Follow these guidelines connecting the module to a SIM connector without SIM presence detection:
Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground. Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line (VSIM), close to the related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent digital noise. Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line
(VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), very close to each related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holder. Provide a low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140) on each externally accessible SIM line, close to each related pad of the SIM connector: ESD sensitivity rating of the SIM interface pins is 1 kV (HBM), so that, according to the EMC/ESD requirements of the custom application, higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible on the application device. Limit capacitance and series resistance on each signal of the SIM interface (SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), to match the SIM interface specifications requirements (27.7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on the SIM_CLK line, 1.0 s is the maximum allowed rise time on the SIM_IO and SIM_RST lines). Figure 46: Application circuit for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection not implemented Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2, C3, C4 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata D1, D2, D3, D4 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics J1 SIM Card Holder 6 positions, without card presence switch Various Manufacturers, C707 10M006 136 2 - Amphenol Table 36: Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection not implemented UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 97 of 155 LARA-R2 series41VSIM39SIM_IO38SIM_CLK40SIM_RST4V_INT42GPIO5SIM CARD HOLDERC5C6C7C1C2C3SIM Card Bottom View (contacts side)C1VPP (C6)VCC (C1)IO (C7)CLK (C3)RST (C2)GND (C5)C2C3C5J1C4D1D2D3D4C8C4TP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM chip connection A solderable SIM chip (M2M UICC Form Factor) has to be connected the SIM card interface of LARA-R2 series modules as described in Figure 47. Follow these guidelines connecting the module to a solderable SIM chip without SIM presence detection:
Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground. Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line (VSIM) close to the related pad of the SIM chip, to prevent digital noise. Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line
(VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holder. Limit capacitance and series resistance on each signal of the SIM interface (SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), to match the SIM specifications requirements (27.7 ns is the maximum allowed rise time on the SIM_CLK line, 1.0 s is the maximum allowed rise time on the SIM_IO and SIM_RST lines). Figure 47: Application circuit for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip, with SIM detection not implemented Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2, C3, C4 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata C5 U1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata SIM chip (M2M UICC Form Factor) Various Manufacturers Table 37: Example of components for the connection to a single solderable SIM chip, with SIM detection not implemented UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 98 of 155 41VSIM39SIM_IO38SIM_CLK40SIM_RST4V_INT42GPIO5SIM CHIPSIM ChipBottom View (contacts side)C1VPP (C6)VCC (C1)IO (C7)CLK (C3)RST (C2)GND (C5)C2C3C5U1C4283671C1C5C2C6C3C7C4C887651234TPLARA-R2 series LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for single SIM card connection with detection A removable SIM card placed in a SIM card holder must be connected to the SIM card interface of LARA-R2 series modules as described in Figure 48, where the optional SIM card detection feature is implemented. Follow these guidelines connecting the module to a SIM connector implementing SIM presence detection:
Connect the UICC / SIM contacts C1 (VCC) to the VSIM pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C7 (I/O) to the SIM_IO pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C3 (CLK) to the SIM_CLK pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C2 (RST) to the SIM_RST pin of the module. Connect the UICC / SIM contact C5 (GND) to ground. Connect one pin of the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector (e.g. the SW2 pin as described in Figure 48) to the GPIO5 input pin of the module. Connect the other pin of the normally-open mechanical switch integrated in the SIM connector (e.g. the SW1 pin as described in Figure 48) to the V_INT 1.8 V supply output of the module by means of a strong
(e.g. 1 k) pull-up resistor, as the R1 resistor in Figure 48. Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line (VSIM), close to the related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent digital noise. Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line
(VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), very close to each related pad of the SIM connector, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holder. Provide a low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140) on each externally accessible SIM line, close to each related pad of the SIM connector: ESD sensitivity rating of SIM interface pins is 1 kV (HBM according to JESD22-A114), so that, according to the EMC/ESD requirements of the custom application, higher protection level can be required if the lines are externally accessible. Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications requirements
(27.7 ns = max allowed rise time on SIM_CLK, 1.0 s = max allowed rise time on SIM_IO and SIM_RST). Figure 48: Application circuit for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection implemented Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2, C3, C4 47 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 50 V GRM1555C1H470JA01 - Murata C5 D1 D6 R1 R2 J1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics 1 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 470 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W RC0402JR-071KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-07470KL- Yageo Phycomp SIM Card Holder 6 + 2 positions, with card presence switch Various Manufacturers, CCM03-3013LFT R102 - C&K Components Table 38: Example of components for the connection to a single removable SIM card, with SIM detection implemented UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 99 of 155 LARA-R2 series41VSIM39SIM_IO38SIM_CLK40SIM_RST4V_INT42GPIO5SIM CARD HOLDERC5C6C7C1C2C3SIM Card Bottom View (contacts side)C1VPP (C6)VCC (C1)IO (C7)CLK (C3)RST (C2)GND (C5)C2C3C5J1C4SW1SW2D1D2D3D4D5D6R2R1C8C4TP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Guidelines for dual SIM card / chip connection Two SIM card / chip can be connected to the SIM interface of LARA-R2 series modules as described in Figure 49. LARA-R2 series modules do not support the usage of two SIM at the same time, but two SIM can be populated on the application board, providing a proper switch to connect only the first or only the second SIM at a time to the SIM interface of the modules, as described in Figure 49. LARA-R2 series modules support SIM hot insertion / removal on the GPIO5 pin, to enable / disable SIM interface upon detection of external SIM card physical insertion / removal: if the feature is enabled using the specific AT commands (see sections 1.8.2 and 1.12, and u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UGPIOC, +UDCONF=50 commands), the switch from first SIM to the second SIM can be properly done when a Low logic level is present on the GPIO5 pin (SIM not inserted = SIM interface not enabled), without the necessity of a module re-boot, so that the SIM interface will be re-enabled by the module to use the second SIM when a high logic level is re-
applied on the GPIO5 pin. In the application circuit example represented in Figure 49, the application processor will drive the SIM switch using its own GPIO to properly select the SIM that is used by the module. Another GPIO may be used to handle the SIM hot insertion / removal function of LARA-R2 series modules, which can also be handled by other external circuits or by the cellular module GPIO according to the application requirements. The dual SIM connection circuit described in Figure 49 can be implemented for SIM chips as well, providing proper connection between SIM switch and SIM chip as described in Figure 47. If it is required to switch between more than 2 SIM, a circuit similar to the one described in Figure 49 can be implemented: in case of 4 SIM circuit, using proper 4-throw switch instead of the suggested 2-throw switches. Follow these guidelines connecting the module to two SIM connectors:
Use a proper low on resistance (i.e. few ohms) and low on capacitance (i.e. few pF) 2-throw analog switch
(e.g. Fairchild FSA2567) as SIM switch to ensure high-speed data transfer according to SIM requirements. Connect the contacts C1 (VCC) of the two UICC / SIM to the VSIM pin of the module by means of a proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567). Connect the contact C7 (I/O) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_IO pin of the module by means of a proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567). Connect the contact C3 (CLK) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_CLK pin of the module by means of a proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567). Connect the contact C2 (RST) of the two UICC / SIM to the SIM_RST pin of the module by means of a proper 2-throw analog switch (e.g. Fairchild FSA2567). Connect the contact C5 (GND) of the two UICC / SIM to ground. Provide a 100 nF bypass capacitor (e.g. Murata GRM155R71C104K) at the SIM supply line (VSIM), close to the related pad of the two SIM connectors, to prevent digital noise. Provide a bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) on each SIM line
(VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST), very close to each related pad of the two SIM connectors, to prevent RF coupling especially in case the RF antenna is placed closer than 10 - 30 cm from the SIM card holders. Provide a very low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140) on each externally accessible SIM line, close to each related pad of the two SIM connectors, according to the EMC/ESD requirements of the custom application. Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications requirements
(27.7 ns = max allowed rise time on SIM_CLK, 1.0 s = max allowed rise time on SIM_IO and SIM_RST). UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 100 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 49: Application circuit for the connection to two removable SIM cards, with SIM detection not implemented Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 C4, C6 C9 33 pF Capacitor Ceramic C0G 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1H330JZ01 - Murata C5, C10, C11 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata D1 D8 R1 J1, J2 U1 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W RC0402JR-0747KL- Yageo Phycomp SIM Card Holder 6 positions, without card presence switch 4PDT Analog Switch, with Low On-Capacitance and Low On-Resistance Various Manufacturers, C707 10M006 136 2 - Amphenol FSA2567 - Fairchild Semiconductor Table 39: Example of components for the connection to two removable SIM cards, with SIM detection not implemented 2.5.1.2 Guidelines for SIM layout design The layout of the SIM card interface lines (VSIM, SIM_CLK, SIM_IO, SIM_RST) may be critical if the SIM card is placed far away from the LARA-R2 series modules or in close proximity to the RF antenna: these two cases should be avoided or at least mitigated as described below. In the first case, the long connection can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency as any other digital interface: keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs. In the second case, the same harmonics can be picked up and create self-interference that can reduce the sensitivity of cellular receiver channels whose carrier frequency is coincidental with harmonic frequencies: placing the RF bypass capacitors suggested in Figure 48 near the SIM connector will mitigate the problem. In addition, since the SIM card is typically accessed by the end user, it can be subjected to ESD discharges: add adequate ESD protection as suggested in Figure 48 to protect module SIM pins near the SIM connector. Limit capacitance and series resistance on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications: the connections should always be kept as short as possible. Avoid coupling with any sensitive analog circuit, since the SIM signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 101 of 155 LARA-R2 seriesC1FIRST SIM CARDVPP (C6)VCC (C1)IO (C7)CLK (C3)RST (C2)GND (C5)C2C3C5J1C4D1D2D3D4GNDU141VSIMVSIM1VSIM2VSIMVCCC114PDT Analog Switch3V839SIM_IODAT1DAT2DAT38SIM_CLKCLK1CLK2CLK40SIM_RSTRST1RST2RSTSELSECOND SIM CARDVPP (C6)VCC (C1)IO (C7)CLK (C3)RST (C2)GND (C5)J2C6C7C8C10C9D5D6D7D8Application ProcessorGPIOR1 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6 Data communication interfaces 2.6.1 UART interface 2.6.1.1 Guidelines for UART circuit design Providing the full RS-232 functionality (using the complete V.24 link) If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, two different external voltage translators can be used to provide full RS-232 (9 lines) functionality: e.g. using the Texas Instruments SN74AVC8T245PW for the translation from 1.8 V to 3.3 V, and the Maxim MAX3237E for the translation from 3.3 V to RS-232 compatible signal level. If a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used and complete RS-232 functionality is required, then the complete 1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) should be connected to a 1.8 V DTE, as described in Figure 50. Figure 50: UART interface application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8 V DTE) If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 51. Figure 51: UART interface application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) Reference Description C1, C2, C3, C4 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V U1, U2 Unidirectional Voltage Translator Part Number - Manufacturer GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata SN74AVC4T77419 - Texas Instruments Table 40: Component for UART application circuit with complete V.24 link in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) 19 Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 102 of 155 TxDApplication Processor(1.8V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND0TP0TP0TP0TP4V_INTTxDApplication Processor(3.0V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND1V8B1 A1GNDU1B3A3VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC1C23V0DIR3DIR2OEDIR1VCCB2 A2B4A4DIR41V8B1 A1GNDU2B3A3VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC3C43V0DIR1DIR3OEB2 A2B4A4DIR4DIR2TP0TP0TP0TP0TP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Providing the TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS and DTR lines only (not using the complete V.24 link) If the functionality of the DSR, DCD and RI lines is not required, or the lines are not available:
Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, two different external voltage translators (e.g. Maxim MAX3237E and Texas Instruments SN74AVC4T774) can be used. The Texas Instruments chips provide the translation from 1.8 V to 3.3 V, while the Maxim chip provides the translation from 3.3 V to RS-232 compatible signal level. Figure 52 describes the circuit that should be implemented as if a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, given that the DTE will behave properly regardless DSR input setting. Figure 52: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8 V DTE) If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 53, given that the DTE will behave properly regardless DSR input setting. Figure 53: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) Reference Description C1, C2, C3, C4 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V U1 U2 Unidirectional Voltage Translator Unidirectional Voltage Translator Part Number - Manufacturer GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata SN74AVC4T77420 - Texas Instruments SN74AVC2T24520 - Texas Instruments Table 41: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (6-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) 20 Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 103 of 155 TxDApplication Processor(1.8V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)15TXD12DTR16RXD13RTS14CTS9DSR10RI11DCDGND0 0 TPTP0 0 TPTP4V_INTTxDApplication Processor(3.0V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)15TXD12DTR16RXD13RTS14CTS9DSR10RI11DCDGND0 0 TPTP0 0 TPTP1V8B1 A1GNDU1B3A3VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC1C23V0DIR3DIR2OEDIR1VCCB2 A2B4A4DIR41V8B1 A1GNDU2VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC33V0DIR1OEB2 A2DIR2C4 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Providing the TXD, RXD, RTS and CTS lines only (not using the complete V.24 link) Connect the module DTR input to GND using a 0 series resistor, since it may be useful to set DTR active if not specifically handled (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &D, S0, +CSGT, +CNMI AT commands) Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, the Maxim MAX13234E voltage level translator can be used. This chip translates voltage levels from 1.8 V (module side) to the RS-232 standard. If a 1.8 V Application Processor is used, the circuit should be implemented as described in Figure 54. Figure 54: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8 V DTE) If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 55. Figure 55: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1, C2 U1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V Unidirectional Voltage Translator GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata SN74AVC4T77421 - Texas Instruments Table 42: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (5-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) 21 Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 104 of 155 TxDApplication Processor(1.8V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND0TP0TP0TPTP4V_INTTxDApplication Processor(3.0V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND1V8B1 A1GNDU1B3A3VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC1C23V0DIR3DIR2OEDIR1VCCB2 A2B4A4DIR4TP0TP0TP0TPTP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Providing the TXD and RXD lines only (not using the complete V24 link) If the functionality of the CTS, RTS, DSR, DCD, RI and DTR lines is not required in the application, or the lines are not available:
Connect the module RTS input line to GND or to the CTS output line of the module: since the module requires RTS active (low electrical level) if HW flow-control is enabled (AT&K3, which is the default setting). Connect the module DTR input to GND using a 0 series resistor, since it may be useful to set DTR active if not specifically handled (see u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], &D, S0, +CSGT, +CNMI AT commands) Leave DSR, DCD and RI lines of the module floating, with a test-point on DCD If RS-232 compatible signal levels are needed, the Maxim MAX13234E voltage level translator can be used. This chip translates voltage levels from 1.8 V (module side) to the RS-232 standard. If a 1.8 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, the circuit that should be implemented as described in Figure 56:
Figure 56: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in the DTE/DCE serial communication (1.8 V DTE) If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, then it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V UART interface of the module (DCE) by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side, as described in Figure 57. Figure 57: UART interface application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) Reference Description C1, C2 U1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V Unidirectional Voltage Translator Part Number - Manufacturer GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata SN74AVC2T24522 - Texas Instruments Table 43: Component for UART application circuit with partial V.24 link (3-wire) in DTE/DCE serial communication (3.0 V DTE) 22 Voltage translator providing partial power down feature so that the DTE 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 105 of 155 TxDApplication Processor(1.8V DTE)RxDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND0TP0TP0TPTP4V_INTTxDApplication Processor(3.0V DTE)RxDDTRDSRRIDCDGNDLARA-R2 series(1.8V DCE)12TXD9DTR13RXD6DSR7RI8DCDGND1V8B1 A1GNDU1VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC1C23V0DIR1DIR2OEVCCB2 A2RTSCTS10RTS11CTSTP0TP0TP0TPTP LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Additional considerations If a 3.0 V Application Processor (DTE) is used, the voltage scaling from any 3.0 V output of the DTE to the apposite 1.8 V input of the module (DCE) can be implemented, as an alternative low-cost solution, by means of an appropriate voltage divider. Consider the value of the pull-up integrated at the input of the module (DCE) for the correct selection of the voltage divider resistance values and mind that any DTE signal connected to the module has to be tri-stated or set low when the module is in power-down mode and during the module power-
on sequence (at least until the activation of the V_INT supply output of the module), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module (see the remark below). Moreover, the voltage scaling from any 1.8 V output of the cellular module (DCE) to the apposite 3.0 V input of the Application Processor (DTE) can be implemented by means of an appropriate low-cost non-inverting buffer with open drain output. The non-inverting buffer should be supplied by the V_INT supply output of the cellular module. Consider the value of the pull-up integrated at each input of the DTE (if any) and the baud rate required by the application for the appropriate selection of the resistance value for the external pull-up biased by the application processor supply rail. If power saving is enabled the application circuit with the TXD and RXD lines only is not recommended. During command mode the DTE must send to the module a wake-up character or a dummy AT before each command line (see section 1.9.1.4 for the complete description), but during data mode the wake-up character or the dummy AT would affect the data communication. Do not apply voltage to any UART interface pin before the switch-on of the UART supply source (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signals connected to the cellular module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on. ESD sensitivity rating of UART interface pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points. If the UART interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board, but it is recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to the TXD, RXD, DTR and DCD pins for diagnostic purpose, in particular providing a 0 series jumper on each line to detach each UART pin of the module from the DTE application processor. 2.6.1.2 Guidelines for UART layout design The UART serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 106 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.2 USB interface 2.6.2.1 Guidelines for USB circuit design The USB_D+ and USB_D- lines carry the USB serial data and signaling. The lines are used in single ended mode for full speed signaling handshake, as well as in differential mode for high speed signaling and data transfer. USB pull-up or pull-down resistors and external series resistors on USB_D+ and USB_D- lines as required by the USB 2.0 specification [9] are part of the module USB pins driver and do not need to be externally provided. The USB interface of the module is enabled only if a valid high logic level is detected by the VUSB_DET input
(see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]). Neither the USB interface, nor the whole module is supplied by the VUSB_DET input: the VUSB_DET senses the USB supply voltage and absorbs few microamperes. Routing the USB pins to a connector, they will be externally accessible on the application device. According to EMC/ESD requirements of the application, an additional ESD protection device with very low capacitance should be provided close to accessible point on the line connected to this pin, as described in Figure 58 and Table 44. The USB interface pins ESD sensitivity rating is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a very low capacitance (i.e. less or equal to 1 pF) ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140 ESD protection device) on the lines connected to these pins, close to accessible points. The USB pins of the modules can be directly connected to the USB host application processor without additional ESD protections if they are not externally accessible or according to EMC/ESD requirements. Figure 58: USB Interface application circuits Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer C1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R61A104KA01 - Murata D1, D2, D3 Very Low Capacitance ESD Protection PESD0402-140 - Tyco Electronics Table 44: Component for USB application circuits If the USB interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board, but it is recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to VUSB_DET, USB_D+, USB_D- pins. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 107 of 155 LARA-R2 series D+D-GND29USB_D+28USB_D-GNDUSB DEVICE CONNECTORD1D2VBUSC117VUSB_DETLARA-R2 series D+D-GND29USB_D+28USB_D-GNDUSB HOST PROCESSORC117VUSB_DETVBUS / GPIOD3 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.2.2 Guidelines for USB layout design The USB_D+ / USB_D- lines require accurate layout design to achieve reliable signaling at the high speed data rate (up to 480 Mb/s) supported by the USB serial interface. The characteristic impedance of the USB_D+ / USB_D- lines is specified by the Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 specification [9]. The most important parameter is the differential characteristic impedance applicable for the odd-mode electromagnetic field, which should be as close as possible to 90 differential. Signal integrity may be degraded if PCB layout is not optimal, especially when the USB signaling lines are very long. Use the following general routing guidelines to minimize signal quality problems:
Route USB_D+ / USB_D- lines as a differential pair. Route USB_D+ / USB_D- lines as short as possible. Ensure the differential characteristic impedance (Z0) is as close as possible to 90 . Ensure the common mode characteristic impedance (ZCM) is as close as possible to 30 . Consider design rules for USB_D+ / USB_D- similar to RF transmission lines, being them coupled differential micro-strip or buried stripline: avoid any stubs, abrupt change of layout, and route on clear PCB area. Avoid coupling with any RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. Figure 59 and Figure 60 provide two examples of coplanar waveguide designs with differential characteristic impedance close to 90 and common mode characteristic impedance close to 30 . The first transmission line can be implemented in case of 4-layer PCB stack-up herein described, the second transmission line can be implemented in case of 2-layer PCB stack-up herein described. Figure 59: Example of USB line design, with Z0 close to 90 and ZCM close to 30 , for the described 4-layer board layup Figure 60: Example of USB line design, with Z0 close to 90 and ZCM close to 30 , for the described 2-layer board layup UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 108 of 155 35 m35 m35 m35 m270 m270 m760 mL1 CopperL3 CopperL2 CopperL4 CopperFR-4 dielectricFR-4 dielectricFR-4 dielectric350 m400 m400 m350 m400 m35 m35 m1510 mL2 CopperL1 CopperFR-4 dielectric740 m410 m410 m740 m410 m LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.3 HSIC interface 2.6.3.1 Guidelines for HSIC circuit design The HSIC interface is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions except for diagnostic purpose. LARA-R2 series modules include a USB High-Speed Inter-Chip compliant interface with maximum 480 Mb/s data rate according to the High-Speed Inter-Chip USB Electrical Specification Version 1.0 [10] and USB Specification Revision 2.0 [9]. The module itself acts as a device and can be connected to any compatible host. The HSIC interface consists of a bi-directional DDR data line (HSIC_DATA) for transmitting and receiving data synchronously with the bi-directional strobe line (HSIC_STRB), intended to be directly connected to the Data and Strobe pins of the compatible USB High-Speed Inter-Chip host mounted on the same PCB of the LARA-R2 series module, without using connectors / cables, as described in Figure 61. The modules include also the HOST_SELECT pin to select the module / host application processor configuration:
the pin is available to select, enable, connect, disconnect and subsequently re-connect the HSIC interface. Figure 61: HSIC interface application circuit Further guidelines for HSIC interface circuit design will be described in detail in a successive release of the System Integration Manual. ESD sensitivity rating of HSIC interface pins is 1 kV (HBM as per JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points If the HSIC interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board, but it is recommended providing accessible test points directly connected to HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB pins. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 109 of 155 LARA-R2 series DATASTROBEGND99HSIC_DATA100HSIC_STRBGNDUSB HSICHOST PROCESSOR LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.3.2 Guidelines for HSIC layout design HSIC lines require accurate layout design to achieve reliable signaling at high speed data rate (up to 480 Mb/s), as supported by the HSIC serial interface: signal integrity may be degraded if PCB layout is not optimal, especially when the HSIC lines are very long. The characteristic impedance of the HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB lines has to be as close as possible to 50 , as specified by the High-Speed Inter-Chip USB Electrical Specification Version 1.0 [10]. Use the following general routing guidelines to minimize signal quality problems:
Route HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB lines as short as possible. HSIC interface is only recommended for intra-board interconnect. The connection should be point-to-point. Connectors and cables are not recommended. HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB lines must be matched in length to within 10 mils. Ensure the characteristic impedance of HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB lines is as close as possible to 50 . HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB signals are not differential signals and should not be routed as such. Consider design rules for HSIC_DATA and HSIC_STRB lines similar to RF transmission lines, routing them as micro-strips (conducting strips separated from ground plane by dielectric material) or striplines (flat strips of metal sandwiched between two parallel ground planes within a dielectric material). Avoid any stubs, abrupt change of layout, and route on clear PCB area. Avoid coupling with any RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. Figure 42 and Figure 43 provide two examples of proper 50 coplanar waveguide designs. The first example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 4-layer PCB stack-up herein described, and the second example of RF transmission line can be implemented in case of 2-layer PCB stack-up herein described. If the two examples do not match the application PCB layup, the 50 characteristic impedance calculation can be made using the HFSS commercial finite element method solver for electromagnetic structures from Ansys Corporation, or using freeware tools like AppCAD from Agilent (www.agilent.com) or TXLine from Applied Wave Research (www.mwoffice.com), taking care of the approximation formulas used by the tools for the impedance computation. To achieve a 50 characteristic impedance, the width of the transmission line must be chosen depending on:
the thickness of the transmission line itself (e.g. 35 m in the example of Figure 42 and Figure 43) the thickness of the dielectric material between the top layer (where the transmission line is routed) and the inner closer layer implementing the ground plane (e.g. 270 m in Figure 42, 1510 m in Figure 43) the dielectric constant of the dielectric material (e.g. dielectric constant of the FR-4 dielectric material in Figure 42 and Figure 43) the gap from the transmission line to the adjacent ground plane on the same layer of the transmission line
(e.g. 500 m in Figure 42, 400 m in Figure 43) If the distance between the transmission line and the adjacent GND area (on the same layer) does not exceed 5 times the track width of the micro strip, use the Coplanar Waveguide model for the 50 calculation. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 110 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.4 DDC (I2C) interface 2.6.4.1 Guidelines for DDC (I2C) circuit design General considerations Communication with u-blox GNSS receivers over DDC (I2C) is not supported by the LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versions. The GNSS RTC sharing function is not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. The DDC I2C-bus master interface can be used to communicate with u-blox GNSS receivers and other external I2C-bus slaves as an audio codec. Beside the general considerations reported below, see:
the following parts of this section for specific guidelines for the connection to u-blox GNSS receivers. the section 2.7.1 for an application circuit example with an external audio codec I2C-bus slave. To be compliant to the I2C-bus specifications, the module bus interface pins are open drain output and pull up resistors must be mounted externally. Resistor values must conform to I2C bus specifications [11]: for example, 4.7 k resistors can be commonly used. Pull-ups must be connected to a supply voltage of 1.8 V (typical), since this is the voltage domain of the DDC pins which are not tolerant to higher voltage values (e.g. 3.0 V). Connect the DDC (I2C) pull-ups to the V_INT 1.8 V supply source, or another 1.8 V supply source enabled after V_INT (e.g., as the GNSS 1.8 V supply present in Figure 62 application circuit), as any external signal connected to the DDC (I2C) interface must not be set high before the switch-on of the V_INT supply of the DDC (I2C) pins, to avoid latch-up of circuits and let a proper boot of the module. The signal shape is defined by the values of the pull-up resistors and the bus capacitance. Long wires on the bus increase the capacitance. If the bus capacitance is increased, use pull-up resistors with nominal resistance value lower than 4.7 k, to match the I2C bus specifications [11] regarding rise and fall times of the signals. Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on the bus to match the I2C specifications (1.0 s is the maximum allowed rise time on the SCL and SDA lines): route connections as short as possible. ESD sensitivity rating of the DDC (I2C) pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points. If the pins are not used as DDC bus interface, they can be left unconnected. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 111 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Connection with u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers Figure 62 shows an application circuit for connecting the cellular module to a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver:
The SDA and SCL pins of the cellular module are directly connected to the related pins of the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver, with appropriate pull-up resistors connected to the 1.8 V GNSS supply enabled after the V_INT supply of the I2C pins of the cellular module. The GPIO2 pin is connected to the active-high enable pin of the voltage regulator that supplies the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver providing the GNSS supply enable function. A pull-down resistor is provided to avoid a switch on of the positioning receiver when the cellular module is switched off or in the reset state. The GPIO3 and GPIO4 pins are directly connected respectively to TXD1 and EXTINT0 pins of the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver providing GNSS Tx data ready and GNSS RTC sharing functions. The V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module is connected to the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver to provide the supply for the GNSS real time clock and backup RAM when the VCC supply of the cellular module is within its operating range and the VCC supply of the GNSS receiver is disabled. This enables the u-blox GNSS receiver to recover from a power breakdown with either a hot start or a warm start
(depending on the actual duration of the GNSS VCC outage) and to maintain the configuration settings saved in the backup RAM. Figure 62: Application circuit for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers Reference Description R1, R2 R3 U1 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W Part Number - Manufacturer RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual Table 45: Components for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 112 of 155 R1INOUTGNDGNSS LDORegulatorSHDNu-blox GNSS1.8 V receiverSDA2SCL2R21V81V8VMAIN1V8U123GPIO2SDASCLC1TxD1EXTINT0GPIO3GPIO426272425VCCR3V_BCKPV_BCKP2GNSS data readyGNSS RTC sharingGNSS supply enabledLARA-R2 series(except LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B) LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 63 illustrates an alternative solution as supply for u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers: the V_INT 1.8 V regulated supply output of the cellular module can be used to supply a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver of the u-blox 6 generation (or any newer u-blox GNSS receiver generation) instead of using an external voltage regulator as shown in the previous Figure 62. The V_INT supply is able to support the maximum current consumption of these positioning receivers. The internal switching step-down regulator that generates the V_INT supply is set to 1.8 V (typical) when the cellular module is switched on and it is disabled when the module is switched off. The supply of the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver can be switched off using an external p-channel MOSFET controlled by the GPIO2 pin by means of a proper inverting transistor as shown in Figure 63, implementing the GNSS supply enable function. If this feature is not required, the V_INT supply output can be directly connected to the u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver, so that it will be switched on when V_INT output is enabled. According to the V_INT supply output voltage ripple characteristic specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]:
Additional filtering may be needed to properly supply an external LNA, depending on the characteristics of the used LNA, adding a series ferrite bead and a bypass capacitor (e.g. the Murata BLM15HD182SN1 ferrite bead and the Murata GRM1555C1H220J 22 pF capacitor) at the input of the external LNA supply line. Figure 63: Application circuit for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer R1, R2 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 100 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-07100KL - Yageo Phycomp P-Channel MOSFET Low On-Resistance IRLML6401 - International Rectifier or NTZS3151P - ON Semi NPN BJT Transistor BC847 - Infineon 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X7R 0402 10% 16 V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata R3 R4 R5 T1 T2 C1 Table 46: Components for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers using V_INT as supply For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS Implementation Application Note [22] and to the Hardware Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 113 of 155 LARA-R2 series(except LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B)u-blox GNSS1.8 V receiverTxD1EXTINT0GPIO3GPIO42425V_BCKPV_BCKP2SDA2SCL223GPIO2SDASCL2627VCC1V8C1R34V_INTR5R4TPT2T1R1R21V81V8GNSS data readyGNSS RTC sharingGNSS supply enabled LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Connection with u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers Figure 64 shows an application circuit for connecting the cellular module to a u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver:
As the SDA and SCL pins of the cellular module are not tolerant up to 3.0 V, the connection to the related I2C pins of the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper I2C-bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator (e.g. TI TCA9406, which additionally provides the partial power down feature so that the GNSS 3.0 V supply can be ramped up before the V_INT 1.8 V cellular supply), with proper pull-up resistors. The GPIO2 is connected to the active-high enable pin of the voltage regulator that supplies the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver providing the GNSS supply enable function. A pull-down resistor is provided to avoid a switch on of the positioning receiver when the cellular module is switched off or in the reset state. As the GPIO3 and GPIO4 pins of the cellular module are not tolerant up to 3.0 V, the connection to the related pins of the u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receiver must be provided using a proper Unidirectional General Purpose Voltage Translator (e.g. TI SN74AVC2T245, which additionally provides the partial power down feature so that the 3.0 V GNSS supply can be also ramped up before the V_INT 1.8 V cellular supply). The V_BCKP supply output of the cellular module can be directly connected to the V_BCKP backup supply input pin of the GNSS receiver as in the application circuit for a u-blox 1.8 V GNSS receiver. Figure 64: Application circuit for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers Reference Description R1, R2, R4, R5 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W R3 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W Part Number - Manufacturer RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0747KL - Yageo Phycomp C2, C3, C4, C5 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 10V GRM155R71C104KA01 - Murata U1, C1 U2 U3 Voltage Regulator for GNSS receiver and related output bypass capacitor See GNSS receiver Hardware Integration Manual I2C-bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator TCA9406DCUR - Texas Instruments Generic Unidirectional Voltage Translator SN74AVC2T245 - Texas Instruments Table 47: Components for connecting LARA-R2 series modules to u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers For additional guidelines regarding the design of applications with u-blox 3.0 V GNSS receivers see the GNSS Implementation Application Note [22] and to the Hardware Integration Manual of the u-blox GNSS receivers. 2.6.4.2 Guidelines for DDC (I2C) layout design The DDC (I2C) serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF line or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 114 of 155 u-blox GNSS 3.0 V receiver24GPIO31V8B1 A1GNDU3B2A2VCCBVCCAUnidirectionalVoltage TranslatorC4C53V0TxD1R1INOUTGNSS LDO RegulatorSHDNnR2VMAIN3V0U123GPIO226SDA27SCLR4R51V8SDA_A SDA_BGNDU2SCL_ASCL_BVCCAVCCBI2C-bus Bidirectional Voltage Translator4V_INTC1C2C3R3SDA2SCL2VCCDIR1DIR22V_BCKPV_BCKPOEnOEGNSS data readyGNSS supply enabledGNDLARA-R2 series(except LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B)EXTINT0GPIO425GNSS RTC sharing LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.6.5 SDIO interface 2.6.5.1 Guidelines for SDIO circuit design The functionality of the SDIO Secure Digital Input Output interface pins is not supported by LARA-R2 series modules 02 and 62 product versions: the pins should not be driven by any external device. LARA-R2 series modules include a 4-bit Secure Digital Input Output interface (SDIO_D0, SDIO_D1, SDIO_D2, SDIO_D3, SDIO_CLK, SDIO_CMD) designed to communicate with an external u-blox short range Wi-Fi module. Combining a u-blox cellular module with a u-blox short range communication module gives designers full access to the Wi-Fi module directly via the cellular module, so that a second interface connected to the Wi-Fi module is not necessary. AT commands via the AT interfaces of the cellular module allows full control of the Wi-Fi module from any host processor, because Wi-Fi control messages are relayed to the Wi-Fi module via the dedicated SDIO interface. Further guidelines for SDIO interface circuit design will be described in detail in a successive release of the System Integration Manual. Do not apply voltage to any SDIO interface pin before the switch-on of SDIO interface supply source
(V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. ESD sensitivity rating of SDIO interface pins is 1 kV (HMB according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a very low capacitance ESD protection (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140 ESD), close to accessible points. If the SDIO interface pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board. 2.6.5.2 Guidelines for SDIO layout design The SDIO serial interface requires the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other high speed digital interface. Keep the traces short, avoid stubs and avoid coupling with RF lines / parts or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. Consider the usage of low value series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity, which may create ringing and loss of a square wave shape. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 115 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.7 Audio interface Audio is not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B product versions. 2.7.1 Digital audio interface 2.7.1.1 Guidelines for digital audio circuit design I2S digital audio interface can be connected to an external digital audio device for voice applications. Any external digital audio device compliant with the configuration of the digital audio interface of the LARA-R2 series cellular module can be used, given that the external digital audio device must provide:
The opposite role: slave or master role, as LARA-R2 series modules may act as master or slave The same mode and frame format: PCM / short synch mode or Normal I2S / long synch mode with o data in 2s complement notation, linear o MSB transmitted first o data word length = 16-bit (16 clock cycles) o frame length = synch signal period:
17-bit or 18-bit in PCM / short alignment mode (16 + 1 or 16 + 2 clock cycles, with the Word Alignment / Synchronization signal set high for 1 clock cycle or 2 clock cycles) 32-bit in Normal I2S mode / long alignment mode (16 x 2 clock cycles) The same sample rate, i.e. synch signal frequency, configurable by AT+UI2S <I2S_sample_rate> parameter o 8 kHz o 11.025 kHz o 12 kHz o 16 kHz o 22.05 kHz o 24 kHz o 32 kHz o 44.1 kHz o 48 kHz The same serial clock frequency:
o 17 x <I2S_sample_rate> or 18 x <I2S_sample_rate> in PCM / short alignment mode, or o 16 x 2 x <I2S_sample_rate> in Normal I2S mode / long alignment mode Compatible voltage levels (1.80 V typ.), otherwise it is recommended to connect the 1.8 V digital audio interface of the module to the external 3.0 V (or similar) digital audio device by means of appropriate unidirectional voltage translators (e.g. TI SN74AVC4T774 or SN74AVC2T245, providing partial power down feature so that the digital audio device 3.0 V supply can be also ramped up before V_INT 1.8 V supply), using the module V_INT output as 1.8 V supply for the voltage translators on the module side For the appropriate selection of a compliant external digital audio device, see section 1.10.1 and see the +UI2S AT command description in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for further details regarding the capabilities and the possible settings of I2S digital audio interface of LARA-R2 series modules. An appropriate specific application circuit has to be implemented and configured according to the particular external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 116 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Examples of manufacturers offering compatible audio codec parts are the following:
Maxim Integrated (as the MAX9860, MAX9867, MAX9880A audio codecs) Texas Instruments / National Semiconductor Cirrus Logic / Wolfson Microelectronics Nuvoton Technology Asahi Kasei Microdevices Realtek Semiconductor Figure 65 and Table 48 describe an application circuit for the I2S digital audio interface providing basic voice capability using an external audio voice codec, in particular the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec. DAC and ADC integrated in the external audio codec respectively converts an incoming digital data stream to analog audio output through a mono amplifier and converts the microphone input signal to the digital bit stream over the digital audio interface, A digital side-tone mixer integrated in the external audio codec provides loopback of the microphones/ADC signal to the DAC/headphone output. The modules I2S interface (I2S master) is connected to the related pins of the external audio codec (I2S slave). The GPIO6 of the LARA-R2 series module (that provides a suitable digital output clock) is connected to the clock input of the external audio codec to provide clock reference. The external audio codec is controlled by the LARA-R2 series module using the DDC (I2C) interface, which can concurrently communicate with other I2C devices and control an external audio codec. The V_INT output supplies the external audio codec, defining proper digital interfaces voltage level. Additional components are provided for EMC and ESD immunity conformity: a 10 nF bypass capacitor and a series chip ferrite bead noise/EMI suppression filter provided on each microphone line input and speaker line output of the external codec as described in Figure 65 and Table 48. The necessity of these or other additional parts for EMC improvement may depend on the specific application board design. Specific AT commands are available to configure the Maxim MAX9860 audio codec: for more details see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2], +UEXTDCONF AT command. As various external audio codecs other than the one described in Figure 65 and Table 48 can be used to provide voice capability, the appropriate specific application circuit has to be implemented and configured according to the particular external digital audio device or audio codec used and according to the application requirements. Figure 65: I2S interface application circuit with an external audio codec to provide voice capability UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 117 of 155 LARA-R2 series(except LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B)R2R1BCLKGNDU1LRCLKAudio CodecSDINSDOUTSDASCLMCLKIRQnR3C3C2C1VDD1V8MICBIASC4R4C5C6MICLNMICLPD1Microphone ConnectorMICC12C11J1MICGNDR5C8C7D2SPKSpeaker ConnectorOUTPOUTNJ2C10C9C14C13EMI3EMI4EMI1EMI2GPIO626SDA27SCL19GND4V_INT36I2S_CLK34I2S_WA35I2S_TXD37I2S_RXD LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Reference Description Part Number Manufacturer C1 100 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 10V GRM155R71C104KA01 Murata C2, C4, C5, C6 1 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 6.3 V GRM155R60J105KE19 Murata C3 10 F Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0603 20% 6.3 V GRM188R60J106ME47 Murata C7, C8, C9, C10 27 pF Capacitor Ceramic COG 0402 5% 25 V GRM1555C1H270JZ01 Murata C11, C12, C13, C14 10 nF Capacitor Ceramic X5R 0402 10% 50V GRM155R71C103KA88 Murata D1, D2 Low Capacitance ESD Protection USB0002RP or USB0002DP AVX EMI1, EMI2, EMI3, EMI4 Chip Ferrite Bead Noise/EMI Suppression Filter 1800 Ohm at 100 MHz, 2700 Ohm at 1 GHz BLM15HD182SN1 Murata J1 J2 MIC R1, R2 R3 R4, R5 SPK U1 Microphone Connector Speaker Connector 2.2 k Electret Microphone 4.7 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 2.2 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 32 Speaker 16-Bit Mono Audio Voice Codec Various manufacturers Various manufacturers Various manufacturers RC0402JR-074K7L - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-0710KL - Yageo Phycomp RC0402JR-072K2L Yageo Phycomp Various manufacturers MAX9860ETG+ - Maxim Table 48: Example of components for audio voice codec application circuit Do not apply voltage to any I2S pin before the switch-on of I2S supply source (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper boot of the module. If the external signals connected to the cellular module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, or TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on. ESD sensitivity rating of I2S interface pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting a general purpose ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points. If the I2S digital audio pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board. 2.7.1.2 Guidelines for digital audio layout design I2S interface and clock output lines require the same consideration regarding electro-magnetic interference as any other high speed digital interface. Keep the traces short and avoid coupling with RF lines / parts or sensitive analog inputs, since the signals can cause the radiation of some harmonics of the digital data frequency. 2.7.1.3 Guidelines for analog audio layout design Accurate design of the analog audio circuit is very important to obtain clear and high quality audio. The GSM signal burst has a repetition rate of 217 Hz that lies in the audible range. A careful layout is required to reduce the risk of noise from audio lines due to both VCC burst noise coupling and RF detection. General guidelines for the uplink path (microphone), which is commonly the most sensitive, are the following:
Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to microphone lines: it is strongly recommended to route microphone lines away from module VCC supply line, any switching regulator line, RF antenna lines, digital lines and any other possible noise source. Avoid coupling between microphone and speaker / receiver lines. Optimize the mechanical design of the application device, the position, orientation and mechanical fixing
(for example, using rubber gaskets) of microphone and speaker parts in order to avoid echo interference between uplink path and downlink path. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 118 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Keep ground separation from microphone lines to other noisy signals. Use an intermediate ground layer or vias wall for coplanar signals. In case of external audio device providing differential microphone input, route microphone signal lines as a differential pair embedded in ground to reduce differential noise pick-up. The balanced configuration will help reject the common mode noise. Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90 crossing. Place bypass capacitor for RF very close to active microphone. The preferred microphone should be designed for GSM applications which typically have internal built-in bypass capacitor for RF very close to active device. If the integrated FET detects the RF burst, the resulting DC level will be in the pass-band of the audio circuitry and cannot be filtered by any other device. General guidelines for the downlink path (speaker / receiver) are the following:
The physical width of the audio output lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize series resistance since the lines are connected to low impedance speaker transducer. Avoid coupling of any noisy signal to speaker lines: it is recommended to route speaker lines away from module VCC supply line, any switching regulator line, RF antenna lines, digital lines and any other possible noise source. Avoid coupling between speaker / receiver and microphone lines. Optimize the mechanical design of the application device, the position, orientation and mechanical fixing
(for example, using rubber gaskets) of speaker and microphone parts in order to avoid echo interference between downlink path and uplink path. In case of external audio device providing differential speaker / receiver output, route speaker signal lines as a differential pair embedded in ground up to reduce differential noise pick-up. The balanced configuration will help reject the common mode noise. Cross other signals lines on adjacent layers with 90 crossing. Place bypass capacitor for RF close to the speaker. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 119 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.8 General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) 2.8.1.1 Guidelines for GPIO circuit design A typical usage of LARA-R2 series modules GPIOs can be the following:
Network indication provided over GPIO1 pin (see Figure 66 / Table 49 below) GNSS supply enable function provided by the GPIO2 pin (see section 2.6.4) GNSS Tx data ready function provided by the GPIO3 pin (see section 2.6.4) GNSS RTC sharing function provided by the GPIO4 pin (see section 2.6.4) SIM card detection provided over GPIO5 pin (see Figure 48 / Table 38 in section 2.5) Figure 66: Application circuit for network indication provided over GPIO1 Reference Description Part Number - Manufacturer R1 R2 R3 DL1 T1 10 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 47 k Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W 820 Resistor 0402 5% 0.1 W LED Red SMT 0603 NPN BJT Transistor Various manufacturers Various manufacturers Various manufacturers LTST-C190KRKT - Lite-on Technology Corporation BC847 - Infineon Table 49: Components for network indication application circuit Use transistors with at least an integrated resistor in the base pin or otherwise put a 10 k resistor on the board in series to the GPIO of LARA-R2 series modules. Do not apply voltage to any GPIO of the module before the switch-on of the GPIOs supply (V_INT), to avoid latch-up of circuits and allow a proper module boot. If the external signals connected to the module cannot be tri-stated or set low, insert a multi channel digital switch (e.g. TI SN74CB3Q16244, TS5A3159, TS5A63157) between the two-circuit connections and set to high impedance before V_INT switch-on. ESD sensitivity rating of the GPIO pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the lines are externally accessible and it can be achieved by mounting an ESD protection (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array) close to accessible points. If the GPIO pins are not used, they can be left unconnected on the application board. 2.8.1.2 Guidelines for GPIO layout design The general purpose input/output pins are generally not critical for layout. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 120 of 155 LARA-R2 seriesGPIO1R1R33V8Network IndicatorR216DL1T1 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.9 Reserved pins (RSVD) LARA-R2 series modules have pins reserved for future use, marked as RSVD. All the RSVD pins are to be left unconnected on the application board except the following RSVD pin, as described in Figure 67:
the RSVD pin number 33 that must be externally connected to ground Figure 67: Application circuit for the reserved pins (RSVD) 2.10 Module placement Optimize placement for minimum length of RF line and closer path from DC source for VCC. Make sure that the module, RF and analog parts / circuits are clearly separated from any possible source of radiated energy, including digital circuits that can radiate some digital frequency harmonics, which can produce Electro-Magnetic Interference affecting module, RF and analog parts / circuits performance or implement proper countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro-Magnetic Compatibility issue. Routing of noisy signals below the module, on the top layer of the application PCB, is not recommended. Make sure that the module, RF and analog parts / circuits, high speed digital circuits are clearly separated from any sensitive part / circuit which may be affected by Electro-Magnetic Interference or employ countermeasures to avoid any possible Electro-Magnetic Compatibility issue. Provide enough clearance between the module and any external part. The heat dissipation during continuous transmission at maximum power can significantly raise the temperature of the application base-board below the LARA-R2 series modules: avoid placing temperature sensitive devices close to the module. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 121 of 155 LARA-R233RSVDRSVD LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.11 Module footprint and paste mask Figure 68 and Table 50 describe the suggested footprint (i.e. copper mask) and paste mask layout for LARA modules: the proposed land pattern layout reflects the modules pins layout, while the proposed stencil apertures layout is slightly different (see the F, H, I, J, O parameters compared to the F, H, I, J, O ones). The Non Solder Mask Defined (NSMD) pad type is recommended over the Solder Mask Defined (SMD) pad type, implementing the solder mask opening 50 m larger per side than the corresponding copper pad. The recommended solder paste thickness is 150 m, according to application production process requirements. Figure 68: LARA-R2 series modules suggested footprint and paste mask (application board top view) Parameter Value A B C D E F1 F1 F2 26.0 mm 24.0 mm 2.60 mm 2.00 mm 6.50 mm 1.05 mm 1.00 mm 5.05 mm Parameter Value F2 G H H I I J J 5.00 mm 1.10 mm 0.80 mm 0.75 mm 1.50 mm 1.55 mm 0.30 mm 0.35 mm Parameter Value K L M1 M2 N O O 2.75 mm 6.75 mm 1.80 mm 3.60 mm 2.10 mm 1.10 mm 1.05 mm Table 50: LARA-R2 series modules suggested footprint and paste mask dimensions These are recommendations only and not specifications. The exact copper, solder and paste mask geometries, distances, stencil thicknesses and solder paste volumes must be adapted to the specific production processes (e.g. soldering etc.) of the customer. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 122 of 155 Foot-printTop ViewKM1M1M2EHJEBKGHJDADOOLNLIF1F2GGHHHGGPin 1ANT1ANT2KM1M1M2EHJEBKGHJDADOOLNLIF1F2GGHHHGGANT1ANT2Pin 1Paste-maskTop ViewJJJJ LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.12 Thermal guidelines Modules operating temperature range is specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. The most critical condition concerning module thermal performance is the uplink transmission at maximum power (data upload in connected-mode), when the baseband processor runs at full speed, radio circuits are all active and the RF power amplifier is driven to higher output RF power. This scenario is not often encountered in real networks (for example, see the Terminal Tx Power distribution for WCDMA, taken from operation on a live network, described in the GSMA TS.09 Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique [17]);
however the application should be correctly designed to cope with it. During transmission at maximum RF power the LARA-R2 series modules generate thermal power that may exceed 2 W: this is an indicative value since the exact generated power strictly depends on operating condition such as the actual antenna return loss, the number of allocated TX resource blocks, the transmitting frequency band, etc. The generated thermal power must be adequately dissipated through the thermal and mechanical design of the application. The spreading of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance (Rth,M-A) depends on the module operating condition. The overall temperature distribution is influenced by the configuration of the active components during the specific mode of operation and their different thermal resistance toward the case interface. The Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance value and the relative increase of module temperature will differ according to the specific mechanical deployments of the module, e.g. application PCB with different dimensions and characteristics, mechanical shells enclosure, or forced air flow. The increase of the thermal dissipation, i.e. the reduction of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance, will decrease the temperature of the modules internal circuitry for a given operating ambient temperature. This improves the device long-term reliability in particular for applications operating at high ambient temperature. Recommended hardware techniques to be used to improve heat dissipation in the application:
Connect each GND pin with solid ground layer of the application board and connect each ground area of the multilayer application board with complete thermal via stacked down to main ground layer. Provide a ground plane as wide as possible on the application board. Optimize antenna return loss, to optimize overall electrical performance of the module including a decrease of module thermal power. Optimize the thermal design of any high-power components included in the application, such as linear regulators and amplifiers, to optimize overall temperature distribution in the application device. Select the material, the thickness and the surface of the box (i.e. the mechanical enclosure) of the application device that integrates the module so that it provides good thermal dissipation. Further hardware techniques that may be considered to improve the heat dissipation in the application:
Force ventilation air-flow within mechanical enclosure. Provide a heat sink component attached to the module top side, with electrically insulated / high thermal conductivity adhesive, or on the backside of the application board, below the cellular module, as a large part of the heat is transported through the GND pads of the LARA-R2 series LGA modules and dissipated over the backside of the application board. For example, the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance (Rth,M-A) is strongly reduced with forced air ventilation and a heat-sink installed on the back of the application board, decreasing the module temperature variation. Beside the reduction of the Module-to-Ambient thermal resistance implemented by proper application hardware design, the increase of module temperature can be moderated by proper application software implementation:
Enable power saving configuration using the AT+UPSV command (see section 1.14.16). Enable module connected-mode for a given time period and then disable it for a time period enough long to properly mitigate temperature increase. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 123 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.13 ESD guidelines The sections 2.13.1 and 2.13.2 are related to EMC / ESD immunity. The modules are ESD sensitive devices and the ESD sensitivity for each pin (as Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F) is specified in LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. Special precautions are required when handling: see section 3.2 for handling guidelines. 2.13.1 ESD immunity test overview The immunity of devices integrating LARA-R2 series modules to Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) is part of the Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) conformity, which is required for products bearing the CE marking, compliant with the Radio Equipment Directive (2014/53/EU), the EMC Directive (2014/30/EU) and the Low Voltage Directive (2014/35/EU ) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms for device ESD immunity:
ESD testing standard CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [18] and the radio equipment standards ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19], ETSI EN 301 489-52 [20] , which requirements are summarized in Table 51. The ESD immunity test is performed at the enclosure port, defined by ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19] as the physical boundary through which the electromagnetic field radiates. If the device implements an integral antenna, the enclosure port is defined as all insulating and conductive surfaces housing the device. If the device implements a removable antenna, the antenna port can be separated from the enclosure port. The antenna port includes the antenna element and its interconnecting cable surfaces. The applicability of the ESD immunity test to the whole device depends on the device classification as defined by ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19]. Applicability of the ESD immunity test to the relative device ports or the relative interconnecting cables to auxiliary equipments, depends on device accessible interfaces and manufacturer requirements, as defined by ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19]. Contact discharges are performed at conductive surfaces, while air discharges are performed at insulating surfaces. Indirect contact discharges are performed on the measurement setup horizontal and vertical coupling planes as defined in CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [18]. For the definition of integral antenna, removable antenna, antenna port, device classification see ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19], whereas for contact and air discharges definitions see CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [18]. Application Category Immunity Level All exposed surfaces of the radio equipment and ancillary equipment in a representative configuration Contact Discharge Air Discharge 4 kV 8 kV Table 51: EMC / ESD immunity requirements as defined by CENELEC EN 61000-4-2, ETSI EN 301 489-1, 301 489-52 2.13.2 ESD immunity test of u-blox LARA-R2 series reference designs Although EMC / ESD certification is required for customized devices integrating LARA-R2 series modules for European Conformance CE mark, EMC certification (including ESD immunity) has been successfully performed on LARA-R2 series modules reference design according to European Norms summarized in Table 51. The EMC / ESD approved u-blox reference designs consist of a LARA-R2 series module installed onto a motherboard which provides supply interface, SIM card and communication port. External LTE/3G/2G antennas are connected to the provided connectors. Since an external antenna is used, the antenna port can be separated from the enclosure port. The reference design is not enclosed in a box so that the enclosure port is not indentified with physical surfaces. Therefore, some test cases cannot be applied. Only the antenna port is identified as accessible for direct ESD exposure. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 124 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Table 52 reports the u-blox LARA-R2 series reference designs ESD immunity test results, according to the CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 [18], ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19], 301 489-52 [20] test requirements. Category Contact Discharge to coupling planes
(indirect contact discharge) Contact Discharges to conducted surfaces
(direct contact discharge) Application Immunity Level Remarks Enclosure
+4 kV / 4 kV Enclosure port Not Applicable Antenna port
+4 kV / 4 kV Air Discharge at insulating surfaces Enclosure port Not Applicable Antenna port
+8 kV / 8 kV Test not applicable to u-blox reference design because it does not provide enclosure surface. The test is applicable only to equipments providing conductive enclosure surface. Test applicable to u-blox reference design because it provides antenna with conductive & insulating surfaces. The test is applicable only to equipments providing antenna with conductive surface. Test not applicable to the u-blox reference design because it does not provide an enclosure surface. The test is applicable only to equipments providing insulating enclosure surface. Test applicable to u-blox reference design because it provides antenna with conductive & insulating surfaces. The test is applicable only to equipments providing antenna with insulating surface. Table 52: Enclosure ESD immunity level of u-blox LARA-R2 series reference designs LARA-R2 series reference designs implement all the ESD precautions described in section 2.13.3. 2.13.3 ESD application circuits The application circuits described in this section are recommended and should be implemented in any device that integrates a LARA-R2 series module, according to the specific application board classification (see ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19]), to satisfy the requirements for ESD immunity test summarized in Table 51. Antenna interface The ANT1 port of LARA-R2 series modules provides ESD immunity up to 4 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 8 kV for Air Discharge: no further precaution to ESD immunity test is needed, as implemented in the EMC / ESD approved reference design of LARA-R2 series modules. The ANT2 port of LARA-R2 series modules, except LARA-R204 modules, provides ESD immunity up to 4 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 8 kV for Air Discharge: no further precaution to ESD immunity test is needed, as implemented in the EMC / ESD approved reference design of LARA-R2 series modules. The ANT2 port of LARA-R204 modules provides ESD immunity up to 1 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 2 kV for Air Discharge: higher protection level is required if the line is externally accessible on the device (i.e. the application board where the LARA-R204 module is mounted). The following precautions are suggested for satisfying ESD immunity test requirements for ANT2 port, using LARA-R204 modules:
If an embedded secondary antenna is used, the insulating enclosure of the device should provide protection up to 4 kV to direct contact discharge and up to 8 kV to air discharge to the secondary antenna interface If an external secondary antenna is used, the secondary antenna and its connecting cable should provide a completely insulated enclosure able to provide protection up to 4 kV to direct contact discharge and up to 8 kV to air discharge to the whole secondary antenna and cable surfaces, otherwise it is suggested to provide an external ultra low capacitance ESD protection (e.g. Infineon ESD0P2RF-02LRH) at the secondary antenna port, as described in Figure 45 and Table 35 (section 2.4). The antenna interface application circuit implemented in the EMC / ESD approved reference designs of LARA-R2 series modules is described in Figure 45 and Table 35 (section 2.4). UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 125 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual RESET_N pin The following precautions are suggested for the RESET_N line of LARA-R2 series modules, depending on the application board handling, to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements:
It is recommended to keep the connection line to RESET_N as short as possible Maximum ESD sensitivity rating of the RESET_N pin is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the RESET_N pin is externally accessible on the application board. The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level:
A general purpose ESD protection device (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array or EPCOS CT0402S14AHSG varistor) should be mounted on the RESET_N line, close to accessible point The RESET_N application circuit implemented in the EMC / ESD approved reference design of LARA-R2 series modules is described in Figure 40 and Table 31 (section 2.3.2). SIM interface The following precautions are suggested for LARA-R2 series modules SIM interface (VSIM, SIM_RST, SIM_IO, SIM_CLK), depending on the application board handling, to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements:
A bypass capacitor of about 22 pF to 47 pF (e.g. Murata GRM1555C1H470J) must be mounted on the lines connected to VSIM, SIM_RST, SIM_IO and SIM_CLK pins to assure SIM interface functionality when an electrostatic discharge is applied to the application board enclosure It is suggested to use as short as possible connection lines at SIM pins Maximum ESD sensitivity rating of SIM interface pins is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if SIM interface pins are externally accessible on the application board. The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level:
A low capacitance (i.e. less than 10 pF) ESD protection device (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140) should be mounted on each SIM interface line, close to accessible points (i.e. close to the SIM card holder) The SIM interface application circuit implemented in the EMC / ESD approved reference design of LARA-R2 series modules is described in Figure 48 and Table 38 (section 2.5). Other pins and interfaces All the module pins that are externally accessible on the device integrating LARA-R2 series module should be included in the ESD immunity test since they are considered to be a port as defined in ETSI EN 301 489-1 [19]. Depending on applicability, to satisfy ESD immunity test requirements according to ESD category level, all the module pins that are externally accessible should be protected up to 4 kV for direct Contact Discharge and up to 8 kV for Air Discharge applied to the enclosure surface. The maximum ESD sensitivity rating of all the other pins of the module is 1 kV (Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114). Higher protection level could be required if the related pin is externally accessible on the application board. The following precautions are suggested to achieve higher protection level:
USB interface: a very low capacitance (i.e. less or equal to 1 pF) ESD protection device (e.g. Tyco Electronics PESD0402-140 ESD protection device) should be mounted on the USB_D+ and USB_D- lines, close to the accessible points (i.e. close to the USB connector). Other pins: a general purpose ESD protection device (e.g. EPCOS CA05P4S14THSG varistor array or EPCOS CT0402S14AHSG varistor) should be mounted on the related line, close to accessible point. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 126 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.14 Schematic for LARA-R2 series module integration Figure 69 is an example of a schematic diagram where a LARA-R2 series cellular module 02 or 62 product version is integrated into an application board, using all the available interfaces and functions of the module. Figure 69: Example of schematic diagram to integrate a LARA-R2 module 02 or 62 product version using all interfaces UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 127 of 155 TXDRXDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGND12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND3V8GND330F10nF100nF56pFLARA-R2 series(02 or 62 product version)52VCC53VCC51VCC+100F2V_BCKPGNDGNDGNDRTC back-up1.8V DTEUSB 2.0 Host18RESET_NApplication ProcessorOpen Drain Output15PWR_ONOpen Drain OutputD+D-29USB_D+28USB_D-15pFTPTP00TPTP00TPTP47pFSIM Card HolderCCVCC (C1)CCVPP (C6)CCIO (C7)CCCLK (C3)CCRST (C2)GND (C5)47pF47pF100nF41VSIM39SIM_IO38SIM_CLK40SIM_RST47pFSW1 SW24V_INT42GPIO5470kESDESDESDESDESDESD1kTPV_INTSDIO_CMDSDIO_D0SDIO_D3SDIO_D146474849SDIO_D2SDIO_CLK4445VBUS / GPIO17VUSB_DET100nF62ANT259ANT_DET10kConnector27pFESDSecondary Cellular Antenna33pF82nH82nH56ConnectorPrimary Cellular Antenna33pFANT1GND16GPIO13V8Network IndicatorRSVD33RSVD99HSIC_DATA100HSIC_STRB21HOST_SELECTTPTP8.2pFMount for modules supporting 2GMount for modules supporting LTE band-7ESDV_INTBCLKLRCLKAudio Codec MAX9860SDINSDOUTSDASCL36I2S_CLK34I2S_WA35I2S_TXD37I2S_RXD19GPIO6MCLKIRQn10k10F1F100nFVDDSPKOUTPOUTNMICMICBIAS1F2.2k1F1FMICLNMICLPMICGND2.2kESDESDV_INT10nF10nFEMIEMI27pF27pF10nFEMIEMIESDESD27pF27pF10nF24GPIO3V_INTB1 A1GNDB2A2VCCBVCCASN74AVC2T245 Voltage Translator100nF100nF3V0TxD14.7kINOUTLDO RegulatorSHDNn4.7k3V83V023GPIO2V_INTSDA_A SDA_BGNDSCL_ASCL_BVCCAVCCBTCA9406DCURI2C Voltage Translator100nF100nF100nF47kSDA2SCL2VCCDIR1DIR2OEnOEGNDEXTINT0GPIO4254.7k4.7ku-blox GNSS3.0 V receiver26SDA27SCLGNDNot supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versionNot supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B product versionNot supported by LARA-R2 02 and 62 product versionsGPIOV_INT LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.15 Design-in checklist This section provides a design-in checklist. 2.15.1 Schematic checklist The following are the most important points for a simple schematic check:
DC supply must provide a nominal voltage at VCC pin within the operating range limits. DC supply must be capable of supporting both the highest peak and the highest averaged current consumption values in connected-mode, as specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. VCC voltage supply should be clean, with very low ripple/noise: provide the suggested bypass capacitors, in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna. Do not apply loads which might exceed the limit for maximum available current from V_INT supply. Check that voltage level of any connected pin does not exceed the relative operating range. Provide accessible test points directly connected to the following pins of the LARA-R2 series modules:
V_INT, PWR_ON and RESET_N for diagnostic purpose. Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each SIM signal to match the SIM specifications. Insert the suggested pF capacitors on each SIM signal and low capacitance ESD protections if accessible. Check UART signals direction, as the modules signal names follow ITU-T V.24 Recommendation [5]. Provide accessible test points directly connected to all the UART pins of the LARA-R2 series modules
(TXD, RXD, DTR, DCD) for diagnostic purpose, in particular providing a 0 series jumper on each line to detach each UART pin of the module from the DTE application processor. Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each high speed line of the USB interface. If the USB is not used, provide accessible test points directly connected to the USB interface (VUSB_DET, USB_D+ and USB_D- pins). Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on each high speed line of the HSIC interface. Consider providing appropriate low value series damping resistors on SDIO lines to avoid reflections. Add a proper pull-up resistor (e.g. 4.7 k) to V_INT or another proper 1.8 V supply on each DDC (I2C) interface line, if the interface is used. Check the digital audio interface specifications to connect a proper external audio device. Capacitance and series resistance must be limited on master clock output line and each I2S interface line Consider passive filtering parts on each used analog audio line. Use transistors with at least an integrated resistor in the base pin or otherwise put a 10 k resistor on the board in series to the GPIO when those are used to drive LEDs. Provide proper precautions for ESD immunity as required on the application board. Do not apply voltage to any generic digital interface pin of LARA-R2 series modules before the switch-on of the generic digital interface supply source (V_INT). All unused pins of LARA-R2 series modules can be left unconnected except the RSVD pin number 33, which must be connected to GND. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 128 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 2.15.2 Layout checklist The following are the most important points for a simple layout check:
Check 50 nominal characteristic impedance of the RF transmission line connected to the ANT1 and the ANT2 ports (antenna RF interfaces). Ensure no coupling occurs between the RF interface and noisy or sensitive signals (primarily analog audio input/output signals, SIM signals, high-speed digital lines such as SDIO, USB and other data lines). Optimize placement for minimum length of RF line. Check the footprint and paste mask designed for LARA-R2 series module as illustrated in section 2.11. VCC line should be wide and as short as possible. Route VCC supply line away from RF lines / parts and other sensitive analog lines / parts. The VCC bypass capacitors in the picoFarad range should be placed as close as possible to the VCC pins, in particular if the application device integrates an internal antenna. Ensure an optimal grounding connecting each GND pin with application board solid ground layer. Use as many vias as possible to connect the ground planes on multilayer application board, providing a dense line of vias at the edges of each ground area, in particular along RF and high speed lines. Keep routing short and minimize parasitic capacitance on the SIM lines to preserve signal integrity. USB_D+ / USB_D- traces should meet the characteristic impedance requirement (90 differential and 30 common mode) and should not be routed close to any RF line / part. HSIC traces has to be designed as 50 nominal characteristic impedance transmission lines Keep the SDIO traces short, avoid stubs, avoid coupling with any RF line / part and consider low value series damping resistors to avoid reflections and other losses in signal integrity. Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the Wi-Fi and Cellular technologies coexistence Ensure appropriate RF precautions for the GNSS and Cellular technologies coexistence as described in the GNSS Implementation Application Note [22]. Route analog audio signals away from noisy sources (primarily RF interface, VCC, switching supplies). The audio outputs lines on the application board must be wide enough to minimize series resistance 2.15.3 Antenna checklist Antenna termination should provide 50 characteristic impedance with V.S.W.R at least less than 3:1
(recommended 2:1) on operating bands in deployment geographical area. Follow the recommendations of the antenna producer for correct antenna installation and deployment
(PCB layout and matching circuitry). Ensure compliance with any regulatory agency RF radiation requirement, as reported in sections 4.2.2 and/or 4.3.1 for products marked with the FCC and/or IC. Ensure high and similar efficiency for both the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna. Ensure high isolation between the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna. Ensure low Envelope Correlation Coefficient between the primary (ANT1) and the secondary (ANT2) antenna: the 3D antenna radiation patterns should have radiation lobes in different directions. Ensure high isolation between the cellular antennas and any other antenna or transmitter. UBX-16010573 - R10 Design-in Page 129 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 3 Handling and soldering No natural rubbers, no hygroscopic materials or materials containing asbestos are employed. 3.1 Packaging, shipping, storage and moisture preconditioning For information pertaining to LARA-R2 series reels / tapes, Moisture Sensitivity levels (MSD), shipment and storage information, as well as drying for preconditioning, see the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1] and the u-blox Package Information Guide [25]. 3.2 Handling The LARA-R2 series modules are Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) sensitive devices. Ensure ESD precautions are implemented during handling of the module. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. The term is usually used in the electronics and other industries to describe momentary unwanted currents that may cause damage to electronic equipment. The ESD sensitivity for each pin of LARA-R2 series modules (as Human Body Model according to JESD22-A114F) is specified in the LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1]. ESD prevention is based on establishing an Electrostatic Protective Area (EPA). The EPA can be a small working station or a large manufacturing area. The main principle of an EPA is that there are no highly charging materials near ESD sensitive electronics, all conductive materials are grounded, workers are grounded, and charge build-up on ESD sensitive electronics is prevented. International standards are used to define typical EPA and can be obtained for example from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) or American National Standards Institute (ANSI). In addition to standard ESD safety practices, the following measures should be taken into account whenever handling the LARA-R2 series modules:
Unless there is a galvanic coupling between the local GND (i.e. the work table) and the PCB GND, then the first point of contact when handling the PCB must always be between the local GND and PCB GND. Before mounting an antenna patch, connect ground of the device. When handling the module, do not come into contact with any charged capacitors and be careful when contacting materials that can develop charges (e.g. patch antenna, coax cable, soldering iron,). To prevent electrostatic discharge through the RF pin, do not touch any exposed antenna area. If there is any risk that such exposed antenna area is touched in non ESD protected work area, implement proper ESD protection measures in the design. When soldering the module and patch antennas to the RF pin, make sure to use an ESD safe soldering iron. For more robust designs, employ additional ESD protection measures on the application device integrating the LARA-R2 series modules, as described in section 2.13.3. UBX-16010573 - R10 Handling and soldering Page 130 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 3.3 Soldering 3.3.1 Soldering paste Use of "No Clean" soldering paste is strongly recommended, as it does not require cleaning after the soldering process has taken place. The paste listed in the example below meets these criteria. Soldering Paste:
OM338 SAC405 / Nr.143714 (Cookson Electronics) Alloy specification:
95.5% Sn / 3.9% Ag / 0.6% Cu (95.5% Tin / 3.9% Silver / 0.6% Copper) 95.5% Sn / 4.0% Ag / 0.5% Cu (95.5% Tin / 4.0% Silver / 0.5% Copper) Melting Temperature: 217 C Stencil Thickness:
150 m for base boards The final choice of the soldering paste depends on the approved manufacturing procedures. The paste-mask geometry for applying soldering paste should meet the recommendations in section 2.11 The quality of the solder joints on the connectors (half vias) should meet the appropriate IPC specification. 3.3.2 Reflow soldering A convection type-soldering oven is strongly recommended over the infrared type radiation oven. Convection heated ovens allow precise control of the temperature and all parts will be heated up evenly, regardless of material properties, thickness of components and surface color. Consider the "IPC-7530 Guidelines for temperature profiling for mass soldering (reflow and wave) processes, published 2001". Reflow profiles are to be selected according to the following recommendations. Failure to observe these recommendations can result in severe damage to the device!
Preheat phase Initial heating of component leads and balls. Residual humidity will be dried out. Note that this preheat phase will not replace prior baking procedures. Temperature rise rate: max 3 C/s Time: 60 to 120 s End Temperature: 150 to 200 C Heating/ reflow phase If the temperature rise is too rapid in the preheat phase it may cause excessive slumping. If the preheat is insufficient, rather large solder balls tend to be generated. Conversely, if performed excessively, fine balls and large balls will be generated in clusters. If the temperature is too low, non-melting tends to be caused in areas containing large heat capacity. The temperature rises above the liquidus temperature of 217 C. Avoid a sudden rise in temperature as the slump of the paste could become worse. Limit time above 217 C liquidus temperature: 40 to 60 s Peak reflow temperature: 245 C Cooling phase A controlled cooling avoids negative metallurgical effects (solder becomes more brittle) of the solder and possible mechanical tensions in the products. Controlled cooling helps to achieve bright solder fillets with a good shape and low contact angle. Temperature fall rate: max 4 C/s UBX-16010573 - R10 Handling and soldering Page 131 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual To avoid falling off, modules should be placed on the topside of the motherboard during soldering. The soldering temperature profile chosen at the factory depends on additional external factors like choice of soldering paste, size, thickness and properties of the base board, etc. Exceeding the maximum soldering temperature and the maximum liquidus time limit in the recommended soldering profile may permanently damage the module. Figure 70: Recommended soldering profile LARA-R2 series modules must not be soldered with a damp heat process. 3.3.3 Optical inspection After soldering the LARA-R2 series modules, inspect the modules optically to verify that the module is properly aligned and centered. 3.3.4 Cleaning Cleaning the soldered modules is not recommended. Residues underneath the modules cannot be easily removed with a washing process. Cleaning with water will lead to capillary effects where water is absorbed in the gap between the baseboard and the module. The combination of residues of soldering flux and encapsulated water leads to short circuits or resistor-like interconnections between neighboring pads. Water will also damage the sticker and the ink-
jet printed text. Cleaning with alcohol or other organic solvents can result in soldering flux residues flooding into the two housings, areas that are not accessible for post-wash inspections. The solvent will also damage the sticker and the ink-jet printed text. Ultrasonic cleaning will permanently damage the module, in particular the quartz oscillators. For best results use a "no clean" soldering paste and eliminate the cleaning step after the soldering. UBX-16010573 - R10 Handling and soldering Page 132 of 155 PreheatHeatingCooling[C]Peak Temp. 245C[C]250250Liquidus Temperature21721720020040 - 60 sEnd Temp.max 4C/s150 - 200C150150max 3C/s60 - 120 s100Typical Leadfree100Soldering Profile5050Elapsed time [s]LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 3.3.5 Repeated reflow soldering Only a single reflow soldering process is encouraged for boards with a LARA-R2 series module populated on it. 3.3.6 Wave soldering Boards with combined through-hole technology (THT) components and surface-mount technology (SMT) devices require wave soldering to solder the THT components. Only a single wave soldering process is encouraged for boards populated with LARA-R2 series modules. 3.3.7 Hand soldering Hand soldering is not recommended. 3.3.8 Rework Rework is not recommended. Never attempt a rework on the module itself, e.g. replacing individual components. Such actions immediately terminate the warranty. 3.3.9 Conformal coating Certain applications employ a conformal coating of the PCB using HumiSeal or other related coating products. These materials affect the RF properties of the LARA-R2 series modules and it is important to prevent them from flowing into the module. The RF shields do not provide 100% protection for the module from coating liquids with low viscosity, therefore care is required in applying the coating. Conformal Coating of the module will void the warranty. 3.3.10 Casting If casting is required, use viscose or another type of silicon pottant. The OEM is strongly advised to qualify such processes in combination with the LARA-R2 series modules before implementing this in the production. Casting will void the warranty. 3.3.11 Grounding metal covers Attempts to improve grounding by soldering ground cables, wick or other forms of metal strips directly onto the EMI covers is done at the customer's own risk. The numerous ground pins should be sufficient to provide optimum immunity to interferences and noise. u-blox gives no warranty for damages to the LARA-R2 series modules caused by soldering metal cables or any other forms of metal strips directly onto the EMI covers. 3.3.12 Use of ultrasonic processes LARA-R2 series modules contain components which are sensitive to Ultrasonic Waves. Use of any Ultrasonic Processes (cleaning, welding etc.) may cause damage to the module. u-blox gives no warranty against damages to the LARA-R2 series modules caused by any Ultrasonic Processes. UBX-16010573 - R10 Handling and soldering Page 133 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4 Approvals For the complete list and specific details regarding the certification schemes approvals, see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1], or please contact the u-blox office or sales representative nearest you. 4.1 Product certification approval overview Product certification approval is the process of certifying that a product has passed all tests and criteria required by specifications, typically called certification schemes that can be divided into three distinct categories:
Regulatory certification o Country specific approval required by local government in most regions and countries, as:
CE (Conformit Europenne) marking for European Union FCC (Federal Communications Commission) approval for United States Industry certification o Telecom industry specific approval verifying the interoperability between devices and networks:
GCF (Global Certification Forum), partnership between device manufacturers and network operators to ensure and verify global interoperability between devices and networks PTCRB (PCS Type Certification Review Board), created by United States network operators to ensure and verify interoperability between devices and North America networks Operator certification o Operator specific approval required by some mobile network operator, as:
AT&T network operator in United States Verizon Wireless network operator in United States Even if the LARA-R2 series modules are approved under all major certification schemes, the application device that integrates the modules must be approved under all the certification schemes required by the specific application device to be deployed in the market. The required certification scheme approvals and relative testing specifications differ depending on the country or the region where the device that integrates LARA-R2 series modules must be deployed, on the relative vertical market of the device, on type, features and functionalities of the whole application device, and on the network operators where the device must operate. Check the appropriate applicability of the LARA-R2 series modules approvals while starting the certification process of the device integrating the module: the re-use of the u-blox cellular modules approval can significantly reduce the cost and time to market of the application device certification. The certification of the application device that integrates a LARA-R2 series module and the compliance of the application device with all the applicable certification schemes, directives and standards are the sole responsibility of the application device manufacturer. LARA-R2 series modules are certified according to capabilities and options stated in the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement document (PICS) of the module. The PICS, according to the 3GPP TS 51.010-2 [12], 3GPP TS 34.121-2 , 3GPP TS 36.521-2 [15] and 3GPP TS 36.523-2 [16], is a statement of the implemented and supported capabilities and options of a device. The PICS document of the application device integrating a LARA-R2 series module must be updated from the module PICS statement if any feature stated as supported by the module in its PICS document is not implemented or disabled in the application device. For more details regarding the AT commands settings that affect the PICS, see the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]. Check the specific settings required for mobile network operators approvals as they may differ from the AT commands settings defined in the module as integrated in the application device. UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 134 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4.2 US Federal Communications Commission notice United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) IDs:
u-blox LARA-R202 cellular modules:
XPY1EIQ24NN u-blox LARA-R203 cellular modules:
XPY1DIQN3NN u-blox LARA-R204 cellular modules:
XPY1EIQN2NN 4.2.1 Safety warnings review the structure Equipment for building-in. The requirements for fire enclosure must be evaluated in the end product The clearance and creepage current distances required by the end product must be withheld when the module is installed The cooling of the end product shall not negatively be influenced by the installation of the module Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss No natural rubbers, no hygroscopic materials nor materials containing asbestos are employed 4.2.2 Declaration of conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with the ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
this device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except in accordance with FCC procedures and as authorized in the module certification filing. The gain of the system antenna(s) used for the LARA-R2 series modules (i.e. the combined transmission line, connector, cable losses and radiating element gain) must not exceed the value specified in the FCC Grant for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations:
o LARA-R202 modules:
o 9.8 dBi in 700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12 band o 10.0 dBi in 850 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-5 or UMTS FDD-5 band o 6.5 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band o 8.7 dBi in 1900 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-2 or UMTS FDD-2 band o LARA-R203 modules:
o 9.7 dBi in 700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12 band o 7.1 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band o 10.5 dBi in 1900 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-2 band o LARA-R204 modules:
o 10.2 dBi in 750 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-13 band o 7.6 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 135 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4.2.3 Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by u-blox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the LARA-R2 series modules are authorized to use the FCC Grants of the LARA-R2 series modules for their own final products according to the conditions referenced in the certificates. The FCC Label shall in the above case be visible from the outside, or the host device shall bear a second label stating:
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN" resp.
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1DIQN3NN" resp.
"Contains FCC ID: XPY1EIQN2NN" resp. IMPORTANT: Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the LARA-R2 series modules are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own FCC Grant related to the specific portable device. This is mandatory to meet the SAR requirements for portable devices. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Additional Note: as per 47CFR15.105 this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
o Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna o Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver o Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected o Consultant the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 136 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4.3 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada notice ISED Canada (formerly known as IC - Industry Canada) Certification Numbers:
u-blox LARA-R202 cellular modules:
8595A-1EIQ24NN u-blox LARA-R203 cellular modules:
8595A-1DIQN3NN u-blox LARA-R204 cellular modules:
8595A-1EIQN2NN 4.3.1 Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with the ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
this device may not cause harmful interference this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized in the certification of the product. The gain of the system antenna(s) used for the LARA-R2 series modules (i.e. the combined transmission line, connector, cable losses and radiating element gain) must not exceed not exceed the value specified in the ISED Canada Certificate Grant for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations:
o LARA-R202 modules:
o 6.7 dBi in 700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12 band o 6.7 dBi in 850 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-5 or UMTS FDD-5 band o 6.5 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band o 8.7 dBi in 1900 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-2 or UMTS FDD-2 band o LARA-R203 modules:
o 6.6 dBi in 700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-12 band o 7.1 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band o 9.5 dBi in 1900 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-2 band o LARA-R204 modules:
o 7.0 dBi in 750 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-13 band o 7.6 dBi in 1700 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-4 band UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 137 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4.3.2 Modifications The ISED Canada requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by u-blox could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Manufacturers of mobile or fixed devices incorporating the LARA-R2 series modules are authorized to use the ISED Canada Certificates of the LARA-R2 series modules for their own final products according to the conditions referenced in the certificates. The ISED Canada Label shall in the above case be visible from the outside, or the host device shall bear a second label stating:
"Contains IC: 8595A-1EIQ24NN" resp.
"Contains IC: 8595A-1DIQN3NN" resp.
"Contains IC: 8595A-1EIQN2NN" resp. Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) Notices This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CAN ICES-3(B) / NMB-3(B) and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
o o this device may not cause interference this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the u-blox Cellular Module is below the Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) radio frequency exposure limits. The u-blox Cellular Module should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated and shown compliant with the ISED RF Exposure limits under mobile exposure conditions (antennas are greater than 20 cm from a person's body). This device has been certified for use in Canada. Status of the listing in the Innovation, Science and Economic Developments REL (Radio Equipment List) can be found at the following web address:
http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=eng Additional Canadian information on RF exposure also can be found at the following web address: http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08792.html IMPORTANT: Manufacturers of portable applications incorporating the LARA-R2 series modules are required to have their final product certified and apply for their own Innovation, Science and Economic Development Certificate related to the specific portable device. This is mandatory to meet the SAR requirements for portable devices. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 138 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Avis d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada (ISDE) Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme aux normes canadiennes CAN ICES-3(B) /
NMB-3(B) et CNR-210. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
o o cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences qui peuvent affecter son fonctionnement Informations concernant l'exposition aux frquences radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans fil u-blox Cellular Module est infrieure la limite d'exposition aux frquences radio d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada (ISDE). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil u-blox Cellular Module de faon minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce priphrique a t valu et dmontr conforme aux limites d'exposition aux frquences radio (RF) d'IC lorsqu'il est install dans des produits htes particuliers qui fonctionnent dans des conditions d'exposition des appareils mobiles (les antennes se situent plus de 20 centimtres du corps d'une personne). Ce priphrique est homologu pour l'entre correspondant lappareil dans la liste d'quipement radio (REL - Radio Equipment List) d'Industrie Canada rendez-vous sur:
l'utilisation au Canada. Pour consulter http://www.ic.gc.ca/app/sitt/reltel/srch/nwRdSrch.do?lang=fra Pour des informations supplmentaires concernant l'exposition aux RF au Canada rendez-vous sur: http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/fra/sf08792.html IMPORTANT: les fabricants d'applications portables contenant les modules LARA-R2 series doivent faire certifier leur produit final et dposer directement leur candidature pour une certification FCC ainsi que pour un certificat ISDE Canada dlivr par l'organisme charg de ce type d'appareil portable. Ceci est obligatoire afin d'tre en accord avec les exigences SAR pour les appareils portables. Tout changement ou modification non expressment approuv par la partie responsable de la certification peut annuler le droit d'utiliser l'quipement. UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 139 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 4.4 European Conformance CE mark LARA-R211 modules have been evaluated against the essential requirements of the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. In order to satisfy the essential requirements of the 2014/53/EU RED, the modules are compliant with the following standards:
Radio Spectrum Efficiency (Article 3.2):
o EN 301 511 o EN 301 908-1 o EN 301 908-13 Electromagnetic Compatibility (Article 3.1b):
o EN 301 489-1 o EN 301 489-52 Health and Safety (Article 3.1a) o EN 60950-1 o EN 62311 Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: this equipment complies with radiation exposure limits prescribed for an uncontrolled environment for fixed and mobile use conditions. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and the body of the user or nearby persons. This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except as authorized in the certification of the product. The gain of the system antenna(s) used for the LARA-R2 series modules (i.e. the combined transmission line, connector, cable losses and radiating element gain) must not exceed the following values for mobile and fixed or mobile operating configurations:
o LARA-R211 modules:
o 9.3 dBi in 800 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-20 band o 2.9 dBi in 900 MHz, i.e. GSM 900 band o 8.8 dBi in 1800 MHz, i.e. GSM 1800 or LTE FDD-3 band o 13.0 dBi in 2600 MHz, i.e. LTE FDD-7 band The conformity assessment procedure for the modules, referred to in Article 17 and detailed in Annex II of Directive 2014/53/EU, has been followed. Thus, the following marking is included in the product:
UBX-16010573 - R10 Approvals Page 140 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 5 Product testing 5.1 u-blox in-series production test u-blox focuses on high quality for its products. All units produced are fully tested automatically in production line. Stringent quality control process has been implemented in the production line. Defective units are analyzed in detail to improve the production quality. This is achieved with automatic test equipment (ATE) in production line, which logs all production and measurement data. A detailed test report for each unit can be generated from the system. Figure 71 illustrates typical automatic test equipment (ATE) in a production line. The following typical tests are among the production tests. Digital self-test (firmware download, Flash firmware verification, IMEI programming) Measurement of voltages and currents Adjustment of ADC measurement interfaces Functional tests (serial interface communication, SIM card communication) Digital tests (GPIOs and other interfaces) Measurement and calibration of RF characteristics in all supported bands (such as receiver S/N verification, frequency tuning of reference clock, calibration of transmitter and receiver power levels, etc.) Verification of RF characteristics after calibration (i.e. modulation accuracy, power levels, spectrum, etc. are checked to ensure they are all within tolerances when calibration parameters are applied) Figure 71: Automatic test equipment for module tests UBX-16010573 - R10 Product testing Page 141 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual 5.2 Test parameters for OEM manufacturer Because of the testing done by u-blox (with 100% coverage), an OEM manufacturer does not need to repeat firmware tests or measurements of the module RF performance or tests over analog and digital interfaces in their production test. An OEM manufacturer should focus on:
Module assembly on the device; it should be verified that:
o Soldering and handling process did not damaged the module components o All module pins are well soldered on device board o There are no short circuits between pins Component assembly on the device; it should be verified that:
o Communication with host controller can be established o The interfaces between module and device are working o Overall RF performance test of the device including antenna Dedicated tests can be implemented to check the device. For example, the measurement of module current consumption when set in a specified status can detect a short circuit if compared with a Golden Device result. In addition, module AT commands can be used to perform functional tests on digital interfaces (communication with host controller, check SIM interface, GPIOs, etc.), on audio interfaces (audio loop for test purposes can be enabled by the AT+UPAR=2 command as described in the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2]), and to perform RF performance tests (see the following section 5.2.2 for details). 5.2.1 Go/No go tests for integrated devices A Go/No go test is typically to compare the signal quality with a Golden Device in a location with excellent network coverage and known signal quality. This test should be performed after data connection has been established. AT+CSQ is the typical AT command used to check signal quality in term of RSSI. See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] for detail usage of the AT command. These kinds of test may be useful as a go/no go test but not for RF performance measurements. This test is suitable to check the functionality of communication with host controller, SIM card as well as power supply. It is also a means to verify if components at antenna interface are well soldered. 5.2.2 Functional tests providing RF operation The overall RF functional test of the device including the antenna can be performed with basic instruments such as a spectrum analyzer (or an RF power meter) and a signal generator with the assistance of AT+UTEST command over AT command user interface. The AT+UTEST command provides a simple interface to set the module to Rx or Tx test modes ignoring the cellular signaling protocol. The command can set the module into:
transmitting mode in a specified channel and power level in all supported modulation schemes and bands receiving mode in a specified channel to returns the measured power level in all supported bands See the u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] and the End user test Application Note [24], for the AT+UTEST command syntax description and examples of use. UBX-16010573 - R10 Product testing Page 142 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual This feature allows the measurement of the transmitter and receiver power levels to check component assembly related to the module antenna interface and to check other device interfaces from which depends the RF performance. To avoid module damage during transmitter test, a proper antenna according to module specifications or a 50 termination must be connected to ANT1 port. To avoid module damage during receiver test the maximum power level received at ANT1 and ANT2 ports must meet module specifications. The AT+UTEST command sets the module to emit RF power ignoring cellular signaling protocol. This emission can generate interference that can be prohibited by law in some countries. The use of this feature is intended for testing purpose in controlled environments by qualified user and must not be used during the normal module operation. Follow instructions suggested in u-blox documentation. u-blox assumes no responsibilities for the inappropriate use of this feature. Figure 72 illustrates a typical test setup for such RF functional test. Figure 72: Setup with spectrum analyzer or power meter and signal generator for radiated measurements UBX-16010573 - R10 Product testing Page 143 of 155 Application BoardLARA-R2 seriesANT1Application ProcessorAT commandsCellular antennaSpectrumAnalyzerorPowerMeterINWideband antennaTXApplication BoardLARA-R2 seriesANT1Application ProcessorAT commandsCellular antennasSignalGeneratorOUTWideband antennaRXANT2 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Appendix A Migration between SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 A.1 Overview Migrating between u-blox SARA-U2 series 3G / 2G cellular modules and LARA-R2 series LTE Cat 1 / 3G / 2G cellular modules is a straightforward procedure that allows customers to take maximum advantage of their hardware and software investments. The SARA cellular modules (26.0 x 16.0 mm, 96-pin LGA) have a different form factor than the LARA cellular modules (26.0 x 24.0 mm, 100-pin LGA), but the footprint of SARA and LARA modules has been developed to ensure layout compatibility as described in Figure 73, so that the modules can be alternatively mounted on the same single common application board. Figure 73: SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules pin layout and pin assignment SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules are basically pin-to-pin compatible, given that LARA-R2 series modules provide further additional functions and interfaces, as shown in Figure 73:
Secondary antenna SDIO interface HSIC interface HOST_SELECT function UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 144 of 155 646361605857555422506566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596CTSRTSDCDRIV_INTV_BCKPGNDCODEC_CLKRESET_NGPIO1PWR_ONRXDTXD111087542121191816151312320171496232526282931322427304344464749525333353638394142514845403734596256GNDGNDDSRDTRGNDVUSB_DETGNDUSB_DUSB_D+RSVDGNDGPIO2GPIO3SDASCLGPIO4GNDGNDGNDGNDVCCVCCRSVDI2S_TXDI2S_CLKSIM_CLKSIM_IOVSIMSIM_DETVCCSIM_RSTI2S_RXDI2S_WAGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDANT_DETANTSARA-U2Top ViewPin 65-96: GNDGNDRSVDRSVDRSVDRSVDRSVD RSVD646361605857555422506566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596CTSRTSDCDRIV_INTV_BCKPGNDGPIO6RESET_NGPIO1PWR_ONRXDTXD111087542121191816151312320171496232526282931322427304344464749525333353638394142514845403734596256GNDGNDDSRDTRGNDVUSB_DETGNDUSB_DUSB_D+RSVDGNDGPIO2GPIO3SDASCLGPIO4GNDGNDGNDGNDVCCVCCRSVDI2S_TXDI2S_CLKSIM_CLKSIM_IOVSIMGPIO5VCCSIM_RSTI2S_RXDI2S_WAGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDANT_DETANT2ANT1LARA-R2Top ViewPin 65-96: GND991009798RSVDRSVDHSIC_STRBHSIC_DATAHOST_SELECTSDIO_D2SDIO_CMDSDIO_D0SDIO_D1SDIO_D3SDIO_CLK LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual SARA and LARA modules are also form-factor compatible with u-blox LISA and TOBY cellular module families:
although SARA, LARA, LISA (33.2 x 22.4 mm, 76-pin LCC) and TOBY (35.6 x 24.8 mm, 152-pin LGA) modules each have different form factors, the footprints of all the SARA, LARA, LISA and TOBY modules have been developed to ensure layout compatibility. With the u-blox nested design solution, any SARA, LARA, LISA or TOBY module can be alternatively mounted on the same space of a single nested application board as described in Figure 74, enabling straightforward development of products supporting different cellular radio access technologies. Figure 74: Nested design concept description: SARA, LARA, LISA and TOBY modules alternatively mounted on the same PCB A different top-side stencil (paste mask) is needed for each form factor (SARA, LARA, LISA and TOBY) to be alternatively mounted on the same space of a single nested application board, as described in Figure 75. Figure 75: Top-side stencil (paste mask) designs to alternatively mount SARA, LARA, LISA and TOBY modules on the same PCB Detailed guidelines to implement a nested application board, comprehensive description of the u-blox reference nested design and detailed comparison between u-blox SARA, LARA, LISA and TOBY modules are provided in the Nested Design Application Note [26]. UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 145 of 155 LISA cellular moduleLARA cellular moduleSARA cellular moduleNested application boardTOBY cellular moduleLISA mounting optionwith LISA paste maskANT padTOBY mounting optionwith TOBY paste maskANT padSARA mounting optionwith SARA paste maskANT padANT padLARA mounting optionwith LARA paste maskLISATOBYSARALARA LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Table 53 summarizes the interfaces provided by SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules: all the interfaces provided by different modules are electrically compatible, so that the same compatible external circuit can be implemented on the application board. Module RF / Radio Access Technology Power System SIM Serial Audio Other y r o g e t a c A P D S H y r o g e t a c A P U S H l s s a c t o l s
-
i t l u M s d n a b G 3 s d n a b G 2 y t i s r e v d i x R n o i t c e t e D a n n e t n A n l l i y p p u s e u d o m C C V t u o l y p p u s V 8
. 1 T N _ V I P K C B _ V N O _ R W P N _ T E S E R l t c e e s t s o H V 0
. 3
/
V 8
. 1 M S I n o i t c e t e d M S I V 8 1
. T R A U 0
. 2 B S U I C S H V 8
. 1
) C 2 I
(
C D D V 8
. 1 O D S I n o i t a c d n i i k r o w t e N i o d u a l a t i g D i V 8 1
. s O P G I t u p t u o k c o C l l o r t n o c S S N G l o r t n o c i F
-
i W i o d u a g o a n A l 8 6 1,2,5 8,19 12 Quad 8 6 2,5 12 8 6 1,8 12 850 1900 900 1800 8 6 2,5 SARA-U201 SARA-U260 SARA-U270 SARA-U280 y r o g e t a c E T L s d n a b E T L LARA-R202 1 2,4 5,12 8 6 2,5 LARA-R203 1 2,4,12 LARA-R204 1 4,13 LARA-R211 1 3,7,20 LARA-R220 1 1,19 LARA-R280 1 3,8,28 8 6 1 12 900 1800
= supported by all product versions
= supported by all product versions except versions 02 and 62 Table 53: Summary of SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules interfaces UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 146 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Figure 76 summarizes the cellular operating frequency bands of SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules. Figure 76: Summary of SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules operating frequency bands UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 147 of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bands= 2G bands= LTE bandsLEGENDA800850900950170017501800185019001950200020502100215022008308901920217075025002550260026502700700800850900950170017501800185019001950200020502100215022007037502500255026002650270017103396070088II21702828111919 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual A.2 Pin-out comparison between SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 SARA-U2 Pin No Pin Name Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 GND V_BCKP GND V_INT GND DSR RI DCD DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD GND PWR_ON GPIO1 VUSB_DET RESET_N CODEC_CLK GND GND GND GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO4 Ground RTC Supply I/O Output characteristics:
1.8 V typ, 3 mA max Input op. range:
1.0 V 1.9 V Ground Interfaces Supply Out Output characteristics:
1.8 V typ, 50 mA max Ground UART DSR Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 1 mA UART RI Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 2 mA UART DCD Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 2 mA UART DTR Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~14 k UART RTS Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~8 k UART CTS Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA UART Data Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~8 k UART Data Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA Ground Power-on Input No internal pull-up L-level: -0.30 V 0.65 V H-level: 1.50 V 4.40 V ON L-level pulse time:
50 s min / 80 s max OFF L-level pulse time:
1 s min 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA USB Detect Input 5 V, Supply detection Reset signal 10 k internal pull-up L-level: -0.30 V 0.51 V H-level: 1.32 V 2.01 V Reset L-level pulse time:
50 ms min 1.8 V Clock Output Driver strength: 4 mA Ground Ground Ground 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 1 mA 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA 23 Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions UBX-16010573 - R10 LARA-R2 Pin Name GND V_BCKP GND V_INT GND DSR RI DCD DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD GND PWR_ON GPIO1 VUSB_DET RESET_N GPIO6 Description Ground RTC Supply I/O Output characteristics:
1.8 V typ, 3 mA max Input op. range:
1.0 V 1.9 V Ground Interfaces Supply Out Output characteristics:
1.8 V typ, 50 mA max Ground UART DSR Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA UART RI Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA UART DCD Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA UART DTR Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~7.5 k UART RTS Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~7.5 k UART CTS Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA UART Data Input 1.8 V, Internal pull-up: ~7.5 k UART Data Output 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA Remarks for migration No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference Ground Power-on Input 10 k internal pull-up to V_BCKP L-level: 0.30 V 0.54 V H-level: 1.26 V 2.10 V ON L-level pulse time:
50 s min OFF L-level pulse time:
1 s min 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA USB Detect Input 5 V, Supply detection Reset signal 10 k internal pull-up L-level: -0.30 V 0.51 V H-level: 1.32 V 2.01 V Reset L-level pulse time:
50 ms min 1.8 V Clock Output Driver strength: 6 mA External Internal pull-up Sligtlhy different input levels Function slightly different. No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference GND Ground HOST_SELECT 1.8 V pin for module / host configuration selection23 Ground 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA 1.8 V GPIO Driver strength: 6 mA GND GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO4 GND HOST_SELECT No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference Appendix Page 148 of 155 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51-53 54-55 56 57-58 59 60-61 62 63-96 97-98 99 100 SARA-U2 Pin No Pin Name 26 SDA 27 SCL Description I2C Data I/O 1.8 V, open drain Driver strength: 1 mA I2C Clock Output 1.8 V, open drain Driver strength: 1 mA USB Data I/O (D-) High-Speed USB 2.0 USB Data I/O (D+) High-Speed USB 2.0 Ground Reserved Ground Reserved To be externally connected to GND I2S Word Alignment I/O, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 2 mA I2S Data Output, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 2 mA I2S Clock I/O, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 2 mA I2S Data Input, or GPIO 1.8 V, Inner pull-down: ~9 k SIM Clock Output SIM Data I/O SIM Reset Output SIM Supply Output USB_D-
USB_D+
GND RSVD GND RSVD I2S_WA I2S_TXD I2S_CLK I2S_RXD SIM_CLK SIM_IO SIM_RST VSIM LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual LARA-R2 Pin Name SDA SCL USB_D-
USB_D+
GND RSVD GND RSVD I2S_WA I2S_TXD I2S_CLK I2S_RXD SIM_CLK SIM_IO SIM_RST VSIM Description I2C Data I/O 1.8 V, open drain Driver strength: 1 mA I2C Clock Output 1.8 V, open drain Driver strength: 1 mA USB Data I/O (D-) High-Speed USB 2.0 USB Data I/O (D+) High-Speed USB 2.0 Ground Reserved Ground Reserved To be externally connected to GND I2S Word Alignment I/O24, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA I2S Data Output24, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA I2S Clock I/O24, or GPIO 1.8 V, Driver strength: 6 mA I2S Data Input24, or GPIO 1.8 V, Inner pull-down: ~7.5 k SIM Clock Output SIM Data I/O SIM Reset Output SIM Supply Output Remarks for migration No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference No functional difference SIM_DET 1.8V SIM Detection SIM_DET 1.8 V GPIO settable as SIM Detection No functional difference GND RSVD RSVD RSVD RSVD RSVD RSVD GND VCC GND ANT GND GND GND Ground Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ground Module Supply Input Normal range: 3.3 V 4.4 V Extended range: 3.1 V 4.5 V Ground RF Antenna Input/Output Ground Ground Ground ANT_DET Antenna Detection Input GND Ground
-
-
-
Not Available Not Available Not Available GND SDIO_D2 SDIO_CLK SDIO_CMD SDIO_D0 SDIO_D3 SDIO_D1 GND VCC GND ANT1 GND Ground 1.8 V, SDIO serial data [2]25 1.8 V, SDIO serial clock25 1.8 V, SDIO command25 1.8 V, SDIO serial data [0]25 1.8 V, SDIO serial data [3]25 1.8 V, SDIO serial data [1]25 Ground RSVD SDIO RSVD SDIO RSVD SDIO RSVD SDIO RSVD SDIO RSVD SDIO Module Supply Input Normal range: 3.3 V 4.4 V Extended range: 3.0 V 4.5 V No functional difference Larger range for LARA-R2 Ground RF Antenna Input/Output (primary) No functional difference Ground ANT_DET Antenna Detection Input GND ANT_DET GND ANT2 GND RSVD HSIC_DATA HSIC_STRB Ground RF Antenna Input (secondary) ANT_DET ANT2 Ground Reserved HSIC USB data line25 HSIC USB strobe line25 No functional difference Not Available HSIC Not Available HSIC Table 54: SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules pin assignment with remarks for migration For further details regarding the characteristics, capabilities, usage or settings applicable for each interface of the SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 series modules, see LARA-R2 series Data Sheet [1], SARA-U2 series Data Sheet [27], SARA-G3 / SARA-U2 series System Integration Manual [28], u-blox AT Commands Manual [2] and Nested Design Application Note [26]. 24 Not supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B modules product versions. 25 Not supported by 02 and 62 product versions. UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 149 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual A.3 Schematic for SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 integration Figure 77 shows an example of schematic diagram where a SARA-U2 or a LARA-R2 series module can be integrated into the same application board, using all the available interfaces and functions of the modules. The different mounting options for the external parts are herein remarked according to the functions supported by each module. Figure 77: Example of complete schematic diagram to integrate SARA-U2 and LARA-R2 modules on the same application board UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 150 of 155 TXDRXDRTSCTSDTRDSRRIDCDGND12TXD9DTR13RXD10RTS11CTS6DSR7RI8DCDGND3V8GND330F10nF100nF56pFSARA-U2 series / LARA-R2 series52VCC53VCC51VCC+100F2V_BCKPGNDGNDGNDRTC back-up1.8V DTEUSB 2.0 Host16GPIO13V8Network Indicator18RESET_NApplication ProcessorOpen Drain Output15PWR_ONOpen Drain OutputD+D-29USB_D+28USB_D15pFRSVDGNDTPTP00TPTP00TPTP47pFSIM Card HolderCCVCC (C1)CCVPP (C6)CCIO (C7)CCCLK (C3)CCRST (C2)GND (C5)47pF47pF100nF41VSIM39SIM_IO38SIM_CLK40SIM_RST47pFSW1 SW24V_INT42SIM_DET / GPIO5470kESDESDESDESDESDESD1kTPV_INTRSVD / SDIO_CMDRSVD / SDIO_D0RSVD / SDIO_D3RSVD / SDIO_D146474849RSVD / SDIO_D2RSVD / SDIO_CLK4445VBUS17VUSB_DET100nF62ANT_DET / ANT259GND / ANT_DET10kConnector27pFESDSecondary Cellular Antenna33pF82nH82nH56ConnectorPrimary Cellular Antenna33pFANT / ANT1V_INTBCLKLRCLKAudio Codec MAX9860SDINSDOUTSDASCL36I2S_CLK34I2S_WA35I2S_TXD37I2S_RXD19CODEC_CLK / GPIO6MCLKIRQn10k10F1F100nFVDDSPKOUTPOUTNMICMICBIAS1F2.2k1F1FMICLNMICLPMICGND2.2kESDESDV_INT10nF10nFEMIEMI27pF27pF10nFEMIEMIESDESD27pF27pF10nF33RSVD99HSIC_DATA100HSIC_STRB21GND / HOST_SELECTTPTP8.2pFMount for modules supporting 2GMount for modules supporting LTE band-724GPIO3V_INTB1 A1GNDB2A2VCCBVCCASN74AVC2T245 Voltage Translator100nF100nF3V0TxD14.7kINOUTLDO RegulatorSHDNn4.7k3V83V023GPIO2V_INTSDA_A SDA_BGNDSCL_ASCL_BVCCAVCCBTCA9406DCURI2C Voltage Translator100nF100nF100nF47kSDA2SCL2VCCDIR1DIR2OEnOEGNDEXTINT0GPIO4254.7k4.7ku-blox GNSS3.0 V receiver26SDA27SCLGND100k010kMount forSARA-U2Mount forLARA-R2Mount forLARA-R20Mount forSARA-U20TP0TP0TP0TP0TP15pF39nH0for LARA-R20BLM18EG221SN1 for SARA-U201 0otherwiseMount forSARA-U2ESDNot supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R211-02B product versionNot supported by LARA-R204-02B and LARA-R220-62B product versionNot supported by LARA-R2 02 and 62 product versionsGPIOV_INT LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual B Glossary 3GPP 8-PSK 16QAM ACM ADC AP ASIC AT BAW CDC CSFB DC DCE DDC DL DRX DSP DTE EDGE EMC EMI ESD ESR FEM FOAT FOTA FTP FW GMSK GND GNSS GPIO GPRS GPS GSM HBM HSIC HSDPA HSUPA HTTP HW I/Q I2C I2S IP 3rd Generation Partnership Project 8 Phase-Shift Keying modulation 16-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Abstract Control Model Analog to Digital Converter Application Processor Application-Specific Integrated Circuit AT Command Interpreter Software Subsystem, or attention Bulk Acoustic Wave Communication Device Class Circuit Switched Fall-Back Direct Current Data Communication Equipment Display Data Channel interface Down-Link (Reception) Discontinuous Reception Digital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution Electro-magnetic Compatibility Electro-magnetic Interference Electro-static Discharge Equivalent Series Resistance Front End Module Firmware Over AT commands Firmware Over The Air File Transfer Protocol Firmware Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying modulation Ground Global Navigation Satellite System General Purpose Input Output General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Communication Human Body Model High Speed Inter Chip High Speed Downlink Packet Access High Speed Uplink Packet Access HyperText Transfer Protocol Hardware In phase and Quadrature Inter-Integrated Circuit interface Inter IC Sound interface Internet Protocol UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 151 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Leadless Chip Carrier Low-Dropout Land Grid Array Low Noise Amplifier Low Power Double Data Rate synchronous dynamic RAM memory Long Term Evolution Modulation Coding Scheme Not Applicable Network Control Model Original Equipment Manufacturer device: an application device integrating a u-blox cellular module Over The Air Power Amplifier Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Frequency Modulation Power Management Unit Pulse Width Modulation Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Radio Frequency Radiated Spurious Emission Real Time Clock Surface Acoustic Wave Secure Digital Input Output LCC LDO LGA LNA LPDDR LTE MCS N/A NCM OEM OTA PA PCM PFM PMU PWM QPSK RF RSE RTC SAW SDIO SDN / IN / PCN Sample Delivery Note / Information Note / Product Change Notification SIM SMS SMTP SRF TBD TCP TDMA TIS TP TRP UART UDP UICC UL UMTS USB UTRA VCO VoLTE VSWR Wi-Fi WLAN WWAN Subscriber Identification Module Short Message Service Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Self Resonant Frequency To Be Defined Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Multiple Access Total Isotropic Sensitivity Test-Point Total Radiated Power Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter User Datagram Protocol Universal Integrated Circuit Card Up-Link (Transmission) Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Universal Serial Bus UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice over LTE Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Wireless Local Area Network (IEEE 802.11 short range radio technology) Wireless Local Area Network (IEEE 802.11 short range radio technology) Wireless Wide Area Network (GSM / UMTS / LTE cellular radio technology) UBX-16010573 - R10 Appendix Page 152 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Related documents
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
u-blox LARA-R2 series Data Sheet, Docu No UBX-16005783 u-blox AT Commands Manual, Docu No UBX-13002752 u-blox EVK-R2xx User Guide, Docu No UBX-16016088 u-blox Windows Embedded OS USB Driver Installation Application Note, Docu No UBX-14003263 ITU-T Recommendation V.24 - 02-2000 - List of definitions for interchange circuits between the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and the Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE). http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-V.24-200002-I/en 3GPP TS 27.007 AT command set for User Equipment (UE) (Release 1999) 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment Data Circuit terminating; Equipment (DTE DCE) interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) (Release 1999) 3GPP TS 27.010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol (Release 1999) Universal Serial Bus Revision 2.0 specification, http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/usb20_docs/
High-Speed Inter-Chip USB Specification, Ver. 1.0, http://www.usb.org/developers/docs/usb20_docs/
I2C-bus specification and user manual - Rev. 5 - 9 October 2012 - NXP Semiconductors, http://www.nxp.com/documents/user_manual/UM10204.pdf 3GPP TS 51.010-2 Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network; Mobile Station (MS) conformance specification; Part 2: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) 3GPP TS 34.121-2 - Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception (FDD); Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS) 3GPP TS 36.521-1 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access; User Equipment conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 1: Conformance Testing 3GPP TS 36.521-2 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment conformance specification; Radio transmission and reception; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS) 3GPP TS 36.523-2 - Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC); User Equipment conformance specification; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS) GSM Association TS.09 - Battery Life Measurement and Current Consumption Technique https://www.gsma.com/newsroom/wp-content/uploads//TS.09_v10.0.pdf CENELEC EN 61000-4-2 (2001) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4-2: Testing and measurement techniques; Electrostatic discharge immunity test ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters; EMC standard for radio equipment and services; Part 1: Common technical requirements ETSI EN 301 489-52 "Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 52:
Specific conditions for Cellular Communication Mobile and portable (UE) radio and ancillary equipment"
u-blox Multiplexer Implementation Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001887 u-blox GNSS Implementation Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001849 u-blox Firmware Update Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001845 u-blox End user test Application Note, Docu No UBX-13001922 u-blox Package Information Guide, Docu No UBX-14001652 u-blox Nested Design Application Note, Docu No UBX-16007243 u-blox SARA-U2 series Data Sheet, Docu No UBX-13005287 u-blox SARA-G3 and SARA-U2 series System Integration Manual, Docu No UBX-13000995 Some of the above documents can be downloaded from u-blox web-site (http://www.u-blox.com). UBX-16010573 - R10 Related documents Page 153 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Revision history Revision Date Name Status / Comments R01 R02 R03 R04 20-Sep-2016 sses Initial release 11-Oct-2016 lpah Added LARA-R2 PTs information. PID of USB profile updated. 25-Nov-2016 sses Updated Power-on and Power-off sections. 17-Mar-2017 sses
"Disclosure restriction" replaces "Document status" on page 2 and document footer Updated GPRS / EDGE multi-slot class. Added maximum antenna gain for LARA-R204. Extended the document applicability to LARA-R202-02B and LARA-R203-02B. R05 19-Apr-2017 sses Updated LARA-R204-02B / LARA-R211-02B product status Added maximum antenna gain for LARA-R211. 29-May-2017 sses Updated LARA-R203-02B product status to Engineering Samples 30-Jun-2017 sses Extended document applicability to LARA-R220 and LARA-R280. Updated modem and application version for LARA-R202-02B. Updated CE approval section. 16-Aug-2017 sses Updated LARA-R203-02B, LARA-R220-62B and LARA-R280-02B product status. 22-Sep-2017 27-Oct-2017 sses sses Updated LARA-R202-02B product status. Updated LARA-R202-02B, LARA-R220-62B and LARA-R280-02B product status. R06 R07 R08 R09 R10 UBX-16010573 - R10 Revision history Page 154 of 155 LARA-R2 series - System Integration Manual Contact For complete contact information visit us at www.u-blox.com. u-blox Offices North, Central and South America u-blox America, Inc. Phone:
E-mail:
+1 703 483 3180 info_us@u-blox.com Regional Office West Coast:
Phone:
E-mail:
+1 408 573 3640 info_us@u-blox.com Technical Support:
Phone:
E-mail:
+1 703 483 3185 support_us@u-blox.com Headquarters Europe, Middle East, Africa u-blox AG Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+41 44 722 74 44 info@u-blox.com support@u-blox.com Documentation Feedback E-mail:
docsupport@u-blox.com Asia, Australia, Pacific u-blox Singapore Pte. Ltd. Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+65 6734 3811 info_ap@u-blox.com support_ap@u-blox.com Regional Office Australia:
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+61 2 8448 2016 info_anz@u-blox.com support_ap@u-blox.com Regional Office China (Beijing):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+86 10 68 133 545 info_cn@u-blox.com support_cn@u-blox.com Regional Office China (Chongqing):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+86 23 6815 1588 info_cn@u-blox.com support_cn@u-blox.com Regional Office China (Shanghai):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+86 21 6090 4832 info_cn@u-blox.com support_cn@u-blox.com Regional Office China (Shenzhen):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+86 755 8627 1083 info_cn@u-blox.com support_cn@u-blox.com Regional Office India:
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+91 80 4050 9200 info_in@u-blox.com support_in@u-blox.com Regional Office Japan (Osaka):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+81 6 6941 3660 info_jp@u-blox.com support_jp@u-blox.com Regional Office Japan (Tokyo):
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+81 3 5775 3850 info_jp@u-blox.com support_jp@u-blox.com Regional Office Korea:
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+82 2 542 0861 info_kr@u-blox.com support_kr@u-blox.com Regional Office Taiwan:
Phone:
E-mail:
Support:
+886 2 2657 1090 info_tw@u-blox.com support_tw@u-blox.com UBX-16010573 - R10 Contact Page 155 of 155
1 2 3 4 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.13 MiB | February 14 2020 |
G7 Technical User Manual CONTENTS OVERVIEW The Worlds first everything detector ........................................................................................... 4 Blackline Safety Network .................................................................................................................... 4 Blackline Live web portal .................................................................................................................... 5 G7 models .................................................................................................................................................. 6 Device comparison ................................................................................................................................. 7 Whats in the box .................................................................................................................................... 8 Hardware details ...................................................................................................................................... 9 INTERACTION How it works ............................................................................................................................................... 10 OPERATING Charging ...................................................................................................................................................... 11 Wearing ........................................................................................................................................................ 11 Power on ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Power off ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Connectivity light .................................................................................................................................... 13 Viewing G7s assigned user ................................................................................................................ 14 GAS DETECTION Bump test .................................................................................................................................................... 15 Calibration .................................................................................................................................................. 17 Bump test and calibration reminder window.......................................................................... 18 Bump test and calibration lock ........................................................................................................ 18 Zero sensors ................................................................................................................................................ 19 PID Target gases........................................................................................................................................ 19 GAS DETECTION FEATURES Yellow warning alarm gas features ................................................................................................ 20 Low warning alarm for gas ...................................................................................................... 20 Under limit ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Sensor error ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Calibration ....................................................................................................................................... 21 Bump test .......................................................................................................................................... 21 Pump block ...................................................................................................................................... 21 Red alert gas features ............................................................................................................................ 22 High alert for gas ........................................................................................................................... 22 STEL (short term exposure limit) alert ............................................................................... 22 TWA (time weighted average) alert .................................................................................... 23 OL (over limit) alert ...................................................................................................................... 23 CONFIGURATION MODES Available modes ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Entering a mode ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Exiting a mode .......................................................................................................................................... 25 CARTRIDGES Gas Cartridge replacement program ............................................................................................ 26 Changing cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 26 Cartridge care ............................................................................................................................................ 27 Cartridge safety precautions ............................................................................................................. 27 Multi-gas pump cartridge ................................................................................................................... 28 Using pump ..................................................................................................................................... 28 Pump options ................................................................................................................................. 29 REAL-TIME FEATURES Yellow pending alarm features ........................................................................................................ 30 Potential Fall detected ............................................................................................................... 30 Potential no-motion detected ............................................................................................... 31 Check-in request ........................................................................................................................... 31 Yellow warning alarm features ......................................................................................................... 32 Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 32 Speaker phone ............................................................................................................................... 33 Network connection interruption ....................................................................................... 33 Low battery ...................................................................................................................................... 33 Red alert features ..................................................................................................................................... 34 Fall detected .................................................................................................................................... 34 No-motion detected ................................................................................................................... 34 Missed check-in ............................................................................................................................. 35 SOS alert ............................................................................................................................................. 35 LiveResponse ............................................................................................................................................. 36 Push-to-talk (PTT) .................................................................................................................................... 37 Transmitting ..................................................................................................................................... 37 Receiving ........................................................................................................................................... 37 Available Channels ....................................................................................................................... 37 Changing channels ...................................................................................................................... 38 Changing volume ......................................................................................................................... 38 PTT audio Accessories ................................................................................................................ 39 FIRMWARE UPDATES Over-the-air (OTA) firmware updates ........................................................................................... 40 SUPPORT Learn more .................................................................................................................................................. 41 Customer Care ........................................................................................................................................... 41 SPECIFICATIONS Detailed specifications .......................................................................................................................... 42 LEGAL NOTICES AND CERTIFICATIONS Legal notices .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Intrinsically safe ......................................................................................................................................... 45 OVERVIEW THE WORLDS FIRST EVERYTHING DETECTOR What is G7 Insight?
G7 Insight is a simple solution that bundles industry-leading gas detection with automated compliance and business analytics tools. For the first time ever, the days of manually collecting data from the field, reviewing spreadsheets and compiling reports are behind you. With just a few minutes of connectivity per day, all data automatically recorded by G7 devices in the field is uploaded to the Blackline Safety Network for automatic compilation and report generation. What are real-time features?
Real-time safety monitoring leverages location technology, communications and live data to provide complete transparency and control over your safety program. Real-time features utilize G7 devices cellular or satellite connectivity, connecting people in the field with live monitoring teams in real time ensuring no call for help will ever go unanswered again. In the event of an safety incident or gas exposure, monitoring personnel can see what has happened, and communicate with workers directly via two-way voice calling or text messaging through their G7 device. BLACKLINE SAFETY NETWORK How am I connected?
The Blackline Safety Network is a cloud-hosted system comprised of 2G/3G cellular networks, satellite networks, our Blackline Live web portal application, your monitoring account and your G7. G7 devices require an active service plan in order to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. Depending on your needs and requirements, various service plan options are available such as 24/7 safety monitoring by Blacklines Safety Operations Center and two-way voice communication. Contact your organizations safety professional for more information regarding the details of your service plan. 4 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL BLACKLINE LIVE WEB PORTAL What is Blackline Live?
G7 utilizes the cloud-hosted Blackline Live web portal to monitor and manage all your workers and devices, as well as deliver reports and business analytics insights. With Blackline Lives real-time alerting and live map with employee locations, you can quickly locate and respond to a worker in distress. Real-time alerts show the employees location on the map with the type of alert, enabling your team to efficiently send help. Blackline Live also allows you to create and customize configuration profiles that determine how a device or a group of devices operates in the field. Similarly, alert profiles are set up to determine what contacts should be notified in the event of an incident and what response protocol monitoring personnel will follow to ensure your team gets the help it needs. Blackline Live keeps track of alert history, calibrations and bump tests, eliminating the need to manually retrieve data logs from the field. Blackline Live allows you to tailor user access depending on employee roles: employee, supervisor, administrator and monitoring team. This ensures that everyone has access to the right tools to accommodate their role in a comprehensive monitoring program. What is Blackline Analytics?
With Blackline Analytics, review data collected from your device fleet to make decisions, follow up with your team and ensure everything is running smoothly. Choose from a number of different reports and filters to explore your data. Blackline Analytics is built directly into the Blackline Live portal, allowing anyone with login access to see their own organizations data, as well as client data. If users have only been given access to specific groups of devices, they will only see data attached to those particular devices. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 5 G7 MODELS What G7 model do I have?
There are two G7 models: G7c and G7x. The main difference between them is how they connect to the Blackline Safety Network. If you are unsure of which G7 model you have, refer to the logo on the front of your G7. G7C G7X G7c works anywhere with 2G/3G cellular coverage in over 200 countries to connect you directly to the Blackline Safety Network. Depending on your service plan, your G7c may have two-way voice capabilities. G7x works in conjunction with Blacklines G7 Bridge a portable satellite base station that keeps you connected in remote locations outside cellular coverage. G7x uses a 900 MHz radio to communicate with G7 Bridge up to 2km away. One G7 Bridge can link up to five G7x devices to the Blackline Safety Network through Iridium satellite or cellular data. 6 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL DEVICE COMPARISON What features does my G7 have?
G7c and G7x are customized with one of four cartridge types. Cartridge selections include Standard, Single-gas, Multi-gas diffusion and Multi-gas pump cartridges. The following comparison chart summarizes the features of each cartridge. Text messaging Fall detection No-motion detection SOS alert Check-in timer Configuration modes Receive voice calls*
Push-to-talk enabled*
Single gas detection Multi gas detection Pump enabled Low warning alarm for gas Under limit alarm for gas High alert for gas STEL alert for gas TWA alert for gas Over limit alert for gas
*G7c devices only Standard Single Multi
(diffusion) Multi
(pump) l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 7 WHATS IN THE BOX Your G7 device comes with the following components:
G7 personal safety monitoring device Pre-installed cartridge (Standard, Single-gas or Multi-gas cartridge) Getting started guide Optional real-time features guide Charging system Removable charging clip USB cable USB power adapter Certification and support card If you have a Single-gas or Multi-gas cartridge you will also receive:
Single-gas or Multi-gas calibration cap (depending on your cartridge) Calibration gas tubing 8 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL HARDWARE DETAILS Cartridge (Standard, Single-gas or Multi-gas) LCD screen Up button OK OK button Power button Microphone (G7c only) Metal belt clip Charging port Top lights Pending and warning Alerts LiveResponse Connectivity light Speaker Down button Latch pull Latch push button Charging light Cartridge label Product label G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 9 INTERACTION HOW IT WORKS Interacting with G7 is easy with its high-visibility LCD display and three-button menu system. OK button Press OK to enter the main menu on the LCD screen and to confirm a menu selection. Up and down arrow buttons Press up or down to navigate the menu. Press and hold both simultaneously to mute a yellow warning alarm or red alert. Latch pull Pull down the latch to call for help when assistance is required. Latch push button Push the latch in to check in and tell your G7 that you are safe. 10 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL OPERATING CHARGING How do I charge my G7?
Insert the micro USB plug into the removable charging clip, then slide the clip onto the charging port at the bottom of your G7. A solid red light at the bottom of the device confirms your G7 is charging. The LCD screen will let you know when it is fully charged, which can take up to four hours. Blackline recommends that you fully charge your device after every shift. Charging port Removable charging clip Charging cable NOTE: If you have G7 PowerPack accessory attached to your device, simply slide the charging clip into PowerPacks charging port. Both PowerPack and G7 will be charged simultaneously. WEARING Where do I wear my device?
G7 monitors you best when clipped to your belt or chest pocket. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 11 POWER ON How do I turn on my G7c?
Press and hold the power button, and wait for the blinking green connectivity light to turn solid. When connected, the green light will remain solid. How do I turn on my G7x?
Press and hold the power button on your G7 Bridge to turn it on first, and wait for the blinking green connectivity light to turn solid, it takes approximately two minutes for G7 Bridge to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. When connected, the green light will remain solid. Press and hold the power button on your G7x. Wait for the blinking green connectivity light to turn solid. When connected, the green light will remain solid. NOTE: For best results, ensure your G7 Bridge is turned on before your G7x. If you are having difficulties connecting your G7x to G7 Bridge, please refer to your G7 Bridge manual. POWER OFF How do I turn off my G7c?
Press and hold the power button. The device will go into shutdown sequence, once all the lights and vibrations have stopped, you have been logged off from the Blackline Safety Network. How do I turn off my G7x?
Press and hold the power button of your G7x. The device will go into shutdown sequence, sending your log off status to G7 Bridge. When suitably powered, G7 Bridge can remain on at all times. When G7 Bridge is off, all connected devices will no longer be monitored. Before powering down, ensure there are no other G7x devices connected. Once confirmed, press and hold the power button on the G7 Bridge. The device will go into shutdown sequence. Your safety is no longer being monitored. NOTE: For more information, please refer to the G7 Bridge technical user manual. 12 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL CONNECTIVITY LIGHT Are you connected to the Blackline Safety Network?
G7 lets you know your connection status. Blinking/Solid Blinking green light A blinking connectivity light indicates that your G7 is storing data. It is not currently connected to the network and will send data when the light is solid. Solid green light A solid connectivity light indicates that G7 is actively transmitting data and is connected to the Blackline Safety Network. Sound and vibration Configurable to sound an alarm if connection is lost after 5 minutes. NOTE: If you are using real-time features, your safety is only monitored when the connectivity light is solid. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 13 VIEWING G7S ASSIGNED USER What is an assigned user?
G7 can be assigned a team member in Blackline Live. From Blackline Live, there is also the option to display the assigned user on the device, which allows you to identify which device belongs to which user. G7 does not have to be assigned a user to function as a safety monitor or gas detector. Where can I see G7s assigned user?
When the display assigned user on device option is enabled from Blackline Live, G7 will show the assigned team member in three places (as seen in the figures below):
On startup On the charging screen In G7s menu, under advanced info > user info On the user info screen, you will also see a team members employee ID, if it has been added in Blackline Live. Startup Charging screen Advanced info > user info 14 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL GAS DETECTION Included with your G7 Single-gas or Multi-gas cartridge is a calibration cap and tubing for bump tests and calibrations. Alternatively, bump tests and calibrations can be completed using a G7 Dock. Only perform bump test and calibrations in a safe environment. For more information and instructions on bumping or calibrating with G7 Dock, refer to the G7 Dock technical user manual. BUMP TEST What is a bump test?
It is safe practice to regularly test gas sensors by applying the target gas. G7s bump test also tests the operation of light, sound and vibration indicators. The bump test schedule depends on your companys safety policy. G7 automatically communicates bump test data to the Blackline Safety Network, and will remind you when a bump test is overdue. The bump test schedule is configurable. NOTE: To meet CSA LEL performance standard, you are required to bump test before each days use. Blackline recommends you do not exceed 30 days without a bump test. How do I bump test?
1. Attach tubing to the calibration cap 2. Ensure the other end of the tubing is attached to a fixed flow regulator on the gas tank 3. On your G7, press the OK button to enter the main menu 4. Use the arrow buttons to navigate to gas options, press OK 5. Use the arrow buttons to navigate to bump test, press OK 6. Press the up arrow to continue 7. G7 performs an automatic audio and visual assessment to test vibration and lights 8. You can individually choose which sensors to test. By default, G7 will test all sensors. 9. Attach the calibration cap to your device 10. G7 will begin to count down from 60. Apply the gas within this time window. 11. Turn gas off when prompted on your G7 screen 12. Press the OK button to complete bump test 13. G7 will let you know if the bump test has passed or failed, and when your next bump test is due 14. Remove the calibration cap and let your G7 sit until the readings stabilize and your G7 has returned to baseline NOTE: If you see a bump test fail message on your LCD screen, try the calibration again. If the error persists, please contact our Customer Care team. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 15 Tubing Single-gas calibration cap Tubing Multi-gas calibration cap 16 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL CALIBRATION What is calibration?
Gas sensors periodically need to be calibrated by applying a known concentration of gas for a set amount of time. This procedure ensures the gas sensor can accurately detect gas levels throughout its operating life. The calibration schedule depends on your companys safety policy. Blackline recommends not exceeding 180 days without a calibration. How do I calibrate?
1. Attach tubing to the calibration cap 2. Ensure the other end of the tubing is attached to a fixed flow regulator on the gas tank 3. On your G7, press the OK button to enter the main menu 4. Use the arrow buttons to navigate to gas options, press OK 5. Use the arrow buttons to navigate to calibration, press OK 6. Press the up arrow to continue 7. G7 performs an automatic audio and visual assessment to test vibration and lights 8. You can individually choose which sensors to test. By default, G7 will test all sensors. 9. Attach the calibration cap to your device 10. G7 will begin to count down from 60. Apply the gas within this time window and continue to apply gas for 2 minutes. 11. Turn gas off when prompted on your G7 screen 12. Press the OK button to complete calibration 13. G7 will let you know if the calibration has passed or failed, and when your next calibration is due 14. Remove the calibration cap and let your G7 sit until the readings stabilize and your G7 is calibrated NOTE: If you see a calibration fail message on your LCD screen, try the calibration again. If the error persists, please contact our Customer Care team. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 17 BUMP TEST & CALIBRATION REMINDER WINDOW What is the bump test and calibration reminder window?
A bump test and calibration reminder window can be customized from G7s configuration profile in Blackline Live. This setting will prompt the device to show a bump test or calibration reminder alarm upon startup if one of these tests is due within the configured window of time. What is the purpose of the bump test and calibration reminder window?
Enabling this feature will help ensure G7 goes into alarm upon startup instead of while it is in use in the field. If you have a daily bump interval your bump test will be due in 24 hours. However, if you start your shift 2 hours early the following day, you will not be prompted to bump your device as 24 hours has not elapsed. When it becomes due, you may already be out in the field without bump test materials. If you have a 2 hour bump test/calibration reminder window, G7 will go into yellow warning alarm for bump test due on startup when the bump is due within this 2 hour window. BUMP TEST AND CALIBRATION LOCK What is the bump test and calibration lock?
In the case that an organization wants to make the device unusable when it is out of compliance, the calibration or bump test lock can be enabled from G7s configuration profile in Blackline Live. This feature locks the devices screen and all functionality when a bump test or calibration is due on startup. This means the user cannot use their device in any capacity (including gas readings, SOS latch, message sending) until it has been bump tested or calibrated. What if a bump test or calibration is due during my shift?
If a bump test or calibration comes due during your shift (not on startup), the device will not lock as this is a safety hazard, since the user will not be able to use G7 to call for help. The device will go into a yellow warning alarm for bump test or calibration due, and the message will display in the banner, but the device will remain fully functional. 18 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL ZERO SENSORS What is zeroing?
If G7 is not reading zero and you know you are in an atmosphere with no gas, your gas sensor readings may have shifted. If this happens, it is best to calibrate your sensors. If you are unable to preform a calibration, you can zero your sensors to reset the baseline. G7 can be configured to automatically or manually zero on start-up when you turn on your device from the configuration profile in Blackline Live. NOTE: The baseline reading for oxygen is 20.9. How do I zero sensors?
1. On your G7, press the OK button to open the main menu 2. Press the arrow buttons to navigate to gas options, press OK 3. Use the arrow buttons to navigate to zero sensors, press OK 4. Press the up arrow to begin zeroing. Do not apply any gas. 5. The LCD screen will let you know once zero is complete NOTE: If you see a zero incomplete message on your LCD screen you may be in an environment with gas levels, or your cartridge may need replacement. PID TARGET GASES What are target gases?
Photoionization (PID) sensors can be used to detect a large range of gases. A target gas refers to the specific gas you are using trying to detect. G7s readings will be adjusted based on the target gas it is configured to detect. How do I set G7s target gas?
G7s PID sensors target gas is set from the configuration profile in Blackline Live. Under the photoionization detector section of the gas sensor settings card, you can choose an existing target gas or set a custom target gas. Where do I see which target gas G7 is detecting?
The target gas G7 is configured to use can be seen in two places:
On startup In the gas options menu, under gas info > VOC target In both of these places, G7s screen will display the target gases name, as well as its correction factor. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 19 GAS DETECTION FEATURES Once you have completed a bump test and calibration, G7 is ready to monitor and notify you of gas exposure. Gas detection alarms will notify you with either a yellow warning alarm or a red alert depending on the gas level measured. All settings are customizable in Blackline Live. Speak to your safety supervisor to learn about how your gas features are configured. YELLOW WARNING ALARM GAS FEATURES Rapid Blinking LOW WARNING ALARM FOR GAS When does G7 trigger a low yellow warning alarm for gas?
When gas levels reach the low concentration threshold configured by your safety supervisor, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm every two minutes until gas levels are reduced. NOTE: A G7 with O2 sensors will trigger low warning alarms in oxygen-deficient and oxygen-enriched atmospheres. An oxygen-deficient atmosphere poses a risk of insufficient oxygen for breathing. An oxygen-enriched atmosphere presents an increased risk of explosion. 20 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL UNDER LIMIT When does G7 trigger an under limit yellow warning alarm?
If a gas sensors baseline shifts, its reading will shift accordingly and become unreliable. When this happens, the presence of gas can still be measured, but cannot be converted into an accurate reading. G7 will inform you of such an event with a yellow warning alarm. A calibration will be required to ensure the sensors are accurately detecting gas levels. If you are unable to perform a calibration and are in a clean atmosphere, you can zero your sensors to reset the baseline. SENSOR ERROR When does G7 trigger a sensor error yellow warning alarm?
If a gas sensor stops working for any reason, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. An X on your LCD screen will indicate which sensor or sensors are generating the error message. Power off and restart your G7. If the sensor error warning persists, perform a calibration. If this does not correct the problem, you will need to replace your cartridge. CALIBRATION When does G7 trigger a calibration yellow warning alarm?
When gas sensors are due for a calibration, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. BUMP TEST When does G7 trigger a bump test yellow warning alarm?
When gas sensors are due for a bump test, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. PUMP BLOCK When does G7 trigger a pump block yellow warning alarm?
If your pump inlet is blocked, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. What do I do in the case of a yellow warning alarm?
Read your G7 screen. Press and hold the up and down arrow buttons at the same time to let your G7 know you have read the message. Yellow warning alarms are between you and G7, and will not notify monitoring personnel if you are using real-time features. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 21 RED ALERT GAS FEATURES Rapid Blinking HIGH ALERT FOR GAS When does G7 trigger a high alert for gas?
If a gas sensor detects gas levels above the high gas concentration threshold configured by your safety supervisor. NOTE: A G7 with O2 sensors will trigger red alerts in both oxygen-deficient and oxygen-
enriched situations. STEL (SHORT TERM EXPOSURE LIMIT) ALERT When does G7 trigger a STEL alert?
If a gas sensor detects you have reached the short-term exposure limit configured by your safety supervisor. This limit is the gas concentration that you can be continuously exposed to for a 15-minute time frame without suffering adverse health effects. 22 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL TWA (TIME WEIGHTED AVERAGE) ALERT When does G7 trigger a TWA alert?
If a toxic sensor detects you have exceeded the average allowable amount of gas during an eight-hour period. NOTE: The two TWA measuring methods available for use on your G7 are:
OSHA (United States Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration) or ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). OSHA is defined as a rolling average of gas exposure accumulated over an eight-hour period of operation. If the worker is in the field longer, the most recent eight-hour cumulative value is used. ACGIH is defined as the total accumulated average, from four to 16 hours as configured by your safety supervisor. OL (OVER LIMIT) ALERT When does G7 trigger an OL alert?
If a gas sensor detects an excessive amount of gas and can no longer give you an accurate reading. NOTE: STEL, LEL and peak readings are reset on power cycle unless configured to resume readings in G7s configuration profile in Blackline Live. What do I do in the case of a red alert?
Evacuate the area and follow your emergency safety protocol. Read the information on your G7 screen. Press and hold the up and down arrow buttons at the same time to mute the sound and vibration. The sound and vibration will return after one minute. This will continue until gas levels or averages have reduced or returned to acceptable concentrations. For real-time users, red alerts are immediately communicated to monitoring personnel. Muting sound and vibration does not cancel the remote alert sent to monitoring personnel. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 23 CONFIGURATION MODES Configuration modes are customized in the G7 configuration profile on Blackline Live. Each profile supports up to a total of five modes . These modes allow G7 to temporarily change its behavior for different situations, and can be turned on and off through G7s interface. AVAILABLE MODES Normal This mode is the configuration you determine for everyday operation. G7 will operate using this mode as a default. Pre-entry Pre-entry mode is used before entering a space that could potentially contain dangerous gas. This mode can be used with or without a pump cartridge, which will actively draw surrounding air to its sensors and test gas levels. SCBA This mode is meant to be used when the device user is wearing a self-contained or supplied air breathing apparatus (SCBA/SABA) and is entering an area that is known to have high gas levels. Leak check Leak check mode can be used when checking for gas leaks in a particular area. This mode like pre-entry mode can be used with or without a pump cartridge. High risk This mode is unique in that it is meant for general high-risk situations, such as an evacuation or travelling through a dangerous area. Unlike the other modes, you will never be timed out and must exit it manually. Pump run This mode is unique in that a multi-gas pump cartridge is required to use this mode, and it runs the pump continuously such as for use in a hole-watch situation. Unlike the other modes, you will never be timed out and must exit it manually. ENTERING A MODE How do I enter a mode?
To use a mode, it must first be enabled in G7s configuration profile on Blackline Live. Entering a mode can be done from G7s main menu or main status screen. 24 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL To enter a mode from the modes menu:
1. Press OK to enter G7s main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to modes 3. Press OK to enter the modes menu 4. Select the mode you wish to enter 5. Confirm that you want to enter the mode by selecting yes 6. G7s screen will invert and your information banner will display your current mode To enter a mode from the main status screen:
1. Press the up or down arrow to open G7s secondary menu 2. Continue to press the up or down arrow until you reach your desired mode 3. Press OK to enter the mode 4. G7s screen will invert and your information banner will display your current mode EXITING A MODE How do I exit a mode?
When youd like to return the device to normal operation, you will need to exit the configuration mode you are currently in. Exiting a mode can be done from G7s main menu or main status screen. To exit from the modes menu:
1. Press OK to enter G7s main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to modes 3. Press OK to enter the modes menu 4. Select normal mode 5. Confirm that you want to return to normal mode by selecting yes 6. G7 will return to normal function To exit from the main status screen:
1. Press the up or down arrow to open G7s secondary menu 2. Press OK to exit the mode 3. G7 will return to normal function What is a mode timeout?
Each configuration mode (excluding normal and high risk mode) has a timeout period. After this time period has elapsed, you will be asked if you would like to continue in this mode. If you select yes, your mode will be extended. If you select no, G7 will return to normal operation. If you do not make a selection within 30 seconds, G7 will automatically return to normal operation. If you have a check-in timer enabled, G7 will immediately ask you to check in. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 25 CARTRIDGES GAS CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT PROGRAM What do I do when I need a new gas cartridge?
If you have an uninterrupted service plan for your G7 gas cartridge, Blackline will replace expired cartridges for you free of charge. To inquire about or request new cartridges, please contact our Customer Care team or your distributor. CHANGING CARTRIDGES How do I change my G7 cartridge?
1. Power off G7 2. Using a Phillips #1 screwdriver, remove the screws on each side of the device 3. Pull up on the cartridge 4. Slide a new cartridge onto G7, ensuring the cartridge clicks into place 5. Replace screws into each side of the device NOTE: Cartridges should always be replaced with a manual (not electric) screwdriver in order to avoid damage to the devices plastics. 26 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL CARTRIDGE CARE Sensor contaminants Gas sensors are susceptible to contamination by a variety of common chemicals, reducing or eliminating their sensitivity. Care should be taken when using silicones, cleaners, solvents and lubricants in close proximity to sensors as exposure may cause permanent damage to the sensor. If a device is exposed to a new chemical or compound, it is best practice to bump test and calibrate units to ensure proper sensor function is maintained. LEL SENSOR PRECAUTIONS For safety reasons this equipment must be operated and serviced by qualified personnel only. Read and understand instruction manual completely before operating or servicing. With pellistor technology (LEL-P), any rapid up-scale reading followed by declining or erratic reading may indicate a gas concentration beyond upper scale limit which may be hazardous. High off-scale readings may indicate an explosive concentration. Calibrations must only be performed in areas free of flammable gasses. Blacklines NDIR sensor does not detect Hydrogen or Acetylene. Like any gas sensor, please be sure you understand your potential explosive hazards and choose the appropriate sensor technology based on these hazards. Blacklines LEL-MPS sensor does not require calibration. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 27 MULTI-GAS PUMP CARTRIDGE USING PUMP How do I turn pump on?
1. Ensure G7 is equipped with a multi-pump cartridge and pumped modes, such as pre-entry, leak check or pump run 2. From G7s main or secondary menu, select the pumped mode you wish to enter 3. Attach tubing, and perform a block test by following the instructions on G7s screen 4. G7s screen will invert, and the pump icon will show in the info bar to let you know pump is running 1:48 Pump on Hose L: 5m
~300 ml/min. Sample 75 sec. How do I turn pump off?
To turn pump off, enter any non-pumped mode, such as normal, SCBA or high risk mode. Where do I see my pump details?
When a pump cartridge is attached to G7, you can see the pump status screen by pressing the up or down arrow from G7s main screen. Here you can see if pump is on or off, your hose length, flow rate and sample time (if enabled). How do I bump test or calibrate my pumped cartridge?
Manually bump testing and calibrating pump cartridges is done using the same calibration cap and method as G7s multi-gas cartridge. Please refer to page 14-16 of this manual for step-by-step instructions. G7 cannot be bump tested or calibrated through the pump itself. Bump testing and calibrating with a G7 Dock requires an updated G7 Dock unit. You can tell if your Dock is an updated unit by checking that its unit ID is Dock-P. How do I perform a block test?
You will be asked to perform a block test upon entering any pumped mode, such as leak check, pre-entry or pump run. Follow the steps on G7s screen to complete the block test. If you do not pass the block test, you will not be able to enter the mode. IMPORTANT: When performing an automatic block test, G7 is in a safe mode where gas alerts will not be triggered. This prevents triggering false alerts from residual gas in the tubing. When you are in a pumped mode, you can perform a manual block test at any time by plugging G7s inlet. This will cause G7 to go into yellow warning alarm, and your screen will let you know that your pump is blocked. Unplug your inlet, and if the warning alarm silences, you know that your equipment is safe to use. 28 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL What is flow rate?
Flow rate is the speed at which air is passing over your devices sensors. In order to provide accurate gas readings, flow rate needs to be above 150 ml/min. A flow rate less than 150 ml/min will result in a pump block yellow warning alarm. By default, Blacklines pump aims to maintain a flow rate of 300ml/min and G7 will automatically adjust its pump speed to maintain this rate. PUMP OPTIONS Settings for pump can be found in G7s main menu, under settings > pump options. What is the sample timer?
The sample timer is the amount of time it takes for one air sample to be pumped to your sensors. This calculation is based on your hose length. If sample timer is enabled, the pump status screen will show a countdown and beep once when a sample cycle has completed. The sample cycle will repeat continuously until you turn pump off. If disabled, the sample timer will not show and the device will not beep, and pump will continue to function normally. Blackline recommends a 120 second sample time for 10 feet of tubing, with an additional second per foot of tubing. How do I enable or disable the sample timer?
1. Press OK to enter G7s main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to settings, press OK 3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to pump options, press OK 4. The menu will display the current status of your sample timer. Select sample timer off or sample timer on. 5. Select yes to confirm that you would like to enable or disable the sample timer What is hose length?
Hose length is an estimate of how long the tubing attached to pump is. This value is customizable from the pump options menu, and factors in to sample time. G7s multi-
gas pump cartridge supports a maximum of 99 feet of tubing. How do I change hose length?
1. Press OK to enter G7s main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to settings and press OK 3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to pump options and press OK 4. Select hose length 5. Use the up and down arrows to choose your units, meters or feet, and press OK 6. Use the up and down arrow to enter the first digit of your length and press OK 7. Use the up and down arrow to enter the second digit of your length and press OK 8. Select yes to confirm your length or select edit to make changes to your choice G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 29 REAL-TIME FEATURES Your G7 can be equipped with many features to monitor your safety. They are categorized into the type of notifications they trigger yellow pending alarms, yellow warning alarms, and red alerts. All are customizable in Blackline Live to best fit your needs. Speak to your safety supervisor to learn about how your G7 features are configured. YELLOW PENDING ALARM FEATURES Blinking POTENTIAL FALL DETECTED What is a potential fall detected?
Your device is constantly monitoring you for falls. If a potential fall is detected, G7 will initiate a yellow pending alarm. The fall detection sensitivity is configurable. 30 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL POTENTIAL NO-MOTION DETECTED What is a potential no-motion detected?
Your device is constantly monitoring your motion. It will automatically detect if you do not move within a pre-set duration, and will initiate a yellow pending alarm. The no-motion period and sensitivity are configurable. CHECK-IN REQUEST What is a check-in?
If enabled, you can configure your device to request periodic check-ins throughout your shift. The check-in countdown is displayed at the top right of the LCD screen. At the end of the timer, your G7 will initiate a yellow pending alarm to confirm you are safe. The check-in timer and pending alarm time are configurable. NOTE: Your device can be configured to check-in early, before the yellow pending alarm sounds. If enabled, you can push and hold the red latch button for the duration of three vibrations to reset your check-in timer before the audible alarm. An early check-in cannot be configured if Silent SOS alert is enabled. What do I do in the case of a yellow pending alarm?
If you are safe, push the red latch button. If you do not push the latch within the configured amount of time, your yellow pending alarm will communicate a red alert to monitoring personnel. NOTE: G7 can be configured to mute pending alarms while driving at speeds above 35 km/hr (22 mph) or while charging. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 31 YELLOW WARNING ALARM FEATURES Rapid Blinking MESSAGES How do I receive a message?
Your device can receive messages from monitoring personnel. When there is an incoming message, G7 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. How do I send a message?
You can choose from a list of 10 pre-programmed messages to send to monitoring personnel. The messages are customizable from Blackline Live. Press the OK button to enter the main menu, the up or down arrow buttons to navigate the menu, highlight your selection, and the OK button to send. How do I send a custom message?
At the bottom of the pre-programmed message list is an option to send a 16-character custom message to monitoring personnel. Press the up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the alphabet and numbers, press the OK button to move to the next character, press the OK button again to send. NOTE: In the confirmation screen of your custom message, you have the ability to edit the current message by pressing the up arrow button, send the message by pressing the OK button or cancel the message by pressing the down arrow button. 32 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL SPEAKER PHONE How do I use two-way voice calling?
If you have a G7c with a voice-enabled service plan, your speakerphone will automatically answer a call from monitoring personnel. G7 will inform you of an incoming call with a yellow warning alarm and you will hear a beep signifying the two-way voice call has been connected. In a noisy environment, it may be necessary to remove and hold the device near your ear, as you would a two-way radio. NETWORK CONNECTION INTERRUPTION How do I know if the connection to my device is lost?
If your device loses connection with the Blackline Safety Network, it will inform you with a yellow warning alarm after 5 minutes. This amount of time is configurable. LOW BATTERY How do I know if my device battery is low?
If your battery level goes below 20%, it will inform you with a yellow warning alarm. This percentage level is configurable. What do I do in the case of a yellow warning alarm?
Read your G7 screen. Press and hold the up and down arrow buttons at the same time to let G7 know you have read the message. Yellow warning alarms are between you and G7, and will not notify monitoring personnel. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 33 RED ALERT FEATURES Rapid Blinking FALL DETECTED What is fall detected?
If your device detects a fall and you have not responded to the yellow pending alarm, G7 will communicate a red alert to monitoring personnel. The fall detection sensitivity is configurable. NO-MOTION DETECTED What is no-motion detected?
If you are not moving and you have not responded to the yellow pending alarm, G7 will communicate a red alert to monitoring personnel. The no-motion period and sensitivity are configurable. 34 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL MISSED CHECK-IN What is a missed check-in?
If enabled and you are unable to check-in during the yellow pending alarm time, your device will communicate a red alert to monitoring personnel. SOS ALERT What is an SOS Alert?
If you require assistance, you can manually send an SOS alert to monitoring personnel and request immediate help to your location by pulling the red latch. NOTE: Your device can be configured to send a Silent SOS alert to monitoring personnel without light, sound and vibration. What do I do in the case of a red alert?
Red alerts are immediately communicated to monitoring personnel. Read the information on your G7 screen. Press and hold the up and down arrow buttons at the same time to mute the sound and vibration. This does not cancel the red alert sent to monitoring personnel. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 35 LiveResponse When monitoring personnel have acknowledged your red alert, the blue LiveResponse light will shine on your device. Blinking This light lets you know that remote monitoring personnel are responding by following your teams emergency protocol. Once monitoring personnel have resolved the red alert, the blue LiveResponse light will shut off. Depending on your response protocol, a G7c with voice enabled service plan will automatically connect your speaker phone to monitoring personnel. In the case that a silent SOS alert is sent, the blue LiveResponse light will not shine. Instead, G7 can be configured to vibrate to let you know that remote monitoring personnel are responding by following your teams emergency protocol. 36 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) If you have a G7c with a PTT service plan and PTT is enabled in your devices configuration profile, push-to-talk allows you to send and receive voice messages to other G7c device users, similar to a walkie-talkie. Push-to-talk is only available on G7c devices. TRANSMITTING How do I send a PTT message?
1. Press and hold the red latch 2. When G7c finishes beeping, continue to hold and begin talking with the device about 6 inches from your mouth. NOTE: If you are using an O2 sensor, be sure that you are talking into G7s microphone, not the cartridge, as this could cause gas alarms. 3. When youre finished talking, release the latch. G7 allows PTT messages up to 30 seconds in length. 4. G7c will beep once more to let you know its done listening RECEIVING How do I receive a PTT message?
1. G7c will beep twice to signal an incoming PTT message 2. G7c will play the message 3. G7c will beep once more when the message is done NOTE: G7cs screen will display which channel you are transmitting to or receiving from. AVAILABLE CHANNELS Channel 0-99 Channels 0 through 99 are available for everyday use. When on a specific channel, you will only be able to communicate with devices that are on the same channel, and will receive transmissions from all call. All call All call is a channel where G7c will transmit to all PTT devices in your organization, and will only hear transmissions from all call. This channel is recommended for safety supervisors or managers. Receive only The receive only channel only hears transmissions from all call, and cant transmit to other devices. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 37 CHANGING CHANNELS How do I change my channel?
Changing your PTT channel is done from the PTT channel menu. To change to a specific channel number:
1. Press the OK button to enter G7cs main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to PTT channels, and select OK. 3. Select enter channel #
4. Use the up and down arrows to enter the first digit of your channel. For example, for channel 40, the first digit is 4. 5. Press OK 6. Use the up and down arrow to enter the second digit of your channel. For example, for channel 40, the second digit is 0. 7. Press OK 8. Select yes to confirm and change G7cs channel or select edit to make changes To change to receive only or all call:
1. Press the OK button to enter G7cs main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to PTT channels, and select OK. 3. Select receive only or all call 4. Read the message on the screen 5. Select yes to confirm NOTE: You can also navigate to the PTT channels menu by pressing the up or down arrow from the main screen, and pressing OK when the current PTT channel shows. CHANGING VOLUME How do I change my push-to-talk call volume?
Changing the volume of incoming calls can be done from G7s main screen or the PTT channel menu. Changing your PTT volume only affects incoming calls, and wont change the way G7s alerts sound. To change volume from the main screen:
1. Press and hold the up or down arrow 2. Use the up and down arrows to set G7s volume to the desired level 3. Press OK or wait for the screen to timeout to save To change volume from the PTT channel menu:
1. Press the OK button to enter G7cs main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to PTT channels, and select OK 3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to change volume, and select OK 4. Use the up and down arrows to set G7s volume to the desired level 5. Press OK or wait for the screen to timeout to save 38 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL PTT AUDIO ACCESSORIES G7c is equipped with audio pairing in order to use an audio accessory with push-to-talk. All settings for audio devices can be found in G7s main menu, under settings > audio pairing. How do I pair a new audio device?
1. Press OK to enter the main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to accessories 3. Navigate to audio pairing, and press OK 4. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to pair new, and press OK 5. Put your audio accessory into pairing mode as per its instructions 6. Select your audio accessory from the list 7. G7 will give you a successful connection message when your device is connected, and you will see an audio accessory icon in the info bar of G7cs main screen How do I reconnect to an audio device?
G7 will remember your audio accessory and pair automatically when both are powered on. In the case that it doesnt, you can reconnect to your accessory from the audio pairing menu. 1. Press OK to enter the main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to settings 3. Navigate to audio pairing, and press OK 4. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to reconnect, and press OK 5. Ensure your accessory is on 6. G7c will reconnect to your audio accessory, and you will see an audio accessory icon in the info bar of G7cs main screen when the connection is successful How do I forget a paired device?
1. Press OK to enter the main menu 2. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to settings 3. Navigate to audio pairing, and press OK 4. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to forget device, and press OK 5. Select yes to confirm that you would like to forget your accessory NOTE: Audio accessories can only be used for push-to-talk purposes, and cannot be used for early check-ins or confirming pending alarms. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 39 FIRMWARE UPDATES OVER-THE-AIR (OTA) FIRMWARE UPDATES How does G7 get updated?
To offer new features, Blackline Safety periodically releases over-the-air (OTA) firmware updates. Your G7 device will automatically download and install the new firmware. Blackline Safety will contact you directly for specific information about new updates. If you have any questions, please contact our Customer Care team. NOTE: OTA firmware updates are only available for G7 Bridge when it is brought into cellular range. If G7 Bridge cannot be removed from satellite only reception, contact Customer Care to receive a firmware update kit. 40 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL SUPPORT LEARN MORE Visit support.BlacklineSafety.com to find support and training materials for G7. CUSTOMER CARE For technical support, please contact our Customer Care team. North America (24 hours) Toll Free: 1-877-869-7212 | support@blacklinesafety.com United Kingdom (8am-5pm GMT)
+44 1787 222684 | eusupport@blacklinesafety.com International (24 hours)
+1-403-451-0327 | support@blacklinesafety.com G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 41 SPECIFICATIONS DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS Standard G7 safety features Fall detection and No-motion detection: Tri-axis accelerometer, tri-axis gyro, software processing, configurable sensitivity, configurable time for no-motion SOS latch: Pull latch to trigger SOS alert Silent SOS: Press and hold latch to trigger SOS alert Low-battery: Configurable threshold Worker check-in: Configurable timer (30 180 min, or off ), automatic check-in when driving yellow warning alarm Red top and front lights: Red alert communicated Blue LiveResponse top and front lights: Confirmation that a monitoring team has acknowledged the alert Alarm Indicators: Speaker, LED lights and vibration motor Speaker sound pressure level: ~95 dB @ 30 cm (~95 dB
@ 11.8) Voice calling: Speakerphone and phone modes (G7c model only) Additional gas cartridge features Under limit Over limit Time-weighted average (TWA) Short-term exposure limit (STEL) High gas alert Low gas alert Bump test and calibration notification Bump test and calibration failure Size & weight G7 with Standard Cartridge Size: 64 mm x 124 mm x 27 mm (2.52 x 4.88 x 1.06) Weight: 162 g (5.7 oz) G7 with Single-gas Cartridge Size: 64 mm x 128 mm x 27 mm (2.52 x 5.04 x 1.06) Weight: 167 g (5.9 oz) G7 with Quad-gas Cartridge Size: 66 mm x 150 mm x 27 mm (2.52 x 5.91 x 1.06) Weight: 192 g (6.8 oz) G7 with Multi-gas pump Cartridge Size: 66 mm x 151 mm x 38.5 mm (2.6 x 5.95 x 1.52) Weight: 238 g (8.4 oz) Target flow rate: 300ml/min Maximum hose length: 99ft (30.2 m) User interface 168 by 144 pixel graphical, high contrast, liquid crystal display with front lighting, menu system driven by three-
button keypad, power button (on/off ), check-in button
(check-in/silent SOS), SOS latch (send SOS alert) Multi-language support: Yes, EN, FR, ES, NL, DE, IT, PT User notification Green SureSafe light: Blinking (powered), continuous (connected) Yellow top and front lights: Yellow pending alarm and G7c wireless radio Wireless coverage: 100 countries, 200 wireless carriers North America: 2G/3G radio, GSM 850 MHz, PCS 1900 MHz, 3G UMTS bands 2, 5 and 6 International: 2G/3G radio, E-GSM 900 MHz, DSC 1800 MHz, 3G UMTS bands 1 and 8 Antenna: Internal regionally optimised G7x wireless radio Works with G7 bridge satellite base station Radio: 902.0928.0 MHz, 1 Watt Antenna: Internal Radio link range: 2 km (1.25 mi) real-world Wireless updates Device configuration changes: Yes, Device firmware upgrade over-the-air (FOTA): Yes Location technology GPS Radio: 48-channel high sensitivity Assisted-GPS: Yes (G7c model only) GPS Accuracy: ~5 m (16 ft) Outdoors Indoor location technology: Blackline Safety location beacons Location update frequency: G7c 5 min, G7x 15 min defaults Power & battery Rechargeable Li-ion battery: 1100 mAh Li-ion Battery Life: 18 hours at 20C (68F) under normal usage Charge time: 4 hours Environmental Storage temperature: -30C to 60C (-22F to 140F) Operating temperature: -20C to 55C (-4F to 131F) Charging temperature: 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) Ingress Protection: Designed to meet IP67 Approvals G7c: SAR, RoHS, CE, RCM Unit ID 3570xxxxxx FCC ID: W77G7C2 IC: 8255A-G7C2 Contains FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN IC: 8595A-1EIQ24NN or 42 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL Unit ID 3567xxxxxx FCC ID: W77G7C IC: 8255A-G7C Contains FCC ID: XPY1CGM5NNN, IC: 8595A-1CGM5NNN or Unit ID 3566xxxxxx Contains FCC ID: XPY1CGM5NNN, IC: 8595A-1CGM5NNN Canada & USA: Class I Division 1 Group A,B,C,D T4;
Class I Zone 0 AEx da ia IIC T4; Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga IECEx: Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga ATEX:Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga LEL: CSA C22.2 No.152; ISA 12.13.01 LEL Pump Cartridge: CSA C22.2 No.152; 0C Ta 40C;
ANSI/ISA-12.13.01; -10C Ta 40C G7x: SAR, RoHS, RCM FCC ID: W77G7X | IC ID: 8255A-G7X Canada & USA: Class I Division 1 Group A,B,C,D T4;
Class I Zone 0 AEx da ia IIC T4; Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga IECEx: Ex ib IIC T4 Gb Gas sensor specifications Gas Ammonia (NH3) High-range ammonia (NH3) Carbon monoxide (CO) High-range carbon monoxide (CO) Sensor type Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical Hydrogen resistant carbon monoxide (CO-H) Electrochemical Carbon dioxide (CO2) Chlorine (Cl2) Chlorine dioxide (ClO2) COSH Hydrogen (H2) Hydrogen cyanide (HCN) Hydrogen sulphide (H2S) NDIR Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical Electrochemical High-range hydrogen sulphide (H2S) Electrochemical LEL-infrared (LEL-IR) NDIR LEL: CSA C22.2 No.152; ISA 12.13.01 LEL Pump Cartridge: CSA C22.2 No.152; 0C Ta 40C;
ANSI/ISA-12.13.01; -10C Ta 40C Warranty G7: two years limited warranty Cartridges: lifetime with service plan Blackline Complete: three year operating lease with three year warranty Blackline Live web application Cloud-hosted safety monitoring web application is highly customizable for every customer requirement. Includes live map, employee address book, user roles, alert management, device configurations, alert setups and reporting. Range 0100 ppm 0500 ppm 0500 ppm 02000 ppm 0500 ppm 050,000 ppm 020 ppm 0-2 ppm Resolution 0.1 ppm 1 ppm 1 ppm 5 ppm 1 ppm 50 ppm 0.1 ppm 0.01 ppm 0500 ppm CO, 0100 ppm H2S 1 ppm CO, 0.1 ppm H2S 040,000 ppm 1% LEL (400 ppm) 030 ppm 0100 ppm 0-500 ppm 0100% LEL 0.1 ppm 0.1 ppm 0.5 ppm 1% LEL 0.1% vol 0.01 ppm 0.1 ppm (0100 ppm), 2 ppm (1006,000 ppm) Oxygen (O2) Ozone (O3) Pumped electrochemical 025% vol Electrochemical 0-1 ppm Photoionisation (PID) PID 06,000 ppm Sulphur dioxide (SO2) Electrochemical 0100 ppm 0.1 ppm
* Check with Blackline for approval status. All specifications subject to change. G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 43 LEGAL NOTICES AND CERTIFICATIONS LEGAL NOTICES Information in this document is subject to change without notice. This document is provided as is and Blackline Safety Corp. (Blackline) and its affiliated companies and partners assume no responsibility for any typographical, technical or other inaccuracies in this document. Blackline reserves the right to periodically change information that is contained in this document. However, Blackline makes no commitment to provide any such changes, updates, enhancements or other additions to this document to you in a timely manner or at all. Copyright 2016 Blackline Safety Corp. All rights reserved. Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior written consent of Blackline Safety Corp (Blackline ). Blackline hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual onto some form of electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this manual or any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual must contain the complete text of this copyright notice. Further, any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited. The Blackline, Alert. Locate. Respond. families of related marks, images and symbols, including Blackline, G7, G7c, G7x, LiveResponse, Loner, Loner IS, Loner IS+, Loner M6, Loner M6i, Loner Mobile, Loner 900, and SureSafe are the exclusive properties and trademarks of Blackline Safety Corp. All other brands, product names, company names, trademarks and service marks are the properties of their respective owners. Warranty Your G7 device is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for up to two years from date of purchase. For further details regarding your Blackline warranty, please refer to your terms and conditions of service. FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential instal lation. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: the grantee is not responsible for any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance. Such modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for further assistance. RF exposure was tested with the supplied belt clip. Use of third-party accessories may result in non-compliant exposure. Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. RF exposure was tested with the supplied belt clip. Use of third-party accessories may result in non-compliant exposure. Notification dIndustrie Canada Ce dispositif est conforme au(x) format(s) RSS libre(s) dIndustrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne peut causer dinterfrences nuisibles, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement du dispositif. Lexposition RF a t teste avec le clip de ceinture fourni. Lutilisation daccessoires tiers peut entraner une exposition non conforme. Warning Do not operate Blackline Safety products where you are not able to safely operate your mobile/cellular phone. Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical product and do not permit them to handle any cables. Do not operate or store Blackline products outside their specified operating or storage temperatures. Consult the specifications section for more information. Blackline products may contain an internal lithium-ion battery pack. Seek advice from your local electronics recycling authority regarding the disposal of your device. Do not dispose Blackline products in your household trash. 44 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL INTRINSICALLY SAFE Intrinsically Safe This device is certified Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I Division 1 Groups A,B,C,D T4; Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga; Class I Zone 0 AEx da ia Group IIC T4 Ga hazardous (classified) locations. G7x is certified as Ex ib IIC T4 Gb under IECEx. Scurit intrinsque Cet appareil est certifi scurit intrinsque pour lusage en classe I division 1 groupe A,B,C,D T4; Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga; classe I zone 0 AEx da ia groupe IIC T4 Ga dans les lieux classs comme dangereux. CSA: 70098755 UL 60079 Class I Division 1 Groups A,B,C,D; T4 Class I Zone 0 AEx da ia IIC T4 Ga CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60079 Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga IECEx/ATEX: IECEx CSA 17.0005; Sira 17ATEX2083X IEC 60079; EN 60079 G7c: Ex da ia IIC T4 Ga G7x: Ex ib IIC T4 Gb 2813 II 1 G
-20C <= Ta <= +55C Base unit P/N G7*-# (* = c, x, or blank; # = NA, EU or AZ) Gas cartridge: Standard P/N Z | Single-gas P/N S-# | Multi-gas P/N Q-#### | Pump Module P/N P-#### (# = Electro chemical sensor identifier or X indicating no sensor) Caution: For safety reasons this equipment must be operated and serviced by qualified personnel only. High off-scale readings may indicate explosive concentration. The equipment shall only be charged when in the non-hazardous area using a charger specifically supplied for use with the unit (for example part number SAW06D-050-1000xx, manufactured by Shenzhen Shi Ying Yuan Electronics Co., Ltd.), approved as SELV or Class 2 equipment against IEC 60950, IEC 61010-
1 or an equivalent IEC standard. The maximum voltage and current from the charger shall not exceed 5.625Vdc and 2A respectively. Standards:
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60079-0: 2015 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60079-11: 2014 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60079-1: 2016 C22.2 No. 152 - M1984 (R2011) UL 913, Eighth Edition UL 60079-0: Sixth Edition UL 60079-11: Sixth Edition UL 60079-1: Seventh Edition Consult with your organizations safety professional for further information regarding the topic of intrinsic safety and any policies, procedures, facilities, or locations within facilities that may be related to intrinsic safety. Attention: Pour des raisons de scurit, cet quipment doit tre utilis, entretenu et rpar uniquement par un personnel qualifi. Des lectures suprieures lchellepeuvent indiquer des concentration explosives. Lquipement ne doit tre charg que dans la zone non dangereuse laide dun chargeur spcifiquement fourni pour lutilisation avec lappareil (par exemple, la rfrence SAW06D-050-
1000xx, fabrique par Shenzhen Shi Ying Yuan Electronics Co., Ltd.) SELV ou Classe 2 selon IEC 60950, IEC 61010-1 ou une norme IEC quivalente. La tension et le courant maximum du chargeur ne doivent pas dpasser respectivement 5.625Vdc et 2A. ANSI/ISA 12.13.01: 2000 EN 60079-0: 2012/A11:2013 EN 60079-11: 2012 EN 60079-1: 2014 IEC 60079-0: 2011 6th Edition IEC 60079-11: 2011 6th Edition IEC 60079-1: 2014 7th Edition Sil vous plat consulter professionnel de la scurit de votre organisation pour de plus amples informations concernant le sujet de la scurit intrinsque et les politiques, les procdures, les installations, ou emplacements au sein des tablissements qui peuvent tre lis la scurit intrinsque. Blackline Safety | Unit 100, 803 - 24 Avenue SE | Calgary, AB T2G 1P5 | Canada G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 45 46 || G7 TECHNICAL USER MANUAL www.BlacklineSafety.com 0149/R22/2020-02-10
1 2 3 4 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.30 MiB | June 09 2021 |
G7 BRIDGE Technical User Manual CONTENTS OVERVIEW Portable satellite & cellular base station ..................................................................................... 2 Blackline Safety Network .................................................................................................................... 3 Blackline Live web portal .................................................................................................................... 3 Communication technology ............................................................................................................. 4 Whats in the box .................................................................................................................................... 5 Hardware details ...................................................................................................................................... 6 INTERACTION Buttons .......................................................................................................................................................... 7 NOTIFICATIONS SureSafe ......................................................................................................................................................... 8 Charging light ............................................................................................................................................ 9 TeamAlert muster alarm ...................................................................................................................... 10 OPERATING Requirements ............................................................................................................................................. 11 Charging ...................................................................................................................................................... 11 Power on ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Reading the LCD screen ....................................................................................................................... 13 Reading the menu .................................................................................................................................. 13 Features ......................................................................................................................................................... 14 TeamAlert muster ......................................................................................................................... 14 Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 15 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Pair new devices ........................................................................................................................... 16 Diagnostic tools ............................................................................................................................ 16 LCD Sleep mode ....................................................................................................................................... 16 Power off ..................................................................................................................................................... 17 MOUNTING General mounting ................................................................................................................................... 18 Magnetic mount ........................................................................................................................... 18 Multi-purpose mount ................................................................................................................. 19 Optional mounting accessories....................................................................................................... 22 G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket (not included) ................................................................. 22 Truck anchor points (not included) .................................................................................... 24 Internal dash plate mount (not included) ...................................................................... 25 Optional hardwiring accessories ..................................................................................................... 26 External hardwire kit (not included) ................................................................................... 26 Internal hardwire fuse expander (not included) .......................................................... 27 FIRMWARE UPDATES Over-the-air (OTA) firmware updates ........................................................................................... 28 G7 BRIDGE CARE Weather-sealing plug ............................................................................................................................ 28 SPECIFICATIONS Detailed specifications .......................................................................................................................... 29 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Danger ........................................................................................................................................................... 30 Warning ......................................................................................................................................................... 30 Legal notices .............................................................................................................................................. 31 SUPPORT Learn more .................................................................................................................................................. 32 Customer Care ........................................................................................................................................... 32 OVERVIEW PORTABLE SATELLITE & CELLULAR BASE STATION What is G7 Bridge?
G7 Bridge system is an employee safety monitoring solution that keeps you connected in remote locations outside cellular coverage. The system is comprised of two parts, the G7 Bridge portable satellite/cellular base station and the employee-worn G7x or Loner 900 safety monitoring device. G7 Bridge is self-powered and portable, allowing you to quickly move it from one vehicle to another. Equipped with GPS location technology, it can provide your organization with a simple alternative to elaborate fleet management systems. G7 Bridge can mass-notify employees of hazards, trigger evacuations, connect you to monitoring personnel via two-way messaging, and account for you on a real-time map, providing a reference point to manage the fastest possible emergency response. The G7 Bridge system has your back at all times, no matter your location. 2 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL BLACKLINE SAFETY NETWORK How am I connected?
The Blackline Safety Network is the cloud-hosted system used to monitor your safety. It includes 2G/3G cellular networks, satellite networks, our Blackline Live web portal application and your personal safety monitoring device. G7 Bridge, G7x and Loner 900 require an active service plan in order to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. Depending on your needs and requirements, there are various service plan options available, including the option of 24/7 safety monitoring by Blacklines Safety Operations Center. Contact your organizations safety professional for more information regarding the details of your service plan. BLACKLINE LIVE WEB PORTAL What is Blackline Live?
G7 Bridge uses the cloud-hosted Blackline Live web portal to monitor and manage all your workers and devices. With Blackline Lives real-time alerting and live map with employee locations, you can quickly locate and respond to a worker in distress. Real-time alerts show the employees location on the map with the type of alert, enabling your team to efficiently send the help they need. Blackline Live allows you to create and customize configuration profiles that determine how a device or a group of devices operates in the field. Similarly, alert profiles are set up to determine what contacts should be notified in the event of an incident and what response protocol monitoring personnel will follow to ensure your team gets the help it needs. Blackline Live also empowers employee communications in the field via text messaging to G7 Bridge. Blackline Live keeps track of alert history, calibrations and bump tests eliminates the need to manually retrieve data logs from the field. All G7 data is communicated in real-time. Blackline Live allows you to tailor user access depending on employee roles: employee, supervisor, administrator and monitoring team. This ensures that everyone has access to the right tools to accommodate their role in a comprehensive monitoring program. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 3 COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY How does G7 Bridge communicate with my personal monitoring device?
G7 Bridge communicates with G7x or Loner 900 devices through an industrial quality 900 MHz radio link. Personal monitoring devices can operate up to 2 km away with limited obstructions from G7 Bridge. NOTE: Terrain, foliage, and buildings can reduce the overall 900 MHz radio link range. How does G7 Bridge communicate with the Blackline Safety Network?
One G7 Bridge can link up to five G7x or Loner 900 devices to the Blackline Safety Network through the Iridium satellite network or 2G/3G cellular data. G7 Bridge is equipped with an internal Iridium satellite radio and antenna that facilitates communication when outside the range of cellular networks. The transition between satellite and cellular is automatic and seamless. When mounted to a vehicle, all-terrain vehicle, snowmobile or boat, G7 Bridge must remain out in open sky, a minimum of 10 meters (33 feet) away from any buildings. This will help ensure an unobstructed view to send and receive signals to satellites. 3G Cellular Communication Iridium Satellite Communication 900 MHz Radio Link 4 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL WHATS IN THE BOX Your G7 Bridge comes with the following components:
G7 Bridge Sealing plug Magnetic mount Multi-purpose mount Adhesive foam pad Charging system USB cable USB power adapter Vehicle 5VDC charger Quick reference wallet card Technical user manual G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 5 HARDWARE DETAILS Weatherproof enclosure OK OK button Up button LCD screen Speaker Charging light SureSafe Power button Down button Product label Base Charging port Sealing plug
(removable) Side lights Alarm light 6 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL INTERACTION BUTTONS Interacting with your G7 Bridge is easy with the LCD display and a few buttons. Power button Press power to turn on and off, and return to menu. OK button Press OK to enter the menu on the LCD screen and confirm a menu selection. Up arrow buttons Press up arrow to enter or navigate the menu. Down arrow buttons Press down arrow to enter or navigate the menu. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 7 NOTIFICATIONS GREEN CONNECTIVITY LIGHT Are you Connected?
G7 Bridge lets you know its connection status. Green Connectivity light Blinking/Solid Blinking green light A blinking green connectivity light indicates your G7 Bridge is connecting to the Blackline Safety Network and your safety is not yet monitored. NOTE: It could take up to two minutes for G7 Bridge to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. Solid green light A solid green connectivity light indicates youre connected and being monitored by the Blackline Safety Network. 8 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL CHARGING LIGHT Charging Status G7 Bridge lets you know its battery charging status. The blinking pattern indicates more battery charging progress. Red Charging Light Blinking/Solid 1 Blink Charging and your battery level is between 0%-19%. 2 Blinks Charging and your battery level is between 20%-49%. 3 Blinks Charging and your battery level is between 50%-69%. 4 Blinks Charging and your battery level is between 70%-89%. 5 Blinks Charging and your battery level is between 90%-99%. Solid red light Fully charged. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 9 TeamAlert MUSTER ALARM Your G7 Bridge has a message for you. Go back to your G7 Bridge and read the G7 Bridge screen. Red TeamAlert Muster Alarm Rapid Blinking When G7 Bridge receives a message from monitoring personnel, each connected G7x and Loner 900 will inform you with a yellow warning alarm to return back to G7 Bridge. The red lights on the side of G7 Bridge will blink when a message has been received. Read the information on your G7 Bridge screen. Press and hold the OK button for three seconds to let G7 Bridge know you have read the message, and to mute the sound and stop the blinking lights. This does not stop the TeamAlert. To stop, enter the main menu and use the down arrow button to navigate to the TeamAlert menu. Press the OK button to enter the TeamAlert menu, use the down button to navigate to stop, then press the OK button to select stop. The LCD screen will confirm the muster has been stopped. Sound TeamAlert muster alarm sound a constant alarm sound. NOTE: G7x devices features a built-in LCD screen that will let you know to return back to G7 Bridge. 10 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL OPERATING REQUIREMENTS What do I need for my G7 Bridge to operate?
G7x or Loner 900 must be within range of the G7 Bridge radio link An active service plan for G7 Bridge and any connected G7x or Loner 900 Line of sight from G7 Bridge to Iridium communication satellites, or sufficient cellular network signal to communicate with the Blackline Safety Network Sufficient G7 Bridge battery level when being used as a portable base station or when powered via G7s charging port (hard-wiring cable or USB cable plugged into 12VDC vehicle power port) CHARGING How do I charge my G7 Bridge?
Remove the sealing plug from the micro USB charging port on G7 Bridge. Insert the micro USB cable into the charging port. A blinking red light beside the battery icon will indicate your G7 Bridge is charging. The LCD screen, and a solid red light will let you know when the device is fully charged. Blackline recommends that you charge your G7 Bridge for 10 hours. Once charging is complete, remove the power cable and replace the sealing plug to use as a portable self-powered base station. G7 Bridge is fully operational but not weatherproof while charging. A weather resistant charging kit is available for purchase to weatherproof Bridge while charging. NOTE: If G7 Bridge is in a very low charging state, it may take up to an hour of charging before the red charging light begins to blink. How often do I need to charge my G7 Bridge?
If G7 Bridge is being used as a portable base station and not hardwired to a vehicles power system, it will need to be charged regularly based upon the amount of use. The internal rechargeable battery will provide up to 44 hours of continuous run-time at room temperature. NOTE: Charging G7 Bridge with a cigarette lighter while your vehicle is off may drain your vehicles battery. If Bridge is going to be continually powered, Blackline recommends hardwiring the Bridge to your vehicle. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 11 POWER ON How do I turn on my G7 Bridge?
Press the power button, and wait for the blinking green connectivity light to turn solid. It takes approximately two minutes for G7 Bridge to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. NOTE: Sufficient battery power and access to wireless networks are required to connect to the Blackline Safety Network. G7 Bridge will automatically use cellular communications if available, and a clear view of the sky is required for satellite communications. How do I connect my personal safety device?
Your G7 Bridge has been pre-programmed and set up to specifically pair with your personal safety monitoring devices. Turn your G7 Bridge on and make sure it has connected to the Blackline Safety Network. Press and hold the power button on your G7x or Loner 900 device. Wait for the blinking green connectivity light on your personal safety monitoring device to turn solid. Once connected, the green light will stay on and your safety is being monitored while within range of your G7 Bridge radio link. 12 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL READING THE LCD SCREEN Battery level Number of personal monitoring devices connected Satellite network connection strength Current communication network Cellular network connection strength READING THE MENU Top line: The Menu or sub-menu you are in Bottom line: The action that can be selected G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 13 FEATURES TeamAlert MUSTER What is TeamAlert Muster?
TeamAlert muster is an alarm sent to all associated connected personal monitoring devices to return back to G7 Bridge. A TeamAlert muster can be initiated from the G7 Bridge itself, or when monitoring personnel sends G7 Bridge a message. How do I initiate a TeamAlert Muster from G7 Bridge?
In the main menu, use the up or down arrow buttons to navigate to TeamAlert muster, and press the OK button. Use the down arrow button to navigate to Start, and press OK. G7 Bridge will go into a TeamAlert muster alarm and display Muster Started on the LCD screen. All personal monitoring devices connected to this specific G7 Bridge will go into a yellow warning alarm. How do I silence a TeamAlert Muster on G7 Bridge?
Press and hold the OK button for three seconds to let G7 Bridge know you have read the message, and to mute the audible and visual alarm. This does not stop the TeamAlert. How do I stop a TeamAlert Muster on G7 Bridge?
Press the OK button to enter the TeamAlert menu, use the down arrow button to navigate to Stop, and press OK. NOTE: Stopping the TeamAlert muster will stop the alarm on both the G7 Bridge and all connected personal monitoring devices. 14 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL MESSAGES How do I receive a message?
G7 Bridge can receive messages from monitoring personnel. When G7 Bridge receives a message, it will inform you with a TeamAlert Muster alarm. The message will appear on the LCD screen of your G7 Bridge. Press and hold the OK button for three seconds to let G7 Bridge know you have read the message, and to mute the sound and stop the blinking lights. This does not stop the TeamAlert. To stop, press the OK button to enter the TeamAlert menu, and press the OK button again to stop the muster alarm from the menu selection. How do I view the last received message?
You can view the last received message in Message Inbox. When a new message is received, the previous message is deleted. In the main menu, use the up or down arrow button to navigate to Message Inbox, and press the OK button. Press the down arrow button to view the last message, and press OK to view the full message. How do I send a message?
You can choose from a list of ten pre-programmed messages to send to monitoring personnel. In the main menu, use the up or down arrow button to navigate to Send Message, and press the OK button. Press the up or down arrow buttons to navigate the pre-programmed message options, and then press OK to send. The LCD screen will confirm that your message has been sent. NOTE: To make changes to the pre-programmed messages, please contact our Customer Care team. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 15 SETTINGS PAIR NEW DEVICES How do I pair new devices to G7 Bridge?
1. Turn on G7 Bridge 2. Press OK on G7 Bridge to open Bridges menu 3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to pair new devices and press OK 4. Use the up and down arrows to navigate to start and press OK 5. G7 Bridges screen will say pairing started as it looks for devices 6. Turn on up to 5 G7x devices NOTE: G7 Bridge can only connect to 5 G7x devices at once. 7. When G7x has been paired, you will notice the following:
The yellow warning alarm on G7x will silence G7 Bridges main screen will show that it has connected devices G7xs green connectivity light will be solid (not flashing) You will receive a message on G7s screen that reads pairing succeeded and shows Bridges network key 8. Press OK on G7 Bridge to stop pairing once all necessary devices have been paired. If you are pairing more than 5 G7x devices, repeat steps 2-8 for all G7x devices. Diagnostics contains information about the firmware version and advance satellite information. This information is not required for typical operations. DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS LCD SLEEP MODE What is sleep mode?
To maximize battery life, G7 Bridge will go into sleep mode two minutes after the last button was pressed. Sleep mode will turn off the LCD screen to reduce power consumption. How do I wake up G7 Bridge from sleep mode?
Press any button to wake the LCD screen from sleep mode. NOTE: If the LCD screen does not wake up, the battery may be depleted and will require charging. 16 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL POWER OFF How do I shut down?
When powered, G7 Bridge can remain on at all times. When G7 Bridge is powered off, all connected devices will no longer be monitored. To shut down G7 Bridge, first press and hold the power button on all connected G7x and Loner 900 devices. Each device will go into shutdown sequence, sending your log off status to the Blackline Safety Network. After all personal safety monitors have been shut down, if needed you can now power off your G7 Bridge. Press and hold the power button on G7 Bridge until it goes into shutdown sequence. Your personal safety monitoring devices are no longer being monitored. NOTE: When logging off, ensure G7 Bridge has an unobstructed line of sight to the sky and the green connectivity light is solid. A challenging environment with an obstructed view of the sky can make communication difficult. G7 Bridge may extend the shutdown sequence up to 20 minutes until all priority messages are transmitted over the cellular or satellite network. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 17 MOUNTING GENERAL MOUNTING When mounting G7 Bridge, it is important to position it with an unobstructed line of sight to the sky to communicate with the Iridium satellite network. Ensure it is placed as high as possible for maximum distance of the 900 MHz radio link between G7 Bridge and connected personal monitoring devices. G7 Bridge is completely portable and can be permanently or temporarily installed depending on your needs and requirements. G7 Bridge includes two mounting options a magnetic mount and a multi-purpose mount. MAGNETIC MOUNT What is the magnetic mount?
The magnetic mount can be used to attach G7 Bridge to the roof of a vehicle. It contains two rare earth magnets providing 224 lb of mounting force. NOTE: Mount G7 Bridge with caution to avoid scratching vehicle painted surface and pinching your fingers. WARNING: Individuals with pacemakers or other medical devices and mechanical implants should use caution when handling the magnetic mount. Strong magnets can damage hard drives, credit cards, ID cards, and similar devices that use magnetic media. Magnetic mount 18 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL MULTI-PURPOSE MOUNT What is a multi-purpose mount?
A multi-purpose mount can be used to attach G7 Bridge on a non-magnetic surface. To use the double-sided adhesive provided, ensure the surface is clean, remove the backing from the adhesive foam pad and stick to the bottom of the multi-purpose mount. Remove the second adhesive backing and firmly press the multi-purpose mount onto flat surface. For best results, allow 24 hours for adhesive bond to set. Alternatively, you can attach the multi-purpose mount to a surface with a polyurethane industrial adhesive, tie wraps, screw fasteners, or hook and loop fasteners. For these optional methods, the multi-purpose mount has two tie-wrap slots and eight screw hole locations. NOTE: The multi-purpose mount is fabricated from glass-filled nylon. If using industrial adhesive, confirm it is appropriate for both nylon and your mounting surface. Multi-purpose mount Adhesive foam pad G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 19 How do I attach G7 Bridge to the magnetic or multi-purpose mount?
Slide bottom of G7 Bridge at an angle onto the base of the magnetic or multi-purpose mount, then snap G7 Bridge into the base release clip. 20 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL How do I remove G7 Bridge from the magnetic or multi-purpose mount?
To remove G7 Bridge from the mount, use a screwdriver, key, or similar tool to push the mount release clip towards the G7 Bridge. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 21 OPTIONAL MOUNTING ACCESSORIES G7 BRIDGE MOUNTING BRACKET (NOT INCLUDED) The G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket can be used to attached G7 Bridge to a vehicle roof rack, bed rack, tool box, and pole or post. It comes with different u-bracket sizes for easy attachment, and a secured locking mechanism with a key for additional security. 22 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL How do I mount to a roof rack, bed rack, or pole/post?
Screw the multi-purpose mount to the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket plate. Attach the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket to roof rack, bed rack or pole/post using the appropriate u-bracket size. Slide and snap G7 Bridge into the multi-purpose mount, and lock the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket with key for additional security. How do I mount to a tool box?
G7 Bridge can be mounted to a truck bed tool box if it has an unobstructed line of sight to the sky. Screw the multi-purpose mount to the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket plate, and screw the plate to the side of the tool box. Slide and snap G7 Bridge into the multi-purpose mount, and lock G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket with key for additional security. Ensure the LCD screen is facing outwards for operation. NOTE: Avoid attaching G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket to lid, or where the tool box would open. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 23 TRUCK ANCHOR POINTS (NOT INCLUDED) Truck anchor points can be used with the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket to attach G7 Bridge to mounting points on a truck bed rail. How do I mount to a truck bed rail?
Screw the anchor point into the truck bed rail, and then attach the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket to the anchor point using screws. Screw the multi-purpose mount to the G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket plate. Slide and snap G7 Bridge into the multi-purpose mount, and lock G7 Bridge Mounting Bracket with key for additional security. 24 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL INTERNAL DASH PLATE MOUNT (NOT INCLUDED) G7 Bridge can be installed directly to a dash tray under a front windshield of a vehicle. G7 Bridge must not block the vision of the driver, impair the drivers operation of the vehicle, or interfere with safety systems such as air bags. How do I mount to a dash?
Remove the dash tray or portion of the dash you want to mount to. Screw the multi-
purpose mount to the top of the dash, then screw the dash plate under the dash tray to secure the mount in place. This is best suited for a Ford F-150 with removable dash tray to avoid drilling directly into vehicle dashboard. Alternatively, for easy removal of G7 Bridge, the dash plate can be screwed directly to the top of the dash, and the magnetic mount can be used to magnetically attach the dash plate. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 25 OPTIONAL HARDWIRING ACCESSORIES G7 Bridge has a 44-hour battery life, and can be charged using a vehicle 12 or 24 VDC power outlet, USB port, or cigarette socket in a vehicle. However, it may be beneficial to hardwire G7 Bridge to your vehicle power system. Prior to installation, consider the following:
Location near 12 or 24 VDC power Power circuit controlled by ignition key to avoid battery drainage when vehicle is not in use G7 Bridge consumes up to 1.0A of peak current, ensure circuit can handle additional load EXTERNAL HARDWIRE KIT (NOT INCLUDED) The external three-wire hardwire kit is used to hardwire into a vehicles 12/24 VDC power system. Wiring can be done through center/rear brake light, or another external power source. Ensure the cable is properly grounded. NOTE: The hardwire cable is six ft in length. Depending on required length, additional wire may need to be added to cable and appropriately spliced and insulated. 26 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL INTERNAL HARDWIRE FUSE EXPANDER (NOT INCLUDED) The three-wire hardwire kit and fuse expander can be used to hardwire into a vehicles 12/24 VDC power system. Plug the fuse expander into a fuse box located on drivers side, and attach the hardwire kit once the fuse expander is in the panel. Ensure cable is properly grounded. Cable routing can be done behind headliner on drivers side and out the rear brake light to the G7 Bridge on the roof, toolbox, or on truck bed rail if it is close to the back windshield. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 27 FIRMWARE UPDATES OVER-THE-AIR (OTA) FIRMWARE UPDATES How does G7 Bridge get updated?
To offer new features, Blackline Safety periodically releases over-the-air (OTA) firmware updates. G7 Bridge is completely self-contained and capable of OTA updates when brought into cellular range. G7 Bridge firmware releases will also contain the firmware updates for G7x. Our Customer Care team will complete OTA firmware updates for your G7 Bridge. If G7 Bridge cannot be brought into cellular reception, contact our Customer Care team to receive a firmware update kit. Blackline Safety will contact you directly for specific information about new updates. If you have any questions, please contact our Customer Care team. G7 BRIDGE CARE WEATHER-SEALING PLUG Please ensure the sealing plug is correctly inserted into G7 Bridge at all times when not charging or when not connected to the vehicle hardwiring cable. This will ensure G7 Bridge is able to withstand the elements at all times and provide reliable operation to monitor your safety. Failure to have the sealing plug installed may permit water or other fluids to enter that may cause an electronics failure, which is not covered under warranty. 28 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL SPECIFICATIONS DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS Size & Weight Size: 73 mm x 107 mm x 141 mm (2.87 x 4.21 x 5.55) Measurements do not include mount. Weight: 540 g (19.04 oz) Buttons & Indicator Lights Power button: Power on/off Red light plus buzzer: Safety alert Green SureSafe light: Blinking (powered), continuous (connected) LCD Screen: Display menu, battery status, backhaul link status Menu Navigation buttons: Up, Down, OK Location Technology Constellations: GPS Receiver type: 72-channel Assisted-GNSS: Yes Accuracy: ~5 m (16 ft) outdoors, ~50 m (165 ft) indoors, CEP 50%, 24 hrs static Antenna: Internal 900 MHz Radio Link Range General use: up to 2 km Hilltop to hilltop: 10+ km Terrain, foliage, and buildings will affect overall 900 MHz radio link range Wireless Communication 3G Bridge NA 3G Bridge AZ 4G Bridge NA 4G Bridge AZ Model 102313 102928 103989 103990 UMTS 800/850/900/1900/2100 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 4G LTE bands 2, 4, and 5 3G UMTS bands 2 and 4 4G LTE bands 3 and 28 3G UMTS band 1 FCC ID: XPYICGM5NNN IC: 8595A-ICGM5NNN FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN IC: 8595A-1EIQ24NN RCM Internal Iridium 1616-1626.5 MHz FCC ID: Q639603N IC: 4629A-9603N Internal Cellular Radio Sattelite Radio Bands Approvals Antenna Network Bands Approvals Antenna Band Approvals Antenna 900 MHz Radio 902-928 MHz 916-927 MHz 902-928 MHz 916-927 MHz FCC ID: KQNMLINK900 IC: 2361A-MLINK900 RCM RCM FCC ID: KQNMLINK900 IC: 2361A-MLINK900 or FCC ID: 2AZEH-AMU900 IC: 27118-AMU900 Internal G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 29 Alert Messages Emergency/Low battery/Power off/Text messages Mobile Messaging Methods Remote messaging by email or SMS Device Requirements Activated service plan, satellite communications requires line-of-sight to satellites, GPS for locating, safety monitoring requires active 900 MHz and satellite or cellular connections User Notification Indicators: Acoustic buzzer, indicator lights LCD Screen: display notifications/messages from backend Warranty One year limited factory warranty Power & Battery Rechargeable Li-ion battery: 6800 mAh capacity Battery life: 50 hours @ 20C (68F); 44 hours @ -20C
(-4F); 14 hours @ -40C (-40F); It is recommended that the hard wire kit is used anytime below -20C Charging connector: Micro USB Environmental Storage temperature range: -30C to 75C (-22F to 167F) Operating temperature: -20C to 55C (-4F to 131F) Charging temperature: 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) Ingress Protection: Designed to meet IP65 Blackline Live Web Application Cloud-hosted safety monitoring web application is highly customizable for every customer requirement. Includes live map, employee address book, user roles, alert management, device configurations, alert setups and reporting. Wireless Coverage, Activated Service Plans Cellular coverage: Nearly 150 countries Satellite coverage: Global 900 MHz operation: ITU Region 2, Australia, New Zealand Service plan options: Contact Blackline SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING DANGER When in a hospital or other health care facility, observe the restrictions on the use of mobile devices, such as cellular phones. Switch Blackline Safety products off before boarding an aircraft and make sure that it cannot be inadvertently turned on. Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Do not operate or store Blackline products outside their specified operating temperature, storage temperature, or humidity rating. Consult the specifications section for more information. Blackline products may contain an internal lithium-ion battery pack. Seek advice from your local electronics recycling authority regarding the disposal of your device. Do not dispose Blackline products in your household trash. 30 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL Do not use G7 Bridge in areas classified as hazardous locations, where there is risk of explosion due to presence of gas, vapor or dust. G7 Bridge is not certified as intrinsically safe. Do no place G7 Bridge in or near open flame. G7 Bridge is shipped with strong magnets. Use caution when handling these magnets to prevent personal or property damage. Strong magnets can damage computer hard drives, credit cards, floppy disks, magnetic ID cards and similar devices that use magnetic media. Individuals with pacemakers or other medical devices and mechanical implants should use caution when handling the magnets that accompany G7 Bridge. LEGAL NOTICES Information in this document is subject to change without notice. This document is provided as is and Blackline Safety Corp.
(Blackline) and its affiliated companies and partners assume no responsibility for any typographical, technical or other inaccuracies in this document. Blackline reserves the right to periodically change information that is contained in this document. However, Blackline makes no commitment to provide any such changes, updates, enhancements or other additions to this document to you in a timely manner or at all. Copyright 2017 Blackline Safety Corp. All rights reserved. Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior written consent of Blackline Safety Corp. (Blackline) Blackline hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual onto some form of electronic storage medium to be viewed and to print one copy of this manual or any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual must contain the complete text of this copyright notice. Further, any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited. The Blackline, Alert. Locate. Respond. families of related marks, images and symbols, including Blackline, G7, G7c, G7x, LiveResponse, Loner, Loner IS, Loner IS+, Loner M6, Loner M6i, Loner Mobile, Loner 900, and SureSafe are the exclusive properties and trademarks of Blackline Safety Corp. All other brands, product names, company names, trademarks and service marks are the properties of their respective owners. Warranty Your G7 Bridge is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for up to one year from date of purchase. For further details regarding your Blackline warranty, please refer to your Terms and Conditions of Service. Visit http://www.blacklinesafety.com for more information. FCC Notice This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the users authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for further assistance. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device is only authorized for use in a mobile application. At least 20 cm of separation distance between the G7 Bridge device and the users body must be maintained at all times. Industry Canada Notice This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Industry Canada Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment compiles with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the G7 Bridge and your person. G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL || 31 SUPPORT LEARN MORE Visit support.BlacklineSafety,com to find support and training materials for G7 Bridge. CUSTOMER CARE For technical support, please contact our Customer Care team. North America (24 hours) Toll Free: 1-877-869-7212 | support@blacklinesafety.com United Kingdom (8am-5pm GMT)
+44 1787 222684 | eusupport@blacklinesafety.com International (24 hours)
+1-403-451-0327 | support@blacklinesafety.com 32 || G7 BRIDGE TECHNICAL USER MANUAL www.BlacklineSafety.com 0218/R5/2021-06-02
1 2 3 4 | LARA-R202 label exhibit R1 | ID Label/Location Info | 296.48 KiB |
LARA-R202 Label exhibit Giulio Comar, CEL CERT Team October, 2017 Confidential locate, communicate, accelerate LARA-R202 Front with shield and label placement Slide 2 u-blox AG Thank you!
locate, communicate, accelerate
1 2 3 4 | Label Info | ID Label/Location Info | 76.67 KiB | June 09 2021 |
Model 103989 Unit ID XXXXXXXXXX Activation code XXX XXX Contains FCC ID:
Q639603N, XPY1EIQ24NN, KQNMLINK900 or 2AZEH-AMU900 IC: 8595A-1EIQ24NN, 4629A-9603N, 2361A-MLINK900 or 27118-AMU900 Made in Canada with domestic and imported parts
1 2 3 4 | Autho Letter from test lab | Cover Letter(s) | 443.78 KiB | June 09 2021 |
APPLIED TEST LAB INC. UUnniitt 44117744,, 33996611--5522 AAvvee.. NNEE CCaallggaarryy,, AABB.. CCaannaaddaa TT33JJ--00JJ88 TTeell:: ((440033)) 559900--88770011 FFaaxx:: ((440033)) 559900--88557711 EEmmaaiill:: ssaallee@@aapppplliieeddtteessttllaabb..ccoomm Test Lab Attestation Letter Date of Test: May 17-2021 to May 21-2021 Applicant Name: Blackline Safety Corp. FCC ID: Cellular: XPY1EIQ24NN, Iridium: Q639603N, ISM:
KQNMLINK900 or 2AZEH-AMU900 IC Certification Number: Cellular: XPY1EIQ24NN, Iridium: Q639603N, ISM: 2361A-
MLINK900 or 27118-AMU900 Test Items: 103989 Jaeheon Yun Name of Engineer Performing Test:
Applied Test Lab Inc. declares that this Unit has been tested in accordance with the test method identified in this test report and that we observed it being tested. It also declares that the Unit complies with the relevant limits. All instrumentation and accessories used to test this unit for compliance to the indicated test method are calibrated regularly in accordance with ISO 17025:2017 requirements by laboratories accredited by ANAB for the measurement parameters. Applied Test Lab Inc. Unit 4174-3961 52nd Avenue NE Calgary, Alberta, T3J 0J8 Statement of Compliance:
The measurements were made at:
Test Lab Witness: Adiseshu Nyshadham Signature of Test Lab Witness:
Full Name, Typed: Adiseshu Nyshadham Title of Witness: President Email Address: adin@appliedtestlab.com Phone No.: 403-590-8701
1 2 3 4 | C2PC Cover Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 64.75 KiB | June 09 2021 |
Certification Declaration Doc id: UBX-21016621 Rev.: 1.0 Date: 10-May-2021 FCC Class II and ISED Class IV Permissive Change Request Issued by:
u-blox AG Zrcherstrasse 68 CH-8800 Thalwil, Switzerland Phone: +41 44 722 74 44 Fax:
+41 44 722 74 47 email: info@u-blox.com Subject:
FCC Class II Permissive Change and ISED Class IV Permissive Change request on:
FCC ID:
ISED:
XPY1EIQ24NN Original FCC Date of Grant: 10/24/2017 8595A-1EIQ24NN Original ISED Approval Date: 2017-10-24 To whom it may concern, We, u-blox AG, grantee and manufacturer of the above indicated module FCC ID XPY1EIQ24NN /
ISED certification number 8595A-1EIQ24NN, pursuant FCC 47 CFR 2.1043 and ISED RSP-100 Issue 12 Section 10.4, hereby request the evaluation of an FCC Class II Permissive Change and an ISED Class IV Permissive Change as described below. Our device is going to be integrated in the G7 Bridge host device of Blackline Safety Corp.:
Model:
HMN:
G7 Bridge 103989 The main changes in the modular approval conditions granted to our module, once integrated in the G7 Bridge host device of Blackline Safety Corp. will be as follows:
The module will be used in portable exposure conditions. Yours sincerely, ___________________________________________________ Giulio Comar, Certification Manager, u-blox AG Author Giulio Comar Department:
cert Page: 1/1 Filename FCC_XPY1EIQ24NN_C2PC_ISED_8595A-1EIQ24NN_C4PC_G7_Bridge.docx Copyright u-blox AG. All rights reserved Confidential M102 Rev. 1
1 2 3 4 | Op Desc Ant | Operational Description | 3.09 MiB | June 09 2021 |
G7 Bridge Model 103989 Antenna Compliance with Cellular Module Integration Requirements 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 1 Document Revision History Revision 1 2 Date June 3, 2021 Author Scott Jacobsen Summary Initial Release The purpose of this report is to show the radio frequency (RF) exposure compliance of the cellular module integration on G7 Bridge Model 103989 2 Purpose of this Report 3 Identifiers Product Name: G7 Bridge 3.1 Host Product Model: 103989 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com Module 3.2 Description Cellular Module Identifiers Model FCC ID IC ID Grantee LARA-R202 XPY1EIQ24NN 8595A-1EIQ24NN u-blox AG Frequency Band Antennas 3.3 Cellular Vendor Model Blackline Safety PCB Trace Peak Gain(dBi) Data Sheet Reference See section 3.5 Module Grant Requirements XPY1EIQ24NN Output Power is conducted. This device is certified for use in mobile and fixed applications;
3.4 where the transmitter antenna(s) is at least 20cm from all persons. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter antenna, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. To meet the MPE RF Exposure, ERP and EIRP limits, the antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed:
9.8 dBi at 700 MHz;
10.0 dBi at 850 MHz;
6.5 dBi at 1700 MHz and 8.7 dBi at 1900 MHz. End users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions and installation instructions for satisfying compliance. This filing is only applicable for: 700 MHz LTE; 850 MHz Cell; 1700 MHz WCDMA and 1900 MHz PCS operations. The Grantee is responsible for providing the documentation required for modular use. The responsibility for use of this module in all configurations remains with the Grantee. 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 3.5 Requirement Maximum Gain 9.8 dBi 10.0 dBi 6.5 dBi 8.7 dBi Comparison of Antenna Gain with Module Requirements Actual Peak Gain Across Band
-3.3 dBi
-2.2 dBi
-0.5 dBi
-0.8 dBi Band 700 MHz 850 MHz 1700 MHz 1900 MHz 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 3.6 Sample Radiation Patterns 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 3.7 Antenna Measurement Assembly 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 3.8 Test Setup Pictures 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com 4 Statement of Compliance The gain values found for Blackline cellular antenna in G7 Bridge Model 103989 are below the maximum allowed levels according to module integration requirements. 100, 803 24th Ave SE, Calgary, AB, T2G 1P5, Canada | www.blacklinesafety.com SPECIFICATION Iridium Certified Part No.
IP.1621.25.4.A.02 Product Name
: 4mm thick Iridium Patch Antenna, 1621MHz
: 25mm*25mm*4mm ROHS Compliant Features
SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 1 of 11 1. Introduction This miniaturized ceramic Iridium patch antenna is based on smart XtremeGain technology. It is mounted via pin and double-sided adhesive and has been selected as optimal solution for the customer device environment. Iridium certifies the IP.1621.25.4.A.02 the Iridium Communications systems. for commercial use in connection with 2. Key Antenna Performance Indicators Original Patch Specification tested on 50*50mm ground No Parameter Specification Notes Range of Receiving Frequency 1616~1626.5Mhz Center Frequency 1621MHz 3MHz Plane Gain at Zenith
+2.0dBi typ. Center Frequency Gain at 10 Elevation Bandwidth VSWR Axial Ratio Polarization Impedance Frequency Temp Coefficient 16MHz 1.5 max
3 dB Max RHCP 50
(Tf) 020ppm/C
-40C to +85C Operating Temperature
-40C to +85C Antenna Weight 10g with 50*50mm GND Return Loss -10dB Center Frequency Center Frequency Center Frequency plane 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 2 of 11 3. Mechanical Specifications 3.1 Shape and Dimension SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 3 of 11 3.2 Layout 3.3 Mark SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 4 of 11 3.4Test Jig and Dimensions 3.5 Test Fixture Antenna Setup and Measurements SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 5 of 11 4. Performance testing and results SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 6 of 11 SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 7 of 11 Plane Max Gain(dBi) Min Gain(dBi) Avg. Gain(dBi) XZ YZ 2.72/1.00 3.00/358.99
-6.84/104
-7.57/101.85
-1.05
-0.86 SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 8 of 11 Axial Ratio SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 9 of 11 5. Packaging Per Tray: 50 pieces Per Carton(Inside Box) 4 Trays = 200 pieces Outer Carton (Outside Box) 4 Cartons = 800 pieces SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 10 of 11 Taoglas makes no warranties based on the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice. Taoglas reserves all rights to this document and the information contained herein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express permission is strictly prohibited. Copyright 2012, Taoglas Ltd. SPE-11-8-017/D/SS Page 11 of 11 Murandi Communications Ltd. Innovative Radio Frequency Solutions MLink Antenna Specification Revision Draft Feb 10, 2014 Murandi Communications Ltd. 106, 4715 - 13th St. NE, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, T2E 6M3 email murandi@murandi.com Tel: (403) 777-9988 www.murandi.com Fax: (403) 777-9989 Confidential and Proprietary MLink Antenna Specification Page 2 2/19/2014 4:35 PM Table of Contents 1 REVISION HISTORY ............................................................................................................... 2 2 ABBREVIATIONS .................................................................................................................... 2 3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................. 3 4 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 3 5 ANTENNA SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................... 3 6 REVISIONS .............................................................................................................................. 4 1 Revision History Revision Draft Date Feb 10, 2014 Description Initial release The details of each revision are captured in Revision Details Section 6. 2 Abbreviations Abbreviation Description Attn BW dB dBc dBi dBm FCC FHSS GPS IC ISM ISR kHz LCD LED LNA mA mcd MHz mm msec mV PA PLL ppm RBW RF RTC attenuator bandwidth decibel decibel relative to carrier power decibel relative to an isotropic antenna decibel relative to 1 milliwatt federal communications commission frequency hopping spread spectrum global positioning system Industry Canada industrial, scientific and medical interrupt service routine kilohertz liquid crystal display light emitting diode low noise amplifier milliampere millicandle mega-hertz millimeter millisecond millivolt power amplifier phase locked loop parts per million resolution bandwidth radio frequency Real time clock Murandi Communications Ltd. 106, 4715 - 13th St. NE, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, T2E 6M3 email murandi@murandi.com Tel: (403) 777-9988 www.murandi.com Fax: (403) 777-9989 Confidential and Proprietary MLink Antenna Specification Page 3 2/19/2014 4:35 PM Abbreviation Description TBC TBD TRP A TDD UART V W to be confirmed to be determined total radiated power microampere Time division duplex universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter volts width 3 Reference Documents 1. MLink Circuit Description Draft, Feb 10, 2014 2. MLink Block Diagrams Draft, Feb 10, 2014 3. Schematics (MLINK Rev 3.pdf) 4. Bill of Materials (MLINK Rev 3.bom) 5. Pictures (IMG_1673.jpg, IMG_1677.jpg, IMG_1680.jpg, IMG_1682.jpg, IMG_1684.jpg, &
IMG_1695.jpg) 4 Introduction This document contains Antenna Specifications for the Murandi Communications MLink 900 MHz transceiver as part of the FCC & IC submission. 5 Antenna Specification MLink 900 integral antenna performance was measured in the following orientation:
Z X Y Murandi Communications Ltd. 106, 4715 - 13th St. NE, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, T2E 6M3 email murandi@murandi.com Tel: (403) 777-9988 www.murandi.com Fax: (403) 777-9989 Confidential and Proprietary MLink Antenna Specification Page 4 2/19/2014 4:35 PM The following results obtained:
The peak antenna gain is 2.4 dBi in the vertical polarization. 6 Revisions Murandi Communications Ltd. 106, 4715 - 13th St. NE, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, T2E 6M3 email murandi@murandi.com Tel: (403) 777-9988 www.murandi.com Fax: (403) 777-9989 Confidential and Proprietary
1 2 3 4 | Power of Attorney Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 56.60 KiB | June 09 2021 |
Power of Attorney Doc id: UBX-21016622 Rev.: 1.0 Date: 10-May-2021 Authorization to act as Agent Issued by:
u-blox AG Zrcherstrasse 68 CH-8800 Thalwil, Switzerland Phone: +41 44 722 74 44 Fax:
+41 44 722 74 47 email: info@u-blox.com Subject:
Authorization to act as Agent for:
FCC ID:
ISED:
XPY1EIQ24NN Original FCC Date of Grant: 10/24/2017 8595A-1EIQ24NN Original ISED Approval Date: 2017-10-24 To whom it may concern. We, u-blox AG, grantee and manufacturer of the above indicated module FCC ID XPY1EIQ24NN /
ISED certification number 8595A-1EIQ24NN, hereby authorize Scott Jacobsen of Blackline Safety Corp. (Unit 100, 803 24 Avenue SE - Calgary, AB T2G 1P5 - Canada) to act as our agent in all matters relating to applications for FCC ID XPY1EIQ24NN and ISED certification number 8595A-1EIQ24NN equipment authorization, including the signing of all documents relating to these matters. The present authorization considers the development of documents on behalf of the client, written under his own letterhead and related to the necessary information to be provided on his behalf to complete the certification process. We also hereby certify that neither we nor any party to this application are subject to a denial of U.S. Federal benefits, which include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, U.S.C. 862 because of conviction for possession or distribution of controlled substance. This authorisation is applicable to the product:
FCC ID:
ISED:
XPY1EIQ24NN 8595A-1EIQ24NN Expiration date for the authorization to act as Agent: November 10, 2021 Yours sincerely, ___________________________________________________ Giulio Comar, Certification Manager, u-blox AG Author Giulio Comar Department:
cert Page: 1/1 Filename FCC_XPY1EIQ24NN_ISED_8595A-1EIQ24NN_Authorization_to_act_as_Agent_Blackline_Safety.docx Copyright u-blox AG. All rights reserved Confidential M102 Rev. 1
1 2 3 4 | Agent Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 163.97 KiB | February 14 2020 |
Doe id: UBX-19034641
@blox Certification Declaration Rev.: 2.0 Date: 05-Aug-2019 Authorization letter Issued by: u-blox AG Zurcherstrasse 68 CH-8800 Thalwil / Switzerland Phone: +41 44 722 74 44 Fax: +414472274 47 email: info@u-blox.com We, u-blox AG, hereby authorize: Scott Jacobsen of Blackline Safety located in Calgary, Alberta to act as our agent in all matters relating to applications for equipment authorization, including the signing of all documents relating to these matters. The present authorization considers the development of documents on behalf of the client, written under his own letterhead and related to the necessary information to be provided on his behalf to complete the certification process. We also hereby certify that neither we nor any party to this application are subject to a denial of U.S. Federal benefits, which include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, U.S.C. 862 because of conviction for possession or distribution of controlled substance. This authorisation is applicable to the product:
Model: LARA-R202 FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN ISED: 8595A-1EIQ24NN This agreement expires six months from the current date. Yours sincerely, omar, Certification Manager italia S.p.A.con socio unico Via Stazione di Prosecco, 15 34010 - Sgonico (Trieste) Italy Italia S.p.A. is a wholly owned subsidiary of u-blox AG Author Giulio Comar Department: cert Page:
Filename _BlacklineSafety_LARA-R202_Letter_of_Authorization_2.0.docx M102 Rave Copyright 2016 u-blox Italia S.p.A. All rights reserved Confidential n
1 2 3 4 | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 152.86 KiB | February 14 2020 |
Doc id: UBX-19034640
@ blox Certification Declaration Rev.:1.0 Date: 05-Aug-2019 FCC Class Il and ISED Class IV Permissive Change Request Issued by: u-blox AG Zurcherstrasse 68 CH-8800 Thalwil / Switzerland Phone: +41 44 722 74 44 Fax: +414472274 47 email: info@u-blox.com Subject: FCC Class II Permissive Change and ISED Class IV Permissive Change request on:
Model: LARA-R202 FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN ISED: 8595A-1EIQ24NN Dear Examiner, For the above indicated device and pursuant FCC 2.1043 and IC RSP-100 Sec. 7.5 we, u-blox AG, hereby request the evaluation of a FCC Class II and a ISED Class IV permissive change as described below. Our device is going to be integrated in the G7C device:
Model: G7c HMN: G7C-NA2 The main changes in the modular approval conditions granted to our module, once integrated in the G7C device will be as follows:
- The module will be used in portable exposure conditions. Yours sincerely,
(Ug LOteEeZe =
OE NKKEL Zs, Byes Certification Manager u-blox Italia S.p.A.con socio unico Via Stazione di Prosecco, 15 34010 - Sgonico (Trieste) Italy u-blox Italia S.p.A. is a wholly owned subsidiary of u-blox AG Author Giulio Comar Department: cert Page: 1/1 Filename _ BlacklineSafety_G7C_LARA-R202_FCC-C2PC_ISED-C4PC.docx M102 Rev.1 Copyright 2016 u-blox Italia S.p.A. All rights reserved Confidential
1 2 3 4 | Confidential Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 106.65 KiB | February 14 2020 |
100, 803 24th Ave SE Calgary, Alberta, Canada T2G 1P5 Feb 5, 2020 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request regarding application for Class 2 Permissive Change of FCC ID: 1EIQ24NN Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
Exhibit Type Internal Photos File Name G7C_NA2_int Photos.pdf Internal Photos and Proprietary Data G7C_NA2_Cellular_Antenna_Gain_Compliance.pdf The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. A portion of the G7C circuitry is covered with epoxy to ensure intrinsically safe operation of the product. The epoxy also serves to conceal a proprietary circuit. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Barry Moore, VP Product Development
1 2 3 4 | FCC Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 398.50 KiB |
Doc ID: UBX-17015679
@b i Ox Certification Declaration Rev.: 1.0 Date: 16/05/2017 FCC Authority to act as Agent Issued by:
u-blox AG Zurcherstrasse 68 CH-8800 Thalwil / Switzerland Phone: +41 44 722 74 44 Fax: +41 44722 7447 info@u-blox.com Subject: Agent letter for FCC ID: XPY1DIQN3NN, XPY1EIQ24NN To Whom It May Concern:
u-blox AG declares that 7layers AG Borsigstr. 11 40880 Ratingen Germany e-mail: info@7Layers.com, Phone: +49 2102 7490 Fax: +49 2102 749350 is authorized to act on our behalf, until otherwise notified, for applications to American Certification Body, Inc. (ACB) 6731 Whittier Avenue. Suite110 Mclean, VA 22101 We certify that we are not subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. Agency Agreement Expiration Date: May 16, 2018 Thank you,
- of za Marco Barchitta, Senior Certification Engineer u-blox Italia S.p.A.con socio unico Via Stazione di Prosecco, 15 34010 - Sgonico (Trieste) Italy u-blox Italia S.p.A. is a wholly owned subsidiary of u-blox AG Author Marco Barchitta Department: cert Page: 1/1 Filename FCC Authority Letter to act as Agent_LARA-R2-1.docx 1 : :
bilge Copyright 2013 u-blox Italia S.p.A. All rights reserved Confidential
1 2 3 4 | FCC modular approval AT | Cover Letter(s) | 362.98 KiB |
FCC Federal Communications Commission Contact Phone Fax Andreas Tbel
+49 (0) 2102 749 336
+49 (0) 2102 749 990 Modular Approval Request - FCC ID: XPY1EIQ24NN Dear Application Examiner, the module LARA-R202 is seeking FCC authorization as a modular transmitter. The requirement of the FCC part 15.212 are met. The following requirements are fulfilled:
1. The modular transmitter must have its own RF shielding The radio portion of the module has its own RF shielding. 2. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs The module has a memory management unit inside of the IC. It buffers the data inputs. 3. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation The IC contains an own voltage regulation. In case of changes in the supply voltage VCC (for example caused by temperature changes or other effects), the internal voltage will be stabilized. 4. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna requirements of Section 15.203 and 15.204c Not applicable to licensed transmitters. Module is professionally installed and antenna gain is listed in the installation instructions. 5. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration The EUT was tested in a stand-alone configuration. 6. The modular transmitter must be labelled with its own FCC ID number The Module is labelled with its own FCC ID. 1 | P a g e 7. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rule or operating requirements applicable to the transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. The EUT is compliant with all applicable FCC rules. 8. The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements. This device has been assessed for mobile use and complies with the limits. Please contact us if you have any additional questions. Best Regards, Andreas Tbel Project Manager 7layers GmbH Date: 2017-09-21 Signature:
7layers a Bureau Veritas Group Company www.7layers.com 2 of 2
1 2 3 4 | TCB Request for Confidentiality LARA-R2 | Cover Letter(s) | 849.59 KiB |
Doc ID: UBX-17015680 ab : OX Certification Declaration Rev.: 2.0 Date: 19/07/2017 Short-Term Confidentiality:
The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view for a period of 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Applicant is also aware that they are responsible to notify ACB in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public. ACB will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-1705. NOTE for Industry Canada Applications:
The applicant understands that until such time that IC distinguishes between Short Term and Permanent Confidentiality, the above items marked as short-term confidential will be simply treated as non-confidential when submitted to ISED. y vr : f og 7 Marco chitta, Senior Engineer Certification u-bloxttalia S.p.A.con socio unico Via Stazione di Prosecco, 15 34010 - Sgonico (Trieste) Italy U-blox Italia S.p.A. is a wholly owned subsidiary of u-blox AG Author Marco Barchitta Department: cert Page: 2/2 Filename TCB Request for Confidentiality LARA-R2_vO_2.docx M102 Rev. 4 Copyright 2013 u-blox Italia S.p.A. All rights reserved Confidential
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2021-06-09 | 1860 ~ 1900 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2020-02-14 | 1860 ~ 1900 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
3 | 2017-10-24 | 1860 ~ 1900 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Original Equipment |
4 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2021-06-09
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2020-02-14
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2017-10-24
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
u-blox AG
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0019077858
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
Zuercherstrasse 68
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Thalwil, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Thalwil
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Thalwil, Ch-8800
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Switzerland
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@acbcert.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
XPY
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
1EIQ24NN
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
G**** C********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
Certification Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
+3904********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
+3904********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
g******@u-blox.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
u-blox
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
G**** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
Zuercherstrasse 68
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Thalwil, CH-8800
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Switzerland
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
+4144********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
+4144********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
41447********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
g******@u-blox.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 04/22/2018 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | UMTS/HSPA/LTE Data and Voice Module | ||||
1 2 3 4 | UMTS / LTE Module | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Output Power is conducted. This device is certified for use in mobile and fixed applications; where the transmitter antenna(s) is at least 20 cm from all persons. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter antenna, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. To meet the MPE RF Exposure, ERP, and EIRP limits, the antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 9.8 dBi at 700 MHz; 10.0 dBi at 850 MHz; 6.5 dBi at 1700 MHz, and 8.7 dBi at 1900 MHz. End-users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions and installation instructions for satisfying compliance. This filing is only applicable for: 700 MHz LTE; 850 MHz Cell; 1700 MHz WCDMA and 1900 MHz PCS operations. The Grantee is responsible for providing the documentation required for modular use. The responsibility for use of this module in all configurations remains with the Grantee. Class II Permissive Change: Mobile use in model G7 Bridge of Blackline Safety Corp. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Output Power is conducted. This device is certified for use in mobile and fixed applications; where the transmitter antenna(s) is at least 20 cm from all persons. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter antenna, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. To meet the MPE RF Exposure, ERP and EIRP limits, the antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed: 9.8 dBi at 700 MHz; 10.0 dBi at 850 MHz; 6.5 dBi at 1700 MHz and 8.7 dBi at 1900 MHz. End users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions and installation instructions for satisfying compliance. This filing is only applicable for: 700 MHz LTE; 850 MHz Cell; 1700 MHz WCDMA and 1900 MHz PCS operations. The Grantee is responsible for providing the documentation required for modular use. The responsibility for use of this module in all configurations remains with the Grantee. Class II Permissive Change: Portable use in Model G7C-NA2 Gas Detector. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head (face) and body-worn accessory, and simultaneous transmission exposure conditions are 0.89 W/kg, 0.65 W/kg and 1.29 W/kg, respectively. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output Power is conducted. This device is certified for use in mobile and fixed applications; where the transmitter antenna(s) is at least 20cm from all persons. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter antenna, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. To meet the MPE RF Exposure, ERP and EIRP limits, the antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed: 9.8 dBi at 700 MHz; 10.0 dBi at 850 MHz; 6.5 dBi at 1700 MHz and 8.7 dBi at 1900 MHz. End users and installers must be provided with transmitter operating conditions and installation instructions for satisfying compliance. This filing is only applicable for: 700 MHz LTE; 850 MHz Cell; 1700 MHz WCDMA and 1900 MHz PCS operations. The Grantee is responsible for providing the documentation required for modular use. The responsibility for use of this module in all configurations remains with the Grantee. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | This device contains also WCDMA/LTE transmitters. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
APPLIED TEST LAB INC.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
7layers GmbH
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
A******** N******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
B****** R******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
403-5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
0049 ********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
0049 ********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
A******@APPLIEDTESTLAB.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
B******@7layers.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | BC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.228 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.267 | 0.1 ppm | 4M09F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 22H | BC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.1995 | 0.1 ppm | 4M53G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1963 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1607 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 24E | BC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.2223 | 0.1 ppm | 9M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 24E | BC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.1803 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.2143 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.1679 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.2344 | 0.1 ppm | 13M7G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.1914 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.2213 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.1734 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.2065 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 27 | BC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.1675 | 0.1 ppm | 4M55W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.1656 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | BC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.228 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.267 | 0.1 ppm | 4M09F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 22H | BC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.1995 | 0.1 ppm | 4M53G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1963 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1607 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 24E | BC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.2223 | 0.1 ppm | 9M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 7 | 24E | BC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.1803 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 8 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.2143 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 9 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.1679 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.2344 | 0.1 ppm | 13M7G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 11 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.1914 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 12 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.2213 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 13 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.1734 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 14 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.2065 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 15 | 27 | BC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.1675 | 0.1 ppm | 4M55W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 16 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.1656 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | BC | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.228 | 0.1 ppm | 4M11F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.267 | 0.1 ppm | 4M09F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 22H | BC | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.1995 | 0.1 ppm | 4M53G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1963 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 22H | BC | 829 | 844 | 0.1607 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 24E | BC | 1855 | 1905 | 0.2223 | 0.1 ppm | 9M09G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 7 | 24E | BC | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.1803 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 8 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.2143 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 9 | 24E | BC | 1860 | 1900 | 0.1679 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.2344 | 0.1 ppm | 13M7G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 11 | 27 | BC | 1717.5 | 1747.5 | 0.1914 | 0.1 ppm | 13M6W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 12 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.2213 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 13 | 27 | BC | 1720 | 1745 | 0.1734 | 0.1 ppm | 18M3W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 14 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.2065 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06G7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 15 | 27 | BC | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.1675 | 0.1 ppm | 4M55W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 16 | 27 | BC | 704 | 711 | 0.1656 | 0.1 ppm | 9M06W7D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15B |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC